I-Vu Link Overview and Configuration 808-891r1

Comfort Controller
Overview and Configuration

Manual
Overview ..................................................................... 1 Stepper Motor Output ........................................... 80
Temperature Input ................................................. 83
Introduction ............................................................... 5 Voltage Input ......................................................... 86
Hardware Overview ................................................ 5 Voltage Output ...................................................... 89
Comfort Controller 6400 ................................ 5
Comfort Controller 1600 ................................ 7 How To Configure Algorithms ............................... 93
Software Overview ................................................. 9 AO-Adaptive Control ............................................ 95
Algorithms ..................................................... 9 AO-Cooling CV .................................................. 105
Configuration Overview ....................................... 10 AO-Cooling VAV ............................................... 118
Interpreting Flow Diagrams .................................. 10 AO-Fan Tracking ................................................ 131
Custom Programming ........................................... 12 AO-Heating CV .................................................. 141
Foreign Language Conversion .............................. 12 AO-Heating VAV ............................................... 155
AO-Humidity Control ......................................... 170
How To Configure a Newly Installed AO-Mixed Air CV w IAQ .................................. 179
Comfort Controller ................................................. 13 AO-Mixed Air VAV w IAQ ............................... 197
Introduction ........................................................... 13 AO-Permissive Intrlock ...................................... 213
Configuration Process ........................................... 14 AO-Reset ............................................................. 221
Creating the Database .................................. 14 AO-Shared Transducer ........................................ 231
Configuring the Database ............................. 20 AO-Static Pressure .............................................. 247
Downloading a Controller ..................................... 20 DO-Analog Comparison ..................................... 255
DO-DX Staging VAV ......................................... 262
How to Modify an Existing Comfort Controller DO-Electric Heat CV .......................................... 278
Database .................................................................... 23 DO-Electric Heat VAV ....................................... 294
DO-Enthalpy Comparison ................................... 311
How To Configure Points ....................................... 27 DO-Interlock ....................................................... 317
Analog Software Point .......................................... 28 DO-Lighting Control ........................................... 322
Custom Milliamp Input ......................................... 30 DO-Permissive Intrlock ...................................... 326
Custom Milliamp Output ...................................... 35 DO-Prop Thermo Elec ........................................ 335
Custom Voltage Input ........................................... 40 DO-Prop Thermo 2 Pipe ..................................... 347
Custom Voltage Output ........................................ 45 DO-Prop Thermo 4 Pipe ..................................... 358
Discrete Output ..................................................... 50 DO-Pump Control ............................................... 369
Discrete Software Point ........................................ 55 DO-Staged Thermostat ....................................... 381
Latched Discrete Input .......................................... 57 DO-Staging ......................................................... 393
Milliamp Input ...................................................... 59 DO-Time Clock ................................................... 406
Milliamp Output .................................................... 63 DO-Time Clock w Check ................................... 413
Network Input Point .............................................. 66 AOSS Schedule ................................................... 423
Network Output Point ........................................... 70 Network Broadcast .............................................. 440
Pulsed Discrete Input ............................................ 73 Linkage/AOSS Schedule ..................................... 444
Sensed Discrete Input ............................................ 77 NTFC w Enthalpy Check .................................... 466
This document is the property of Carrier Corporation and is delivered on the express condition that it is not to be disclosed,
reproduced in whole or in part, or used for manufacture by anyone other than Carrier Corporation without its written consent, and
that no right is granted to disclose or so use any information contained in said document.
Carrier reserves the right to change or modify the information or product described without prior notice and without incurring any
liability.
© 1999, Carrier Corporation Printed in U.S.A. 808-891 Rev. 4/99

Occupancy ........................................................... 477 Appendix H
Sensor Group ....................................................... 478 Quickstart ............................................................ 641
WSM Air Source ................................................. 484
WSM Cool Source .............................................. 490 Index ....................................................................... 653
How To Configure Schedules ............................... 495

Holiday Schedule ................................................ 496
Network Time Schedule ...................................... 498
Setpoint Schedule ................................................ 499
Time Schedule ..................................................... 501
How To Configure Alarms ................................... 511 Caution Before changing an existing Comfort
Discrete State Alarm ........................................... 512 Controller database, please read the
First Out Alarm ................................................... 520 section How to Modify an Existing
Limit Alarm ......................................................... 529 Comfort Controller Database. If you do
Number of Starts Alarm ...................................... 538 not follow these procedures, the Com-
Runtime Alarm .................................................... 545 fort Controller database could become
Setpoint Limit Alarm .......................................... 552 corrupt, causing your Comfort Control-
ler to operate improperly.
How To Configure System Functions .................. 563
Analog Trace Point ............................................. 566
Ctlr-ID ................................................................. 571
Consumable ......................................................... 572
Database Status ................................................... 573
Discrete Trace Point ............................................ 575
Internal Consumable ........................................... 580
LID Processor ..................................................... 583
Real Time Clock ................................................. 587
Runtime ............................................................... 592
Configuration Sheets ............................................. 593
Appendix A
CCN Compatibility ............................................. 613
Appendix B
Standard Input and Output Devices .................... 617
Appendix C
Allowable Entries for AI/AO Display Units ....... 622
Appendix D
Allowable Entries for DI/DO Display Units ....... 623
Appendix E
Alarm Information .............................................. 624
Appendix F
LID Operation ..................................................... 627
Appendix G
How To Configure a Newly Installed Comfort
Controller Using a LID ....................................... 635
ii
Manual
Revisions
The Comfort Controller Overview and Configuration Manual is
catalog number 808-891, Rev. 4/99. This manual replaces the Comfort
Controller Overview and Configuration Manual catalog number 808-
891, Rev. 3/97. It reflects Comfort Controller software version
number 1.5. The following changes have been made since the
3/97 version.
Section/Chapter Changes
How To Configure
Algorithms 1. Under the explanation of the AO—Cooling VAV algorithm,
corrected the default values for the Reset Ratio decision.
2. Revised the following figures:

• The block diagram for the AO–Humidity Control algorithm
(Figure 5-7).
• The block diagram for the AO–Mixed Air VAV w IAQ

algorithm (Figure 5-9).
• The block diagram for the DO–Prop Thermo 2 Pipe

algorithm (Figure 5-24).
3. Revised the Allowable Entries for the Cooling Prop Gain and
Heating Prop Gain (under the Thermostat function) for the
following algorithms: DO–Prop Thermo Electric, DO–Prop
Thermo 2 Pipe, and DO–Prop Thermo 4 Pipe.
4. In the AOSS Schedule algorithm's List of Maintenance

Decisions, under Adaptive Optimal Start, revised the Valid
Display values for the Start Bias decision.
5. In the Linkage/AOSS Schedule algorithm's List of Maintenance

Decisions, under Adaptive Optimal Start, revised the Valid
Display values for the Start Bias decision.
6. In the NTFC w Enthalpy Check algorithm's List of

Configuration Decisions, revised the Enthalpy Switch decision.
iii
Section/Chapter Changes
Appendix B, Standard
Input and Output Devices 7. Revised Types 1 and 2 in the Analog Output Types (Voltage)
table.
iv
Overview
Overview
This manual contains information about the operations of the Comfort

About this Manual Controller product family and how you must configure the controllers
to perform those operations. The table below describes the contents of
this manual.
Chapter Name Page Description
Overview 1 Presents an overview of the manual and

lists other required documentation.
Introduction 5 Provides an overview of the Comfort

Controller product family and discusses
the differences between the Comfort
Controller 1600 and Comfort Controller
6400. This section also provides a con-
figuration overview, flow diagrams
overview, and a description of custom
programming and foreign language
conversion.
How To 13 Provides the procedure for configuring

Configure a a newly installed Comfort Controller
Newly Installed using the Building Supervisor or Network
Comfort Controller Service Tool. It also provides instructions
for downloading an existing Comfort
Controller database to a new Comfort
Controller.
How to Modify 23 Describes the operations that change the

an Existing Comfort Comfort Controller database and require
Controller Database you to remove, add, and upload the con-
troller to each PC that contains its old
database.
How To 27 Provides the following information for

Configure each point: purpose, typical application,
Points list of required and optional configura-
tion decisions, and a description of each
decision that includes allowable entries
and default values. This chapter also
includes a list of applicable maintenance
decisions and a description of each one.
1
How To 93 This chapter provides the following

Configure information for each analog, discrete,
Algorithms and global algorithm: purpose,
typical application, block diagram
illustrating flow of inputs and outputs,
list of required and optional configura-
tion decisions, and a description of each

Configure information for each schedule:
Schedules purpose, typical application, list of
required and optional configuration
decisions, and a description of each

Configure information for each alarm: purpose,
Alarms typical application, block diagram
illustrating flow of inputs and outputs,
list of required and optional configura-
tion decision that includes allowable
entries and default values. This section
also includes a list of maintenance
decision and a description of each
maintenance decision.
2

Configure information for each system function:
System Functions purpose, typical application, list of
required and optional configuration
decisions and a description of each
decision that includes allowable
entries and default values. This
chapter also includes a list of appli-
cable maintenance decisions and a
description of each one.
Configuration 593 This chapter contains perforated

Sheets configuration sheets for the Comfort
Controller.
Appendix A 613 This appendix lists the CCN system

elements that are compatible with the
Comfort Controller.
Appendix B 617 This appendix lists the engineering

units, ranges, resolutions, and accu-
racy for the standard input and output
devices supported by the Comfort
Controller.
Appendix C 622 This appendix lists the allowable

entries for analog input/analog output
display units.
Appendix D 623 This appendix lists the allowable

entries for discrete input/discrete
output display units.
Appendix E 624 This appendix lists alarm levels, alarm

sources, alarm description indexes,
and standard control characters for
alarm messages.
3
Appendix F 627 This appendix describes the Local

Interface Device’s (LID’s) menu
structure, default screen, keypad and
display. This appendix also provides
instructions for logging on and access-
ing items in both the status and edit
modes.
Appendix G 635 This appendix provides instructions

for configuring a newly installed
Comfort Controller using a LID.
Appendix H 641 This appendix, called Quickstart, is a

handy reference that provides you
with forms and reference sheets to
configure the Comfort Controller as
quickly as possible. This tear-out
section provides the best way to
quickly see the big configuration
picture plus some important details.
This manual makes reference to the following CCN manuals. All of

Other Required these manuals are available from Carrier Literature Distribution.
Documentation
• BEST++ Programmer’s Reference Manual (808-893)
• Building Supervisor III Operation Manual (808-758)
• Data Collection III Option Overview and Configuration Manual
(808-705)
4
Introduction
Introduction
The Comfort Controller product family provides general purpose

HVAC control and monitoring capability in a stand-alone or network
environment using closed-loop, direct digital control. This product
family can also control and monitor equipment such as lighting,
pumps, and cooling towers. The Comfort Controller product family
gives the Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) the capability to control
non-Carrier equipment and Carrier HVAC equipment not equipped
with Product Integrated Controls (PICs).
You configure the Comfort Controller to contain a database of the

algorithms, points, schedules, alarms and system functions that are
necessary to control and monitor the equipment at your site. You
enter the configuration data using the following CCN operator inter-
face devices:
• Network Service Tool III

• Building Supervisor III
• Local Interface Device (LID)
• ComfortWORKS
There are two types of Comfort Controllers:

Hardware
Overview Comfort Controller 6400
Comfort Controller 1600
Both controllers provide the same functions, such as:
• HVAC Control
• proportional, integral, and derivative (PID) loop control
• scheduling
• custom programming
Comfort Controller You can connect 16 field points (8 inputs and 8 outputs) to the Com-
6400 fort Controller 6400, also known as the 6400. To connect additional
field points, add optional input/output modules (8 inputs and 8 outputs
per module) to the Comfort Controller 6400. By using multiple I/O
modules, you can connect 48 additional points to the Comfort Con-
troller 6400, giving you the capability to control and/or monitor a total
of up to 64 field points. The appropriate number of I/O modules are
selected for each control situation and simply installed along with the
6400 in your field-selected NEMA-1 enclosure.
5
Figure 2-1 Figure 2-1 illustrates one possible way to connect 40 points.
Example of Hardware
Configuration
Comfort Controller 6400: 16 I/O field points
1st 6400-I/O Output Module: 16 I/O field points
2nd 6400-I/O Output Module: + 8 Input field points
40 I/O field points
Figure 2-2 lists the sensors and devices supported by the Comfort
Controller 6400’s I/O channels. To determine these sensors and
devices engineering units, ranges, resolutions, and accuracy, refer to
Appendix B.
Figure 2-2
Sensors and Devices 8 INPUTS
Supported by the
Channels Specifications
1 to 8 Discrete, analog, or temperature
Discrete
Dry contact
Pulsed dry contact
Analog
4-20 mA (2 wire and 4 wire)
0-10 Vdc
Temperature
5K & 10K ohm thermistors (YSI and MCI)
1K ohm nickel RTD (MCI and NTC)
8 OUTPUTS
9 to 16 Discrete or analog
Discrete
24 Vdc@80 mA
Analog
4-20 mA
0-10 Vdc
6
The Comfort Controller 6400 gives you the capability to deactivate
all inputs, all outputs, or deactivate both inputs and outputs by
simply flipping a switch on the module.
The optional Comfort Controller 6400—HOA (Hand-Off-Auto)

consists of eight switches that provide you with the capability to
manually override each discrete output point.
The Comfort Controller 6400 supports the UT203 FID family of I/O
modules for retrofit applications:
• 8 Input • Low Voltage DSIO

• 8 Output • High Voltage DSIO*
• 4 Input/4 Output
* You must install High Voltage DSIO Module(s) in their own

enclosure because they contain Class 1 wiring.
Comfort Controller You can connect 16 field points (8 inputs and 8 outputs) to the
1600 Comfort Controller 1600.
Figure 2-3 on the next page lists the sensors and devices supported
by the Comfort Controller 1600’s I/O channels. To determine these
sensors and devices engineering units, ranges, resolutions, and
accuracy, refer to Appendix B.
7
Figure 2-3
Sensors and Devices 8 INPUTS
Supported by the
1 to 4 Discrete or analog (0-10 Vdc)
5&6 Temperature
7&8 Discrete, analog, or temperature
Discrete
Dry contact
Pulsed dry contact
Analog
4-20 mA (2 wire only)
0-10 Vdc
Temperature
5K & 10K ohm thermistors (YSI and MCI)
1K ohm nickel RTD (NTC)
8 OUTPUTS
1 to 4 Discrete
5&6 Analog
4-20 mA
7&8 Discrete or analog
Discrete
24 Vdc@80 mA
Analog
4-20 mA
0-10 Vdc
8
The Comfort Controller contains a “software library” and a blank
Software database. You select the algorithms, points, schedules, alarms, and
Overview system functions required for your application from the library. The
Comfort Controller stores in its database the items you select. The
size of the database is relative to the amount of space the selected
items occupy. Once you establish the database, you configure it.
Figure 2-4 Library 1. Select items Database

Relationship Between from library,
Library and Database Where you select: thus adding Where selected
•points them to the items are stored
•schedules database. and configured.
•algorithms ➔
•alarms 2. Configure the
•system functions items.
You can select more than one copy of each item, which allows you
to have multiple occurrences of the same item in the database. For
example, if your application involves controlling five air handlers,
you could select five copies of the AO—Heating CV algorithm.
Each copy (occurrence) of the algorithm would have its own con-
figuration and be independent of the others. This flexibility in
configuration gives you the capability to control and monitor HVAC
devices in the manner that you desire.
You can select items from the library until the available area in the
database is filled.
Algorithms An algorithm is a pre-engineered group of processes that provides

you with the capability to control and monitor HVAC devices in a
safe, energy efficient manner.
Each pre-engineered algorithm contains some combination of

points, schedules, systems functions, and HVAC functions that
provide information to the algorithm. A typical grouping of items
for an algorithm is shown in the flow diagram in Figure 2-5.
9
After the Comfort Controller is installed, you must create and
Configuration configure its database to meet the needs of your site’s control
Overview applications.
As you create and configure the database, you answer a series of

questions called configuration decisions. Configuration decisions
are logically grouped into configuration tables. The first tables you
must configure are Service-Config Tables. These tables define
which library items you want to add to the database. For example,
in the Service-Config Tables you specify the algorithms, alarms,
hardware and software points, and schedules needed for your appli-
cation.
After configuring the Service-Config Tables, you must configure

decisions that provide details about the library items you selected.
For example, if you selected a heating coil algorithm, you would
specify such things as the point that is controlling the air handler’s
hot water valve, the point that provides the on/off status of the air
handler’s fan, and the Adaptive Optimal Start/Stop algorithm that
provides the occupancy and temperature setpoints for the algorithm.
To determine the values to enter in the configuration decisions, refer

to the completed configuration sheets for your application. These
sheets indicate whether to use the default values or to use an opera-
tor interface to change the default values to the ones shown on the
sheets. For your convenience, the configuration sheets list all
decisions in the order in which they appear on the operator inter-
faces and in this manual.
Flow diagrams are used in this manual to illustrate the flow of

Interpreting Flow inputs and outputs among blocks of data within an algorithm, alarm,
Diagrams or schedule. The figure on the next page is the flow diagram for the
AO—Cooling VAV algorithm.
Each block of data within an algorithm, alarm, or schedule repre-

sents a configuration decision, whose name appears at the top of the
block. Each block requires one or more inputs and outputs.
10
As shown in the figure below, inputs appear on the left side of the
block with arrows pointing inward, while outputs are shown on the
right side of the block with arrows pointing outward.
One block’s output becomes another block’s input. Sometimes an

output serves as an input to more than block. When that occurs, a
filled circle is placed on the output’s arrow to indicate the location
where its direction branches off.
Logical and relational operators are often used to connect inputs and
outputs. Sample interpretations are shown on the next page.
Figure 2-5
Sample Flow Diagram
Time
Schedule
Output PID_Master Loop Cooling
Fan Status Point Coil
Maintenance Valve
Output
AND Enable
Status Output Input
Force Status
Output
Space Setpoint
Force
Low Setpoint (Low Setpoint +
High Setpoint)/2 Status
High Setpoint < Status
Occupancy State ?
Sensor Group/ VAV Supply Air

SPT Sensor Setpoint Setpoint
Reset (Software
TS Override
Point)
Status Output Input
Sensor Output
High Setpoint
Input
Low
Force
Sensor
Average Status
Status
Supply Air
Temperature
Output Sensor Input
Status
Force Status
High Humidity Switch Minimum Output
Output
OR Maximum Output
Status
Force Status
High Humidity Sensor

Output
Status > Clamp Integrator
Force Status
Reset Integrator
Humidity Setpoint
+
Occupied Low Setpoint SELECT A
1 A
Occupied High Setpoint
SELECT A O B
-3 A OR
O B
11
Figure 2-6 A
Logical and Relational > C
Operator Usage B
Interpretations
Interpretation: If A>B, then C=1 otherwise C=0
A
+ C
B
Interpretation: C=A+B
A
OR C
B
Interpretation: If A=1 or B=1, then C=1 otherwise C=0
D Select A C
-3 A
0 B
Interpretation: If D=1, then C=-3 otherwise C=0
The industry-proven, pre-engineered algorithms provide the type of

Custom control necessary for most applications, but you may want to further
Programming customize and extend them to meet any unique control require-
ments.
The custom programming language, BEST++, is available to allow
you to easily supplement or enhance the algorithms. You create and
edit custom programs using the BEST++ Programmer's Environment.
For more information on custom programming, refer to the BEST++
Programmers’s Reference Manual.
You can convert the Comfort Controller software to any language

Foreign Language whose alphabet is supported by the ANSI ASCII code set. If you
Conversion are not sure if the Comfort Controller software can be converted to
the language you desire, contact your local Carrier distributor.
12
How To Configure
a Newly Installed
Comfort Controller
How To Configure
a Newly Installed
Comfort Controller
This section provides you with the procedures that are necessary to
Introduction configure a newly installed Comfort Controller using a Building
Supervisor III. In addition, you can use the Network Service Tool,
Quickstart, or ComfortWORKS. Refer to their respective operating
instructions for configuration procedures.
When installing a Comfort Controller, you must perform a number

of steps in a particular order. These steps are grouped into two
procedures:
• Creating the Comfort Controller’s database using the Service-

Config Tables
• Configuring the database using the configuration tables
The term create, as it applies to the Comfort Controller, means to

specify information about the items being selected in the Service-
Config Tables. You must specify information such as channel
types, sensor type or units, channel names, function types and
function units. For example, the AO-Cooling CV algorithm’s
function type is 2 and its function units might be 2, which indicates
0−100%.
The term configure, as it is used in relation to the Comfort Control-

ler, means to specify to the Comfort Controller the information that
it needs to control and monitor HVAC devices in the desired man-
ner. For example, when configuring the AO-Cooling CV algorithm,
you must enter information such as the name of the AO point con-
trolling the air handler’s chilled water valve and the Sensor Group
or space temperature sensor that is providing the space temperature
inputs.
In a newly installed Comfort Controller, the database is effectively a

blank page. Based on your application, you decide which algo-
rithms, points, alarms, schedules, and system functions are needed
to create the database. The database, therefore, only consists of the
features and functions required by your application.
13
Follow the steps below to configure a newly installed Comfort
Configuration Controller. Only complete the steps needed to configure your
Process application. For example, if your application does not require
software points, then omit Step 9.
Creating the Database 1. Complete the 1600 or 6400 Hardware and Software Point
Configuration Sheets located in Appendix H (Quickstart) of
this manual. Use the reference sheets in that appendix to
assist you.
2. Set the address of the Comfort Controller with the Network

Configuration Tool (NCT).
3. Select Add, Controller, and Upload to add and upload the

Comfort Controller to the operator interface’s database.
Note: If the Upload fails, reset the Comfort Controller

using the RJ-14 reset jumper. Insert the jumper into
the module’s modular phone jacks. Wait approxi-
mately 30 seconds for the reset to take place, then
remove the jumper.
4. From the operator interface’s menu, access the Service-

Config Tables by completing the following steps.
a. Select Select.
b. Select the desired Comfort Controller.
c. Select Diagnostic.
d. Select Service-Config.
The operator interface displays the list of Service-Config

Tables.
You create the controller’s database by defining the

required items in the Service-Config Tables. These
tables are listed in the table on the next page.
14
Table 3-1
Table Name Purpose
Service-Config Tables
FNCxx-yy To create a combination of up to 24 of

the following functions in a Comfort
Controller 1600 or up to 96 in a
Comfort Controller 6400: AO, DO,
and global (i.e., AOSS, Linkage)
algorithms, alarms, and time sched-
ules.
HWxx-yy To create up to 8 hardware points per

table for a total of 16 points in a
Comfort Controller 1600 or 64 points
in a Comfort Controller 6400.
NUMSYS To create up to 16 holidays, 16 Net-

work Time Schedules, 4 Consumable
Tables of up to 16 schedules each, 4
Runtime Tables of up to 16 schedules
each, and up to 16 Loadshed Tables.
SETPTDEF To create up to 16 setpoint schedules.
SWxx-yy To create up to 8 software points per

table for a total of 16 points in a
Comfort Controller 1600 or 32 points
in a Comfort Controller 6400.
UPDATEDB To update the Comfort Controller’s

database
15
Using the 1600 or 6400 Hardware and Software Point Con-
figuration Sheets completed in Step 1, configure the Service-
Config Tables by completing the following steps.
5. Configure the FNCxx-yy Tables by completing the steps

below. In these steps you are creating each desired AO, DO,
and global algorithm, alarm, and time schedule.
a. Select the FNCxx-yy Table from the list of Service-

Config Tables.
b. Enter the function type and engineering unit for each

function.
Note: Comfort Controller processing can be enhanced
if similar functions are grouped together in the
following order:
1. Alarms
2. Occupancy
3. DO—Permissive Intrlock
4. AO—Permissive Intrlock
5. Discrete algorithms
6. Analog algorithms
7. Global algorithms
c. Press the F2 key to activate the menu, then select Save to

save the table.
d. Select Download to download the table to the Comfort

Controller.
e. If configuring a Comfort Controller 6400, repeat Steps a

through d for each table.
6. Configure the HWxx-yy Table by completing the steps below.

In these steps you are defining the hardware points in groups
of eight points per table.
a. Select the HWxx-yy Table from the list of Service-

Config Tables.
b. Enter the channel type, sensor or units, and channel name

for each hardware point.
Note: You must enter unique names for each point.
16
save the table.
Controller.
e. Repeat Steps a through d for each table.
7. Configure the NUMSYS Table by completing the steps

below. In these steps you are indicating the number of
Holiday Schedules, Network Time Schedules, Consumables,
Runtimes, and Loadsheds required. You are also indicating if
language conversion will be performed.
a. Select the NUMSYS Table from the list of Service-

Config Tables.
b. Enter the quantity of each type of system function, and

specify whether language conversion will be performed.

save the table.

Controller.
8. Configure the SETPTDEF Table by completing the steps

below. In these steps you are defining the engineering units
(degrees F, % Rh, inches of water, etc.) for each Setpoint
Schedule.
Note: Any Setpoint Schedule left at 0 is undefined and not
created.
a. Select the SETPTDEF Table from the list of Service-
Config Tables.
b. Enter the engineering unit for each Setpoint Schedule.

save the table.

Controller.
17
9. Configure each SWxx-yy Table by completing the steps
below. In these steps you are defining the software points in
groups of eight points per table.
a. Select the SWxx-yy Table from the list of Service-Config

Tables.
b. Enter the channel type, sensor or units, and channel name

for each software point.

save the table.

Controller.
e. Repeat Steps a through d for each table.
10. Update the Comfort Controller’s database with the items

selected in Steps 5 through 9.
a. Select the UPDATEDB Table from the list of Service-

Config Tables.
b. Press the Spacebar to toggle the value in the Update

Database configuration decision to Yes.
c. Press the F2 key to activate the menu, then select Down-

load to download the table to the Comfort Controller.
While the Comfort Controller database is updating, the

Comfort Controller’s red LED blinks rapidly. The
update time varies with the size of the database. Wait
until the Comfort Controller’s red LED blinks slowly
before proceeding to the next step.
Note: All Comfort Controller communication with the

CCN is disabled during the update.
18
11. Remove, Add, and Upload the Comfort Controller from the
operator interface’s database. This step is required because
the operator interface’s database no longer matches the
Comfort Controller’s database.
Note: If the operator interface displays an error message,
the update was not yet completed. Wait until the
Comfort Controller’s red LED blinks slowly again,
and repeat Step 11.
12. Verify that the uploaded database contains the correct quan-
tity and type of points (from Points, Display), and the correct
quantity and type of functions including algorithms, alarms,
Time Schedules, Setpoint Schedules, etc. (from Modify,
Controller).
If the uploaded database is correct, proceed to Step 13.
If the uploaded database is not correct, check the
DBSTATUS maintenance screen for errors. If Yes is dis-
played in the Database Error maintenance decision, there is
an invalid entry in one of the Service-Config Table decisions,
or insufficient memory available for your application.
Note: Database items are created in their respective Ser-
vice-Config Table. Each table is created in sequen-
tial order, with the FNC01-24 Table being first, as
shown in Table 3-1. If a configuration error is
encountered, the Comfort Controller will stop
updating the database at the point in the respective
Service-Config Table where the error occurred.
13. If you wish to modify the default hardware or software point
descriptions, complete the steps below.
a. Select Points.
b. Select the appropriate hardware or software table.
c. Select the desired point.
d. Press the F3 key, modify the description, then press
Enter.
e. Repeat as necessary.
f. Modify and Download the controller database to down-
load the point descriptors to the Comfort Controller.
19
Configuring the 1. Select Modify and Controller from the operator interface’s
Database menu.
2. Configure each table for points, algorithms, alarms, etc.
All the items to be configured in Step 2 (i.e., CCCV_,
MADVV, etc.) will be listed alphabetically with their associ-
ated function table number (01 to 96 for a Comfort Controller
6400 and 01 to 24 for a Comfort Controller 1600).
Note: When configuring algorithms (such as AO-Humid-
ity Control and Heating VAV), there are usually
optional inputs that are not used. Leave the inputs
set to their default values. For example, in Humidity
Control, keep the Fan Status Point default value set
to SENSDI00. Deleting default values will nega-
tively affect Comfort Controller processing speed.
3. Press the F2 key to activate the menu, then select Save to save
the table.
4. Select Download to download the table to the Comfort Con-
troller.
5. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for each table.
6. Modify and Upload the Comfort Controller’s database to the
operator interface. After completing this step, you will be
able to force points from the maintenance display.
Caution: If you modify the Service-Config Tables IN ANY
WAY after this initial configuration, you must perform
Steps 10 through 12 under Creating the Database.
Use the following procedure to download an existing Comfort

Downloading a Controller database from a Building Supervisor or Network Service
Controller Tool to a new Comfort Controller. You can also use the procedure
when upgrading a Comfort Controller’s software by downloading
the existing database into the new controller with the new software.
The procedure accomplishes three basic tasks:
• Initializing the controller
• Building the configuration tables
• Downloading data to the configuration tables
1. Using the LID Interface Cable, RAM flush the Comfort
Controller module by inserting the cable into both the
module’s phone jacks. Power down the controller for 30
seconds, then remove the CCN communication bus. Power
up the module. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the reset
to take place, then remove the cable.
20
2. Set the Comfort Controller’s address with the Network
Configuration Tool, then replace the CCN communication
bus.
3. From the Building Supervisor or Network Service Tool,
initialize the controller by completing the following steps:
a. Select Select.
b. Select the desired Comfort Controller.
c. Select Modify.
d. Select Download.
The download results (Downloaded or Rejected) will

display in the Results column. With the exception of the
Service-Config Tables, the status message Rejected will
display next to most tables.
4. Build the configuration tables by completing the steps below:

a. Select Diagnostic.
b. Select Service-Config.
c. Select the UPDATEDB Table from the list of Service-

Config Tables
d. Press the Spacebar to toggle the value in the Update

Database configuration decision to Yes.
e. Press the F2 key to activate the menu, then select Down-

load to download the tables.
Caution: Do not select Save.
While the controller’s database is updating, the Comfort

Controller’s red LED blinks rapidly. Wait until the Comfort
Controller’s red LED blinks slowly before proceeding to the
next step.
Note: All Comfort Controller communication with the
CCN is disabled during the update.
21
5. Download the data to the configuration tables by completing
the steps below:
a. Select Modify.
b. Select Download.
The download status (Downloaded, Different, or Re-

jected) displays in the Results column. Most tables will
have the message Downloaded displayed next to them.
BEST++ tables, however, will have the message Different
displayed next to them. (You will download BEST++
tables in Step 7.)
If the message Rejected displays next to a table, repeat

Step 5.
6. Complete the steps below to verify that the tables successfully
downloaded.
a. Select Diagnostic.
b. Select Verify-Config.
If Different or Rejected is displayed next to tables other than

BEST++ tables, repeat Steps 5 and 6.
If the tables were downloaded properly, proceed to the next

step.
7. If there are any BEST++ programs in your database, complete
the following steps:
a. Enter the BEST++ environment.
b. Select and Download the BEST++ file name(s) you wish

to download.
c. When the download is complete, exit the BEST++ envi-

ronment.
d. Select Remove to remove the controller from the Build-

ing Supervisor or Network Service Tool’s database.
e. Select Add, Controller, and Upload to copy the new

BEST or BEST++ data from the Comfort Controller to the
Building Supervisor or Network Service Tool.
22
How To Modify an
Existing Comfort
Controller Database
How to Modify an
Existing Comfort
Controller
Database
When using Building Supervisor III, Network Service Tool III, or
ComfortWORKS, it is important to maintain a current database on
each PC that will be accessing a Comfort Controller.
You should always keep a backup copy of the last known good
database. To copy the database, refer to the appropriate operator
interface’s manual and follow the instructions to add and copy a
currently uploaded controller’s database.
The following operations change the Comfort Controller database

and require the controller to be removed, added, and uploaded to
each operator interface containing its old database.
• Using QuickStart to change, add, or remove any item in the

Comfort Controller.
Note: Changing items such as units on a hardware

point requires you to remove, add, and upload
that controller’s database to all the operator
interfaces that contain it.
• Using Building Supervisor III, Network Service Tool III, or

ComfortWORKS 1.0a or earlier to modify any entry in the
Diagnostic Service Configuration tables, and then perform-
ing an Update Database.
Note: If you made any of the above changes, you can

update the ComfortWORKS 2.0 or later PC by
uploading the controller again. You do not need to
perform a controller Remove.
Verifying Database Since most installations use databases on multiple PCs, you should
Integrity always perform a Diagnostic-Verify Configuration before accessing
an installation with an old database.
If the Diagnostic-Verify of the database reports any items as differ-

ent, follow the procedure listed below. You should not perform
Modify-Download at this time, since the database has changed.
23
Caution: If a Modify-Download of an old database is performed,
a database corruption may occur. This may cause
improper operation of functions, and input/outputs.
1. View the Diagnostic Maintenance DBSTATUS table. If

Database Error, EEPROM Error, or RAM Error is Yes, refer
to Correcting Database and Memory Errors below.
2. If there are no DBSTATUS errors, print the Diagnostic-

Verify report or note the table names listed as different.
3. Go to each of the configuration tables listed as different in the

Diagnostic-Verify Report, and upload the configuration table.
Carefully check the configuration before and after each
upload to see which configuration decisions changed.
• If the changes are not desired, leave the table without

saving, then re-enter the table and download the last
know configuration.
• If any garbled data appears in the upload or if a message

similar to “Table or Block not Defined in Controller”
appears, you should immediately remove, add, and
upload the controller to the operator interface.
Note: When this occurs, the database in the Comfort

Controller is different from the database in the
operator interface.
Correcting Database Use the following procedure to correct database and memory errors:
and Memory Errors
1. If EEPROM or RAM error is Yes, the controller’s database is
full and you need to delete at least one function, point, sched-
ule, etc. in order to add any new items.
2. If Database Error is Yes, invalid information has been down-

loaded to the controller. Do not Remove, Add, and Upload
the controller at this point, as the database could contain
24
improper data and the last known good configuration will be
lost. Database Error can be Yes for the following reasons:
• You have entered an invalid entry in one of the Diagnos-

tic-Service Configuration tables and then performed an
Update Database. The only way to put invalid entries in
the Diagnostic-Service Table is through Carrier Controls
or ComfortWORKS 1.0a or earlier Service Configura-
tion.
If an invalid entry is placed in any Service entry, delete

or correct the entry and perform another Update Data-
base. More information on correcting a problem of this
nature is in Step 12 of Creating the Database.
• You have downloaded from an old database via Building

Supervisor III, Network Service Tool III (Carrier Con-
trols), or ComfortWORKS. You can download the last
known good PC database to the controller by following
the procedure for Downloading a Controller above.
25
26
How To Configure
Points
How To
Configure
Points
This section provides the following information for each point:
Overview
• Purpose
• Typical application
• List of required and optional configuration decisions
• Description of each configuration decision that includes allow-
able entries and default values
• List of maintenance decisions
• Description of each maintenance decision
Note: Some standard input/output (I/O) points do not have
configuration decisions because they are pre-configured.
Points with custom engineering units, such as Custom
Milliamp Input and Custom Voltage Input, however, do
require you to complete configuration decisions.
Discrete and analog software points do not have configura-
tion decisions.
Description of Points The Comfort Controller 6400 supports 64 hardware (I/O) points and
32 software points.
The Comfort Controller 1600 supports 16 hardware (I/O) points and
16 software points.
For easy reference, all points are presented in alphabetical order:
Analog Software Point
Custom Milliamp Input
Custom Milliamp Output
Custom Voltage Input
Custom Voltage Output
Discrete Output
Discrete Software Point
Latched Discrete Input
Milliamp Input
Milliamp Output
Network Data In
Network Data Out
Pulsed Discrete Input
Sensed Discrete Input
Stepper Motor Output
Temperature Input
Voltage Input
Voltage Output
27
ANSWPT_M
Software Point Type 2
Analog software points serve three purposes:

Analog Software
Point • Give a custom program created in BEST++ the capability to
display analog values that can be used as inputs to standard
algorithms
• Make the output of any analog type algorithm the input to

another algorithm
• Serve as the destination of a Broadcast or Data Transfer point.
An analog software point can be displayed and forced.
Typical Application This point can be configured to receive a broadcasted outside air
temperature value.
List of Maintenance The following read-only, maintenance decisions are applicable to

Decisions this point type. They provide useful information regarding the
status and configuration of this point.
System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Maintenance Decisions System Value

The value in this decision represents the actual value used by any
algorithms that reference this point. The range of values is deter-
mined by the type of data that this point represents. This value
includes any conversions that are made based on point type or units.
This value also includes the effect of any applied forces.
Valid Display -9999.9 to 9999.9
28
ANSWPT_M
Force
The value in this decision represents the force level, if any, that has
been applied to this point. The forces are listed in order from
highest to lowest priority, with 1 being the highest force priority.
Valid Display 0 = No force in effect

1 = Fire Force
2 = Safety Force
3 = Service Force
4 = Building Supervisor Force
5 = Monitor/Remote Force
6 = Min Off Time Force
7 = Controlling POC Force
8 = BEST Force
9 = Temp Override Force
10 = Loadshed Force
Status
The value in this decision represents the system status for this point.
Valid Display 0 = Valid value

2 = Configuration error
Alarm Status
The value in this decision indicates whether the point is in alarm. If
an alarm has not been configured for this point, the value in this
decision will always be Normal.
Valid Display Normal = Point is within configured limits,

or it was not configured.
Alarm = Point is outside configured limits.
29
CMAMPI_C
Hardware Point Type 3
A custom milliamp input is a hardware point that converts an input

Custom Milliamp signal with a maximum range of 0-22 mA to a configurable range of
Input engineering units. Refer to Appendix C for a list of engineering
units and their conversion limits.
The equation for the input conversion is:
[(Input - Low Input Endpoint) * (High Conversion Endpoint - Low Conversion Endpoint) /
(High Input Endpoint - Low Input Endpoint)] + Low Conversion Endpoint
The conversion is a linear interpolation of the input between the

Low and High Input Endpoint to the Low and High Conversion
Endpoint. Figure 4-1 illustrates the conversion.
List of Configuration The following decisions are applicable to this point type. You must
Decisions configure the asterisked decisions. Non-asterisked decisions are
optional.
* Low Input Endpoint

* High Input Endpoint
* Low Conversion Endpoint
* High Conversion Endpoint
Low Input Fault
High Input Fault
* Externally Powered

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Sensor Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
Control Algorithm Name
Alarm Algorithm Name
30
CMAMPI_C
Figure 4-1
Linear VALUE
Interpolation
of Custom High
Conversion
Milliamp Input Endpoint
Converted
Value
Low
Conversion
Endpoint
INPUT
Low High
Input Input
Endpoint Endpoint
Configuration Low Input Endpoint

Decisions You must configure this decision to indicate the minimum input signal that will
be converted. For example, if you specify 4 mA and the input sensor is <=
4mA, the computed value will be the Low Conversion Endpoint.
Allowable Entries 0.0 to 22.0 mA
Default Value 4.0
High Input Endpoint

You must configure this decision to indicate the maximum input signal that will
be converted. For example, if you specify 18 mA and the input sensor is >=
18mA, the computed value will be the High Conversion Endpoint.
Default Value 20.0
31
CMAMPI_C
Low Conversion Endpoint

You must configure this decision to indicate the conversion value when the
input signal is less than or equal to the Low Input Endpoint. For example, if
you specify % as the engineering unit for the sensor, the allowable entries are
0.00 to 100.00% and an entry of 90.00 is equal to 90% when the input signal is
<= Low Input Endpoint.
Allowable Entries Valid range based upon selected display units.
Default Value 0.00
High Conversion Endpoint

You must configure this decision to indicate the conversion value when the
input signal is greater than or equal to the High Input Endpoint. For example,
if you specify % as the engineering unit for the sensor, the allowable entries are
>= High Input Endpoint.
Default Value 90.00
Low Input Fault

Use this decision to specify the lower limit that indicates the input sensor is out
of range.
Default Value 4.0
High Input Fault

Use this decision to specify the upper limit that indicates the input sensor is out
of range.
Default Value 20.0
Externally Powered
You must configure this decision to indicate whether the sensor connected to
this channel is externally powered.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = No/Yes
LID = 0(No) / 1(Yes)
Default Value No
32
CMAMPI_M
Maintenance System Value

Decisions The value in this decision represents the actual value used by any algorithms
that reference this point. The range of values is determined by the type of data
that this point represents. This value includes any conversions that are made
based on point type, units, or configured parameters. This value also includes
the effect of any applied forces.
Force
The value in this decision represents the force level, if any, that has been
applied to this point. The forces are listed in order from highest to lowest
priority, with 1 being the highest force priority.

1 = Fire Force
2 = Safety Force
3 = Service Force
8 = BEST Force
10= Loadshed Force
Status
The value in this decision represents the system status for this hardware point.
It indicates whether the sensor reading of this device is valid.
Valid Display 0 = Valid sensor reading

1 = Reading out of range for this type of sensor, or
there is a communication error with the hardware
channel
33
CMAMPI_M
Alarm Status
The value in this decision indicates whether the point being monitored by an
Alarm Algorithm is in alarm. If an Alarm Algorithm has not been configured
for this point, the value in this decision will be Normal.
Valid Display Normal = Point is not in alarm.
Alarm = Point is in alarm.
Sensor Value
The value in this decision represents the converted value of the physical sensor
into the configured engineering units, disregarding any applied forces.
Hardware Value
The value in this decision represents the actual sensor reading in unconverted
units. This value is the measurable result of the physical sensor.
Valid Display 0.0 to 22.0 mA
Channel Number
The value in this decision indicates the configured hardware channel number
for this point.
Valid Display 1 to 64

The value in this decision indicates the name of the standard control algorithm
configured to use this point. If more than one algorithm applies, the name of
the last configured algorithm is displayed. This field is blank when the point is
not configured for use by any algorithm.
Valid Display Eight-character algorithm name

The value in this decision indicates the name of the alarm configured to monitor
this point. This field is blank when the point is not configured for use by any
alarm.
34
CMAMPO_C
A custom milliamp output is a hardware point that converts a

Custom Milliamp calculated input value with a configurable range of engineering
Output units to a configured range of 0-22 mA. Refer to Appendix C for a
list of engineering units and their conversion limits.
[(Input - Low Conversion Endpoint) * (High Output Endpoint - Low Output Endpoint) /
(High Conversion Endpoint - Low Conversion Endpoint)] + Low Output Endpoint
The conversion is a linear interpolation of the calculated input value

between the Low and High Conversion Endpoint to the Low and
High Output Endpoint. Figure 4-2 illustrates the conversion.
Decisions configure the asterisked decisions.
* Low Output Endpoint

* High Output Endpoint

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Control Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
35
CMAMPO_C
Figure 4-2
Linear
VALUE
Interpolation
of Custom High
Milliamp Output
Endpoint
Output
Output
Value
Low
Output
Endpoint
INPUT
Low High
Conversion Conversion
Endpoint Endpoint
Configuration Low Output Endpoint

Decisions You must configure this decision to indicate the lowest value the output can be
as a result of converting the input signal.

Default Value 4.0 mA
High Output Endpoint

You must configure this decision to indicate the highest value the output can be

Default Value 20.0
36
CMAMPO_M

You must configure this decision to indicate the minimum input value. When
the input value is less than or equal to the Low Conversion Endpoint, the output
signal equals the Low Output Endpoint.
Default Value 0.0

You must configure this decision to indicate the maximum input value. When
the input value is greater than or equal to the High Conversion Endpoint, the
output signal equals the High Output Endpoint.
Default Value 0.0

Decisions The value in this decision represents the actual value used by algorithms that
reference this point. The range of values is determined by the type of data that
this point represents. This value includes any conversions that are made based
on point type, units, or configured parameters. This value also includes the
effect of any applied forces.
Force
1 = Fire Force
2 = Safety Force
3 = Service Force
8 = BEST Force
10= Loadshed Force
37
CMAMPO_M
Status

channel
Alarm Status
The value in this decision indicates whether the point is in alarm. If an alarm
type has not been configured for this point, the value in this decision will be
Normal.
Valid Display Normal = Point is within configured limits, or it was

not configured.
Control Value
The value in this decision represents the converted value in the configured
engineering units, disregarding any applied forces.
Hardware Value
The value in this decision represents the actual output value. This value is the
measurable result of the physical output.
Valid Display 0.0 to 22.0 mA
38
CMAMPO_M
Channel Number
for this point.


The value in this decision indicates the name of the alarm configured to moni-
tor this point. This field is blank when the point is not configured for use by
any alarm.
39
CVOLTI_C
A custom voltage input is a hardware point that converts an input

Custom Voltage signal with a maximum range of 0-11 Vdc to a configurable range
Input of engineering units. Refer to Appendix C for a list of engineering
units and their conversion limits.
[(Input - Low Input Endpoint) * (High Conversion Endpoint - Low Conversion Endpoint) /
(High Input Endpoint - Low Input Endpoint)] + Low Conversion Endpoint

optional.
* Low Input Endpoint

* High Input Endpoint
Low Input Fault
High Input Fault

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Sensor Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
40
CVOLTI_C
Figure 4-3
Linear Interpolation of VALUE
High
Conversion
Endpoint
Converted
Value
Low
Conversion
Endpoint
INPUT
Low High
Input Input
Endpoint Endpoint
Configuration Low Input Endpoint

Decisions You must configure this decision to indicate the minimum input
signal that will be converted. For example, if you specify 2Vdc and
the input sensor is <= 2Vdc, the computed value will be the Low
Conversion Endpoint.
Allowable Entries 0.0 to 11.0 Volts
Default Value 2.0
High Input Endpoint

You must configure this decision to indicate the maximum input
signal that will be converted. For example, if you specify 9Vdc and
the input sensor is >= 9Vdc, the computed value will be the High
Conversion Endpoint.
Default Value 10.0
41
CVOLTI_C

You must configure this decision to indicate the Conversion Value when the
input signal is less than or equal to the Low Input Endpoint. For example, if
you select % as the engineering unit for the sensor, the allowable entries are
<= Low Input Endpoint.

Default Value 0.00

You must configure this decision to indicate the Conversion Value when the
input signal is greater than or equal to the High Input Endpoint. For example,
if you specify % as the engineering unit for the sensor, the allowable entries are
>= High Input Endpoint.

Default Value 00.00
Low Input Fault

Use this decision to specify the lower limit that indicates the input sensor is out
of range.

Default Value 2.0
High Input Fault

Use this decision to specify the upper limit that indicates that the input sensor
is out of range.

Default Value 10.0
42
CVOLTI_M

Force

1 = Fire Force
2 = Safety Force
3 = Service Force
8 = BEST Force
10= Loadshed Force
Status

channel
43
CVOLTI_M
Alarm Status
The value in this decision indicates whether the point is in alarm. If an alarm has
not been configured for this point, the value in this decision will be Normal.
not configured.
Sensor Value
Hardware Value
units. This value is the measurable output of the physical sensor.
Valid Display 0 to 11Vdc
Channel Number
The value in this decision indicates the configured hardware channel number for
this point.

configured to use this point. If more than one algorithm applies, the name of the
last configured algorithm is displayed. This field is blank when the point is not
configured for use by any algorithm.

alarm.
44
CVOLTO_C
A custom voltage output converts an input signal with a

Custom Voltage configurable range of engineering units to a configured range of 0 to
Output 11 Vdc. Refer to Appendix C for a list of engineering units and
their conversion limits.
[(Input - Low Conversion Endpoint) * (High Output Endpoint - Low Output Endpoint) /
(High Conversion Endpoint - Low Conversion Endpoint)] + Low Output Endpoint

* Low Output Endpoint

* High Output Endpoint

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Control Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
45
CVOLTO_C
Figure 4-4
Linear
VALUE
Interpolation
of Custom High
Voltage Output
Endpoint
Output
Output
Value
Low
Output
Endpoint
INPUT
Low High
Conversion Conversion
Endpoint Endpoint
Configuration Low Output Endpoint

Decisions You must configure this decision to indicate the lowest value the output can be

Default Value 2.0
High Output Endpoint

You must configure this decision to indicate the highest value the output can be

Default Value 10.0
46
CVOLTO_M

You must configure this decision to indicate the minimum input value. When
the input value is less than or equal to the Low Conversion Endpoint, the
output signal equals the Low Output Endpoint.
Default Value 0.0

You must configure this decision to indicate the maximum input value. When
the input value is greater than or equal to the High Conversion Endpoint, the
output signal equals the High Output Endpoint.
Default Value 0.0

Force
1 = Fire Force
2 = Safety Force
3 = Service Force
8 = BEST Force
10= Loadshed Force
47
CVOLTO_M
Status
channel
Alarm Status
has not been configured for this point, the value in this decision will be Nor-
mal.
not configured.
Control Value
Hardware Value
The value in this decision represents the actual output value. This value is the
measurable result of the physical output.
Valid Display 0 to 11Vdc
48
CVOLTO_M
Channel Number
for this point.


any alarm.
49
Discrete Output
DISCRO_C
A discrete output is a hardware point that converts an input state (on

Discrete Output or off) to a configurable discrete output signal that is used to drive a
relay. You can configure two output signal types: normal or in-
verted. For a list of discrete engineering units, refer to Appendix D.
Normal Output Signal If the output signal type is configured as normal and the input
transitions from off to on, the Comfort Controller checks to see
whether the delay timer and minimum off timer have expired.
• If the timers have expired, the Comfort Controller turns on the

output and starts the minimum on timer.
• If the timers have not expired, the Comfort Controller waits until
the timers do expire, turns the output on, and starts the minimum
on timer.
If the output signal type is configured as normal and the input

transitions from on to off, the Comfort Controller checks to see
whether the minimum on timer has expired.
• If the minimum on timer has expired, the Comfort Controller

turns off the output and starts the minimum off timer.
• If the minimum on timer has not expired, the Comfort Controller

waits until the timer does expire, turns the output off, and starts
the minimum off timer.
Inverted Output Signal If the output signal type is configured as inverted and the input
transitions from on to off, the Comfort Controller checks to see
whether the delay timer and minimum off timer have expired.
• If the timers have expired, the Comfort Controller turns on the

output and starts the minimum on timer.
• If the timers have not expired, the Comfort Controller waits until
the timers do expire, turns the output on, and starts the minimum
on timer.
50
Discrete Output
DISCRO_C
If the output signal type is configured as inverted and the input

transitions from off to on, the Comfort Controller checks to see
whether the minimum on timer has expired.
• If the minimum on timer has expired, the Comfort Controller

turns off the output and starts the minimum off timer.
• If the minimum on timer has not expired, the Comfort Controller

waits until the timer does expire, turns the output off, and starts
the minimum off timer.
* Logic Type
* Minimum Off Time
* Minimum On Time
* Delay Time

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Control Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
51
Discrete Output
DISCRO_C
Configuration Logic Type

Decisions You must configure this decision to indicate the conversion logic you desire.
Normal = Standard Logic

When the algorithm determines that the output should be 0
(off), the DO point will be turned off. When the algorithm
determines that the output should be 1 (on), the DO point
will be turned on.
Invert = Reverse Logic

When the algorithm determines that the output should be 0
(off), the DO point will be turned on. When the algorithm
determines that the output should be 1 (on), the DO point
will be turned off.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = Normal/Invert

LID = 0(Normal) / 1(Invert)
Default Value Normal
Minimum On Time
You must configure this decision to indicate the number of seconds the output
must remain on.
Allowable Entries 0 to 3600 seconds

Default Value 0
Minimum Off Time

You must configure this decision to indicate the number of seconds the output
must remain off.

Default Value 0
Delay Time
You must configure this decision to indicate the number of seconds that must
elapse before output is turned on.

Default Value 0
52
Discrete Output
DISCRO_M

Decisions The value in this decision represents the actual system value of this discrete
point. This value includes any output logic that may have been configured,
and also includes the effect of any applied forces.
Valid Display Open (DO = off) / Close (DO = on) for normal logic
Force

1 = Fire Force
2 = Safety Force
3 = Service Force
8 = BEST Force
10= Loadshed Force
Status

channel
53
Discrete Output
DISCRO_M
Alarm Status
type has not been configured for this point, the value in this decision will be
Normal.
not configured.
Control Value
The value in this decision displays the actual state of the point, disregarding
any applied forces.
Valid Display Open (DO = off) / Close (DO = on) for normal logic
Hardware Value
This decision displays the actual state of the hardware point, disregarding any
logic type conversion.
Valid Display Open/Close
Channel Number
for this point.


any alarm.
54
DISWPT_M
A discrete software point gives a custom program created in

Discrete Software BEST++ the capability to display discrete values that can be used as
Point inputs to standard algorithms. It is also used to make the output of
any discrete type algorithm the input to another algorithm.
A discrete software point can be displayed and forced.
Typical Application This point can be used in a custom program to generate an alarm
when the value of the Discrete Software Point matches the alarm
state.

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status

The value in this decision represents the actual value used by algo-
rithms that reference this point. This value includes the effect of
any applied forces.
Valid Display Open (DO = off) / Close (DO = on)
Force
1 = Fire Force
2 = Safety Force
3 = Service Force
8 = BEST Force
10= Loadshed Force
55
DISWPT_M
Status
The value in this decision represents the system status for this
hardware point. It indicates whether the sensor reading of this
device is valid.

1 = Reading out of range for this type of
sensor, or there is a communication
error with the hardware channel
Alarm Status
The value in this decision indicates whether the point is in alarm. If
an alarm has not been configured for this point, the value in this
decision will be Normal.
Valid Display Normal = Point is within configured limits,

or it was not configured.
56
LATCHI_M
A latched discrete input is a hardware point that detects a momen-

Latched Discrete tary input from a dry-contact, converts the input to the configured
Input logic state, and saves it until it is read by the algorithm that is
monitoring the point.
Typical Application You can use this point to capture momentary contact closures such
as the closing of a door.

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Sensor Value
Channel Number

The value in this decision represents the actual value used by any
algorithms that reference this point. This value includes the effect
of any applied forces.
Force
1 = Fire Force
2 = Safety Force
3 = Service Force
8 = BEST Force
10= Loadshed Force 57
LATCHI_M
Status
The value in this decision represents the system status for this hardware point. It
indicates whether the sensor reading of this device is valid.
1 = Reading out of range for this type of sensor, or there is
a communication error with the hardware channel
Alarm Status
not configured.
Sensor Value
The value in this decision displays the actual state of the discrete point, disregard-
ing any applied forces.
Channel Number
this point.


alarm.
58
Milliamp Input
MAMP_I_C
A milliamp input is a hardware point that converts a 4-20 mA input

Milliamp Input signal to a standard range of engineering units. Refer to Appendix
B for a list of standard types supported
Configuration Decision The following decision is applicable to this point type. Configuring
it is optional.
Offset

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Sensor Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
59
Milliamp Input
MAMP_I_M
Offset
Use this decision to indicate the value that is added to or subtracted from the
converted value in order to compensate for sensor inaccuracy.
Allowable Entries -9999.9 to 9999.9

Default Value 0.0

Force
The value in this decision represents the force level, if any, that has been ap-
plied to this point. The forces are listed in order from highest to lowest priority,
with 1 being the highest force priority.

1 = Fire Force
2 = Safety Force
3 = Service Force
8 = BEST Force
10= Loadshed Force
60
Milliamp Input
MAMP_I_M
Status

channel
Alarm Status
mal.

not configured.
Sensor Value
Hardware Value
Valid Display Actual milliamp reading
Channel Number
for this point.
61
Milliamp Input
MAMP_I_M


any alarm.
62
Milliamp Output
MAMP_O_M
A milliamp output is a hardware point that converts an input signal

Milliamp Output with a standard range of engineering units to a pre-configured range
of 4-20 mA. Refer to Appendix B for a list of standard types sup-
ported.

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Control Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number

The value in this decision represents the actual value used by algo-
rithms that reference this point. The range of values is determined
by the type of data that this point represents. This value includes
any conversions that are made based on point type, units, or config-
ured parameters. This value also includes the effect of any applied
forces.
63
Milliamp Output
MAMP_O_M
Force

1 = Fire Force
2 = Safety Force
3 = Service Force
8 = BEST Force
10= Loadshed Force
Status

channel
Alarm Status
mal.

not configured.
64
Milliamp Output
MAMP_O_M
Control Value
Hardware Value
Valid Display Actual milliamp reading
Channel Number
for this point.


any alarm.
65
Network Input Point
NET_IN_C
A network input point requests data from a point in another device

Network Input on the CCN at a configured timed interval. In order for this point to
Point retrieve data, it must be referenced by at least one standard algo-
rithm, alarm, or system function.
Typical Application You can configure this point to provide the fan status of a remote air
handler as input to a standard algorithm.
optional.
* CCN Element Number

* CCN Bus Number
* Point Name
Communication Rate

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Configuration CCN Element Number

Decisions You must configure this decision to enter the element number of the
system element from which the point will be read.
Allowable Entries 1 to 239

Default Value 1
66
Network Input Point
NET_IN_M
CCN Bus Number

You must configure this decision to enter the bus number of the system ele-
ment from which the point will be read.

Default Value 0
Point Name
You must configure this decision to specify the point name used in the system
element where the data is being requested.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = up to 8 characters

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value (blank)
Communication Rate
Use this decision to indicate how often (in minutes) the value will be read from
the selected system element. An entry of 0 indicates that this point will read
whenever requested by an algorithm.
Allowable Entries 0 to 60 minutes

Default Value 5

that this point represents. This value includes the effect of any applied forces.
67
Network Input Point
NET_IN_M
Force

1 = Fire Force
2 = Safety Force
3 = Service Force
8 = BEST Force
10= Loadshed Force
Status
The value in this decision represents the system status for this network point.
It indicates whether the value of this point was successfully read.
Valid Display 0 = Value read successfully

1 = CCN Communication Bus failure
Alarm Status
mal.

not configured.
68
Network Input Point
NET_IN_M


alarm.
69
Network Output Point
NETOUT_C
A network output point sends data from a point within the Comfort
Network Output Controller to a point in another device on the CCN at a configured
Point timed interval. In order for this point to transmit data, it must be
referenced by at least one standard algorithm, alarm, or system
function.
Typical Application You can configure this point in an air handler to transmit the output
of its Permissive Interlock algorithm to control a damper position in
another air handler.
optional.
* CCN Element Number
* CCN Bus Number
* Point Name
Communication Rate
System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Configuration CCN Element Number

Decisions You must configure this decision to enter the element number of the
system element to which the point will be written.
Default Value 1
CCN Bus Number

You must configure this decision to enter the bus number of the
system element to which the point will be written.
Default Value 0
70
NETOUT_M
Point Name
You must configure this decision to specify the point name used in the system
element where the data is being transmitted.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Communication Rate
Use this decision to indicate how often (in minutes) the value will be written to
the selected system element. An entry of 0 indicates that this point will transmit
its value over the network whenever requested by an algorithm.
Default Value 5

this point represents. This value includes the effect of any applied forces.
Force
1 = Fire Force
2 = Safety Force
3 = Service Force
8 = BEST Force
10= Loadshed Force
71
NETOUT_M
Status
The value in this decision represents the system status for this network point. It
indicates whether the value of this point was successfully transmitted on the
CCN.
Valid Display 0 = Value sent successfully

1 = CCN Communication Bus failure
Alarm Status
mal.

not configured.


any alarm.
72
PULSDI_C
A pulsed discrete input is a hardware point that:

Pulsed Discrete
Input • Converts a pulsed dry-contact input to a configurable range of
engineering units (usage rate). The conversion is done using
configurable parameters for the conversion factor and sample
time.
The converted value is expressed as follows:
Converted value = (# of pulses over sample time) * conversion factor
You could convert a pulsed dry-contact to frequency using one
second as the sample time and Hertz as the conversion factor.
You could determine Kw demand by multiplying the number of
pulses by a wattmeter conversion factor.
• Displays the number of accumulated pulses. If you select the

engineering unit to be type 46, which represents pulses and not a
usage rate, pulses will be displayed.
Typical Application You can use this point to convert the input received from a flow
meter to gallons per minute (GPM) or liters per minute (L/min).
* Conversion Factor
* Sample Time

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Sensor Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
73
PULSDI_C
Configuration Conversion Factor

Decisions You must configure this decision to specify the amount that each pulse repre-
sents. For example, in a wattmeter application, the value you enter in this
decision would represent the number of Kilowatt Hours for each pulse.
Allowable Entries 0 to 9999.99

Default Value 1.00
Sample Time
You must configure this decision to specify the time period over which the
Comfort Controller collects input pulses before multiplying them by the Con-
version Factor.

Default Value 60
74
PULSDI_M

Force

1 = Fire Force
2 = Safety Force
3 = Service Force
8 = BEST Force
10= Loadshed Force
Status

channel
75
PULSDI_M
Alarm Status
has not been configured for this point, the value in this decision will be Normal.
not configured.
Sensor Value
Hardware Value
The value in this decision represents the actual sensor reading in pulses. This
value is the measurable output of the physical sensor.
Valid Display Accumulated pulses
Channel Number
for this point.

configured to monitor this point. If more than one algorithm applies, the name
of the last configured algorithm is displayed. This field is blank when the point
is not configured for use by any algorithm.

The value in this decision indicates the name of the alarm configured to use this
point. This field is blank when the point is not configured for use by any alarm.
76
SENSDI_C
A sensed discrete input is a hardware point that converts a dry-contact

Sensed Discrete input to a logic state based on the selected display units. For a list of
Input discrete engineering units, refer to Appendix D.
Use this type of point for devices that stay in a fixed state for a period
of time, such as a motor status relay.
Typical Application You can use this point to monitor auxiliary contacts to indicate fan
status.
Configuration Decision The following decision is applicable to this point type. You must
configure it.
* Output Logic Type
List of Maintenance The following read-only, maintenance decisions are applicable to this
Decisions point type. They provide useful information regarding the status and
configuration of this point.
System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Sensor Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
Configuration Decision Output Logic Type

You must configure this decision to indicate the conversion logic you
desire.
Normal = Standard Logic
The operator interface displays on when the sensor
contacts for this DI point are closed. The operator inter-
face displays off when the sensor contacts are open.
Invert = Reverse Logic
The operator interface displays on when the sensor
contacts for this DI point are open. The operator inter-
face displays off when the sensor contacts are closed.
77
SENSDI_M

that reference this point. This value includes any logic type that may have been
configured, and also includes the effect of any applied forces.
Valid Display Open (DI = off) / Close (DI = on) for normal logic
Force
1 = Fire Force
2 = Safety Force
3 = Service Force
8 = BEST Force
10= Loadshed Force
Status
channel
Alarm Status
mal.
not configured.
78
SENSDI_M
Sensor Value
The value in this decision displays the converted value, disregarding any
applied forces.
Valid Display Open (DI = off) / Close (DI = on) for normal logic
Hardware Value
This decision displays the actual hardware position of the physical sensor,
disregarding any logic type conversion.
Valid Display Open/Close
Channel Number
for this point.


any alarm.
79
STPMOT_C
A stepper motor output gives the Comfort Controller the capability

Stepper Motor to interface with a DSIO Module in order to control a stepper motor.
Output
Note: The algorithms do not support Stepper Motor Output.
Only custom programs created in BEST++ support Step-
per Motor Output.
Typical Application You can use this point in conjunction with a custom program to
control a four-winding stepper motor.
LIst of Configuration The following decisions are applicable to this point type. You must
* Stepping Rate
* Duty Cycle

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Channel Number
Configuration Stepping Rate

Decisions You must configure this decision to define the stepping rate for the
motor this output is controlling.
Default Value 30
Duty Cycle
You must configure this decision to specify the minimum pulse
width required to change the position of the stepper motor. When
the pulse width is high, the motor requires greater torque and power.
Default Value 100
80
STPMOT_M

Force

1 = Fire Force
2 = Safety Force
3 = Service Force
8 = BEST Force
10= Loadshed Force
Status

channel
81
STPMOT_M
Alarm Status

not configured.
Channel Number
for this point.


The value in this decision indicates the name of the alarm configured to use this
point. This field is blank when the point is not configured for use by any alarm.
82
Temperature Input
TEMP_I_C
A temperature input is a hardware point that converts resistive input

Temperature Input from a thermistor type transducer for the sensor types listed below.
For a list of metric conversions, resolution, and accuracy, refer to
Appendix B.
Sensor Type Range
1 = YSI 10K Thermistor -40.0 to 245.0°F

2 = 1000 ohm RTD -40.0 to 220.0°F
3 = 5K Thermistor -40.0 to 245.0°F
4 = Not supported
5 = MCI 10K Thermistor -40.0 to 245.0°F
Temperature Sensor
6 = NTC 100K Thermistor 72.0 to 282.0°F
Temperature Sensor
Note: If configuring a T-56 Space Temperature Sensor, refer to

the note in this chapter’s description of Voltage Input.
Typical Application You can use this point to interface with a Carrier-approved tempera-
ture sensor to provide duct discharge temperature.
Configuration Decision The following decision is applicable to this point type. Configuring
it is optional.
Offset

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Sensor Value
Channel Number
83
Temperature Input
TEMP_I_C and TEMP_I_M
Configuration Offset
Decision Use this decision to indicate the value that is added to or subtracted from the
converted temperature value in order to compensate for sensor inaccuracy.
Allowable Entries -10.0 to 10.0^F
Default Value 0.0

Force
1 = Fire Force
2 = Safety Force
3 = Service Force
8 = BEST Force
10= Loadshed Force
Status
channel
84
Temperature Input
TEMP_I_M
Alarm Status
not configured.
Sensor Value
Hardware Value
Valid Display Actual temperature reading
Channel Number
this point.


alarm.
85
Voltage Input
VOLT_I_C
A voltage input is a hardware point that converts a 0-10 Vdc input

Voltage Input signal to a standard range of engineering units. For a list of con-
versions, resolution, and accuracy, refer to Appendix B.
Note: If connecting a T-56 Space Temperature Sensor to this

input, you must wire the sensor as a Temperature Input.
For example, on a Comfort Controller 6400, you must set
Switch 2 to Int and Switch 3 to Other. On a Comfort
Controller 1600, you must wire to Channels 5-8 and set
Switch 1 to Other (Off).
Typical Application You can use this point to interface with a Carrier-approved tempera-
ture sensor to provide duct discharge temperature.
Configuration Decision The following decision is applicable to this algorithm. Configuring

it is optional.
Offset

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Sensor Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
86
Voltage Input
VOLT_I_C and VOLT_I_M
Configuration Offset
Decision Use this decision to indicate the value that is added to or subtracted from the
converted value in order to compensate for sensor inaccuracy.
Default Value 0.0

Decision The value in this decision represents the actual value used by any algorithms
Force
1 = Fire Force
2 = Safety Force
3 = Service Force
8 = BEST Force
10= Loadshed Force
Status
channel
87
Voltage Input
VOLT_I_M
Alarm Status
not configured.
Sensor Value
Hardware Value
Valid Display Actual voltage reading
Channel Number
this point.


alarm.
88
Voltage Output
VOLT_O_M
A voltage output is a hardware point that converts an input signal

Voltage Output with a standard range of engineering units to a pre-configured range
of 0-10 Vdc. Refer to Appendix B for a list of standard types
supported.

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Control Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
Maintenance Decision System Value

The value in this decision represents the actual value used by the
algorithms that reference this point. The range of values is deter-
mined by the type of data that this point represents. This value
includes any conversions that are made based on point type, units,
or configured parameters. This value also includes the effect of any
applied forces.
89
Voltage Output
VOLT_O_M
Force

1 = Fire Force
2 = Safety Force
3 = Service Force
8 = BEST Force
10= Loadshed Force
Status

channel
Alarm Status
mal.

not configured.
90
Voltage Output
VOLT_O_M
Control Value
Hardware Value
Valid Display Actual voltage reading
Channel Number
for this point.

the last configured algorithm is displayed. This field is blank when the point
is not configured for use by any algorithm.

The value in this decision indicates the name of the alarm configured to
monitor this point. This field is blank when the point is not configured for use
by any alarm.
91
92
How To Configure
Algorithms
How To
Configure
Algorithms
This section provides the following information for each algorithm:
Overview
• Purpose
able entries and default values.
Definition of an An algorithm is a pre-engineered group of processes that provides

Algorithm you with the capability to control and monitor HVAC devices in a
safe, energy efficient manner. An algorithm can consist of one or
more HVAC control routines, schedules, or input and output points.
Function Types When configuring the FNCxx-yy Table's (Service-Config Table)

Function Unit decision, refer to the Tables 5-1 to 5-3. This same
information is also included in Appendix H on the Function Types,
Default Names and EEPROM Summary Sheet.
Table 5-1
Algorithm Function Types AO Algorithm Name Function Type
AO—Adaptive Control........................... 1
AO—Cooling CV ................................... 2
AO—Cooling VAV ................................ 3
AO—Fan Tracking ................................. 4
AO—Heating CV ................................... 5
AO—Heating VAV ................................ 6
AO—Humidity Control .......................... 7
AO—Mixed Air CV w IAQ ................... 8
AO—Mixed Air VAV w IAQ ................ 9
AO—Permissive Intrlock ....................... 10
AO—Reset.............................................. 11
AO—Shared Transducer ........................ 12
AO—Static Pressure ............................... 13
93
Table 5-2
DO Algorithm Name Function Type
DO Algorithm Function
Types
DO—Analog ........................................... 14
DO—DX Staging VAV .......................... 015
DO—Electric Heat CV ........................... 016
DO—Electric Heat VAV ........................ 017
DO—Enthalpy Comparison ................... 018
DO—Interlock ........................................ 019
DO—Lighting Control ........................... 020
DO—Permissive Interlock ..................... 021
DO—Pump Control ................................ 022
DO—Prop Thermo ................................. 023
DO—Prop Thermo 2 Pipe ...................... 024
DO—Prop Thermo 4 Pipe ...................... 025
DO—Staged Thermostat ........................ 026
DO—Staging Control ............................. 027
DO—Time Clock ................................... 028
DO—Time Clock w Check .................... 029
Table 5-3
Global Algorithm
Global Algorithm Name Function Type
Function Types
AOSS Schedule ...................................... 301
Network Broadcast ................................. 302
Linkage/AOSS Schedule ........................ 303
NTFC w Enthalpy Check ....................... 304
Occupancy .............................................. 305*
Sensor Group .......................................... 306
WSM Air Source .................................... 307
WSM Cool Source .................................. 308
*For information on occupancy, refer to Time Schedule in the How

to Configure Schedules chapter of this manual.
For easy reference, the algorithms are presented alphabetically in

this manual, with analog output (AO) algorithms appearing before
discrete output (DO) algorithms. Global algorithms (AOSS Sched-
ule, NTFC w Enthalpy Check, etc.) are presented last.
94
AO—Adaptive Control
ADAPTxxC
Function Type 1
The AO—Adaptive Control algorithm gives you the capability to

AO—Adaptive create a unique Proportional/Integral/Derivative (PID) analog
Control control based on a configurable Setpoint Schedule that can be reset
between the occupied or unoccupied high and low setpoint values.
The designated Reset sensor (typically an outside air sensor) is used
to determine the PID Master Loop setpoint. The axes are adjustable
by altering the setpoint schedule and the maximum and minimum
reset decisions. The slope can be positive, negative, or constant,
depending on the relation of the values.
SETPOINT
High
Setpoint
Calculated
Setpoint
Low
Setpoint
RESET TEMPERATURE VALUE
Start Reset Stop

Reset Temperature Reset
Value Value
The Time Schedule indicates the current occupancy state for this
algorithm. The occupancy state defines when the controller is using
the occupied or unoccupied high and low setpoints.
The Setpoint Schedule allows you to configure high and low

setpoints for both occupied and unoccupied states.
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to control a chilled water bypass valve in
a chilled water plant.
95
ADAPTxxC
Function Type 1
List of Configuration The following decisions are applicable to this algorithm. You must
optional.
* Analog Output Point

* Status Point
Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
Reset Point
Reset
Start Reset Value
Stop Reset Value
* Control Point
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Disabled Output Value
Minimum Output Value
Maximum Output Value
Starting Value
Block Iteration Rate
Power on Delay
List of Maintenance The following maintenance decisions are applicable to this algo-
Decisions rithm. They provide useful information regarding the status and
configuration of this algorithm. You can force the asterisked decisions.

* Status Point
Occupied ?
* Reset Point
Controlling Setpoint
* Control Point
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Task Timer
96
Figure 5-1
PID_Master_Loop Analog
Status Point Output Point
Output
AND Enable Output Input Output
Status
Force
Force
Status
Status
Control Point
Status NOT
Output Sensor Input
Force
Setpoint Schedule Setpoint Reset

Low Setpoint Low Setpoint Output Setpoint
High Setpoint High Setpoint
Time Bias Input Minimum Output

Schedule
Output Occupancy State?
Maximum Output
Maintenance Reset
Point
Clamp Integrator
Occupied Output Sensor Input
Bias Low Offset Low Setpoint
Bias High Offset Occupied Status Disable

High Setpoint Reset Integrator
Force
ADAPTxxC
OR
Function Type 1
97
ADAPTxxC
Function Type 1
Configuration Analog Output Point

Decisions You must configure this decision to specify the AO point that is being con-
trolled by this algorithm.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value MAMP_O00
Status Point
You must configure this decision to specify the DI point that provides the on/
off status to enable this algorithm.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value SENSDI00
Time Schedule
Use this decision to specify the Time Schedule that determines the occupancy
state for this algorithm. If you do not specify a Time Schedule in this decision,
the algorithm will assume to be in the occupied state. For more information on
Time Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules section in this
manual.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = OCCPCxx,

LID = xx, where xx = function number
Default Value OCCPC00
Setpoint Schedule
You must configure this decision to specify the Setpoint Schedule (temperature
type) that provides the occupied and unoccupied setpoints.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = SETPTyy

LID = yy, where yy = 0 to 16
Default Value SETPT00
98
ADAPTxxC
Function Type 1
Reset Point
Use this decision to specify the AI point that provides the input for determining
the amount of reset. The setpoint is reset between the configured high and low
setpoints, based upon the value in this decision.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value TEMP_I00
Reset
Reset calculates the desired setpoint for the PID master loop based on the Reset
Point.
Start Reset Value

Use this decision to specify the value to which minimum reset should be
applied. If the value of the Reset Point is less than or equal to the value
in this decision, the calculated output will equal the low setpoint value.

Default Value -40.0 (-40.0)
Stop Reset Value

Use this decision to specify the value to which maximum reset should
be applied. If the value of the Reset Point is greater than or equal to the
value in this decision, the output will be equal to the high setpoint value.

Default Value 245.0 (118.3)
Control Point
You must configure this decision to indicate the input point that the PID Master
Loop will compare to the calculated setpoint.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
99
ADAPTxxC
Function Type 1
PID_Master_Loop
The master loop is a Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) control loop that
calculates the output required to achieve the calculated setpoint.
Proportional Gain
Use this decision to enter the value that is multiplied by the error to
produce the proportional term. The value in this decision is expressed
in units-per-unit of error.

Default Value 2.0
Integral Gain
Use this decision to enter the value that is multiplied by the error plus
the current integral term to produce the new integral term. The value in
this decision is expressed in units-per-unit of error.

Default Value 1.0
Derivative Gain
Use this decision to enter the value that is multiplied by the current
error minus the previous error to produce the derivative term. The
value in this decision is expressed in units-per-unit of error.

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the output value to be maintained when the
Status Point is off.
Allowable Entries 0 to 100%

Default Value 0.0
100
ADAPTxxC
Function Type 1

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output value.

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output value.

Default Value 100.0
Starting Value
Use this decision to specify the output’s starting value when the PID
Master Loop is enabled by the Status Point.

Default Value 0.0

The value in this decision indicates how often the PID Master Loop
calculates the output value.

Default Value 10
Power on Delay
Use this decision to specify the number of seconds the Comfort Controller must
wait to activate this algorithm after a power failure occurs.

Default Value 0
101
ADAPTxxM
Function Type 1
Maintenance Analog Output Point

Decisions This decision displays the output's actual state of the AO point being controlled
by this algorithm. The value is normally expressed as a percentage of full
capacity.
Valid Display 0.00 - 100.00%
Status Point
This decision displays the actual state of the status point which determines
whether this algorithm is enabled. If this point is not configured, then this
algorithm will not be enabled.
Valid Display On/Off
Occupied ?
This decision displays the current occupancy status based on the configured
data in the Time Schedule. If a Time Schedule has not been selected, then the
default mode will be Occupied.
Valid Display Yes/No
Reset Point
This decision displays the value of the reset point. The configured setpoint is
reset based upon the value of this decision.
Valid Display Valid range based upon selected display units.
This decision displays the calculated setpoint for the PID Master Loop based on
the setpoint and reset values.
Control Point
This decision displays the value of the input point that this algorithm is control-
ling to.
102
ADAPTxxM
Function Type 1
PID_Master_Loop
PID Master Loop function calculates the desired output based on the config-
ured PID gains and the current deviation from setpoint. The calculated output
is re-adjusted periodically to move closer toward the desired setpoint.
Reference Output
This decision displays the calculated output that is used to drive the
Analog Output Point.
Reference Output = (Proportional Term + Integral Term + Derivative
Term + Starting Value)
Valid Display 0 to 100%
Proportional Term
This decision displays the proportional error term as it is calculated by
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Setpoint - Control Point) * Proportional Gain
Integral Term
This decision displays the integral error term as it is calculated by the
PID equation.
Integral Term = ((Setpoint - Control Point) * Integral Term + Previous
Integral Term)
Derivative Term
This decision displays the derivative error term as it is calculated by the
PID equation.
Derivative Term = (Current Error - Previous Error) * Derivative Gain
Note: Error = (Setpoint - Control Point)
103
ADAPTxxM
Function Type 1
Integrator Flags
This three-digit field displays the status of the PID Master Loop.
Left Digit 0 = PID Active

1 = PID Inactive (Disabled or Min/Max Clamp)
Center Digit 0 = Integrator calculating normally

1 = Integrator has been reset
Right Digit 0 = No Integrator clamp

1 = Integrator clamp active
Task Timer
This decision displays the number of remaining seconds before this algorithm
executes again. This algorithm will execute every ten seconds.
Valid Display 0 to 300 seconds
104
AO—Cooling CV
CCCV_xxC
Function Type 2
The AO—Cooling CV algorithm modulates the output to control a

AO—Cooling CV chilled water valve in a constant volume air handler to prevent the
space temperature from exceeding the configured setpoint. This
algorithm can also be configured to perform dehumidification.
The Cooling algorithm uses both a PID (Proportional Integral

Derivative) Master Loop and a P (Proportional) Submaster Loop to
control the valve. The PID Master Loop calculates the Supply Air
Setpoint (submaster reference) required to achieve the desired space
temperature setpoint. The PID Master Loop calculates the
submaster reference by obtaining the highest sensor input from the
Sensor Group/SPT Sensor and comparing it to the high setpoint
from the Setpoint Schedule. During dehumidification, the
submaster reference is set to its minimum value. The submaster
reference is equal to the Disabled Output Value if the Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor status is invalid. The P Submaster Loop computes the
chilled water valve’s position by comparing the calculated
submaster reference to the Supply Air Temperature. The output
equals the Disabled Output Value whenever the fan is off or the
Supply Air Temperature status is invalid.
algorithm. The occupancy state defines when the Comfort Control-
ler is using the occupied or unoccupied setpoints. If you do not
configure a Time schedule for this algorithm, the algorithm will
assume to be in the occupied state.
The Setpoint Schedule allows you to configure high and low space
temperature setpoints for both occupied and unoccupied states.
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to control a chilled water valve serving
an air handler’s cooling coil in a constant volume system.
105
AO—Cooling CV
CCCV_xxC
Function Type 2
optional.
* Cooling Coil Valve

* Fan Status Point
* Sensor Group/SPT Sensor
Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
High Humidity Switch
Humidity Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
* Supply Air Temperature
P_Submaster_Loop
Proportional Gain
Center Value
Power on Delay
106
AO—Cooling CV
CCCV_xxC
Function Type 2
List of Maintenance The following maintenance decisions are applicable to this algorithm.
Decisions They provide useful information regarding the status and configura-
tion of this algorithm. You can force the asterisked decisions.

* Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
Space Setpoint
* High Humidity Switch
High Humidity Setpoint
* High Humidity Sensor
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
* Cooling Coil Subm Ref
P_Submaster_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Submaster Flags
Task Timer
107
108
Figure 5-2
AO—Cooling CV
CCCV_xxC
Function Type 2
P_Submaster_Loop Cooling Coil

AO—Cooling CV
Supply Air
Temperature Valve
Output Sensor Output Input Output
Input Force
Status NOT
Status
Time Force Status
Schedule Status
Fan Status Point
Occupancy AND Enable
Output
Maintenance
Status
Force Status
Cooling Coil
Subm Ref
Sensor Group/ PID_Master Loop
(Software
SPT Sensor
TS Override Point)
Enable Output Input Output Setpoint

Status NOT
High Sensor Input
Low Force Status Reference Forced?
Average
Point Forced?
Space Setpoint
Low Setpoint
High Setpoint Setpoint PID
Integrator
Occupancy State ?
Clamp
Output
OR Minimum Output
Status
Force Status OR
Maximum Output

Output Clamp Integrator
>
Status
Reset Integrator
Force Status
NOT
Humidity Setpoint OR
Occupied Low Setpoint

SELECT A SELECT A
-3 I A
A
O B O B
AO—Cooling CV
CCCV_xxC
Function Type 2
Configuration Cooling Coil Valve

Decisions You must configure this decision to specify the AO point that is controlling the air
handler’s chilled water valve.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Fan Status Point

You must configure this decision to specify the DI point that provides the on/off
status of the air handler’s fan. The DI point provides the actual state of the fan.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Sensor Group/SPT Sensor

You must configure this decision to specify the sensor group or single sensor that
is providing the space temperature inputs. For more information on Sensor
Group, refer to that section in this chapter of the manual.
Note: Use the same sensor group or SPT sensor for all algorithms that control a
common air handler.
Allowable Entries Blgd. Supvr. = SNSGRxx
Default Value SNSGR00
Time Schedule
Time Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules section in this manual.
Note: Use the same Time Schedule for all algorithms that control a common air
handler.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = OCCPCxx
109
AO—Cooling CV
CCCV_xxC
Function Type 2
Setpoint Schedule
You must configure this decision to specify the Setpoint Schedule that provides
the occupied and unoccupied space temperature setpoints for this algorithm. For
more information on Setpoint Schedule, refer to the How to Configure Schedules
chapter of this manual.
Note: Use the same space temperature Setpoint Schedule for all algorithms that
control a common air handler.


If the air handler is performing dehumidification, use this decision to specify the
DI point that indicates when dehumidification needs to be performed. The algo-
rithm can use a High Humidity Switch or High Humidity Sensor to determine if
dehumidification is needed. If reheat is being done, the sensor specified here
should be the same one that is specified in the associated heating CV algorithm.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Humidity Setpoint
Setpoint Schedule that provides the humidity setpoint for this algorithm. For
more information on Setpoint Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules
section in this manual. If reheat is being done, the setpoint specified here should
be the same one that is specified in the associated heating CV algorithm.

AI point that provides the space or return air humidity sensor being monitored.
Dehumidification is required if the High Humidity Sensor value is greater than
the high setpoint from the Humidity Setpoint schedule. If reheat is being done,
the occupied sensor specified here should be the same one that is specified in the
associated heating CV algorithm.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value MAMP_I00
110
AO—Cooling CV
CCCV_xxC
Function Type 2
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the Supply Air Setpoint (submaster reference) required to achieve the
desired space temperature.
Proportional Gain

Default Value 10.0
Integral Gain

Default Value 1.0
Derivative Gain
Use this decision to enter the value that is multiplied by the current error
minus the previous error to produce the derivative term. The value in

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the Supply Air Temperature to be main-
tained when the space temperature input(s) are invalid . When the space
temperature input(s) are invalid, the value entered in this decision is
used as the submaster reference.

Default Value 150.0
111
AO—Cooling CV
CCCV_xxC
Function Type 2

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable Supply Air Tempera-
ture (minimum submaster reference). When dehumidification is being
performed, the value in this decision is used as the submaster reference.

Default Value 45.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable Supply Air Tempera-
ture (maximum submaster reference).

Default Value 150.0
Starting Value
Use this decision to specify the starting value for the Supply Air Tem-
perature when the master loop is enabled.

Default Value 55.0

Use this decision to indicate how often the master loop calculates the
submaster reference.

Default Value 120
Supply Air Temperature

You must configure this decision to specify the AI point that provides the air
handler’s supply air temperature to this algorithm. The submaster loop controls
to the difference between the submaster reference and the value of the point
that you specify in this decision.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
112
AO—Cooling CV
CCCV_xxC
Function Type 2
P_Submaster_Loop
The submaster loop is a proportional control loop that computes the chilled
water valve’s position by comparing the calculated submaster reference to the
Supply Air Temperature.
Proportional Gain
Use this decision to specify the value that is multiplied by the error to

Default Value -9.0

Use this decision to specify the output to the chilled water valve when
the fan is off or when the Supply Air Temperature sensor is invalid.

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output to the chilled
water valve.

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output to the chilled
water valve.

Default Value 100.0
Center Value
Use this decision to specify the output value appropriate for the no load
condition.

Default Value 30.0
113
AO—Cooling CV
CCCV_xxM
Function Type 2

Use this decision to specify how often the submaster loop calculates a
new output value.

Default Value 2
Power on Delay
Default Value 0
Maintenance Cooling Coil Valve

Decisions This decision displays the value of the AO point being controlled by this
algorithm. The value is normally expressed as a percentage of full capacity.
Fan Status Point

This decision displays the actual state of the air handler’s fan which determines
whether this algorithm is enabled. If this point is not configured or the value is
off, then this algorithm will not be enabled.

This decision displays the value of the single AI sensor (if chosen) or the
highest sensor in the sensor group (if chosen).
Valid Display -40.00°F to 245.00°F (-40.00 to 118.30°C)
Occupied ?
default mode will be Occupied and Yes will be displayed.
114
AO—Cooling CV
CCCV_xxM
Function Type 2
Space Setpoint
This decision displays the high setpoint from the configured Setpoint Schedule.
The occupancy state is taken into effect when this value is determined.
Valid Display -40.00 to 245.00°F (-40.0 to 118.3°C)

This decision displays the value of the high humidity switch sensor being
monitored. If the decision was not configured, this value will default to the Off
state.

This decision specifies the high humidity setpoint for this algorithm. If the
decision was not configured, this value will default to 99% RH, which will
prevent any dehumidification. The algorithm obtains the occupied high
setpoint from the humidity Setpoint Schedule.
Valid Display 0.00 to 100.00% RH

This decision displays the value of the space or return air humidity sensor being
monitored. Dehumidification is required only if this value exceeds the High
Humidity Setpoint.
PID_Master_Loop
PID Master Loop function calculates the desired output based on the configured
PID gains and the current deviation from setpoint. The calculated output is re-
adjusted periodically to move closer toward the desired setpoint.
Reference Output
This decision displays the calculated submaster reference value.

115
AO—Cooling CV
CCCV_xxM
Function Type 2
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Space Setpoint - Sensor Group/SPT Sensor) *
Proportional Gain
Valid Display -9999.9 to 9999.9^F (-5555.5 to 5555.5^C)
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = ((Space Setpoint - Sensor Group/SPT Sensor) * Integral
Term + Previous Integral Term)
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Current Error - Previous Error) * Derivative Gain
Note: Error = (Space Setpoint - Sensor Group/SPT Sensor)
Integrator Flags
Cooling Coil Subm Ref

This decision displays the value of the calculated submaster reference from the
PID Master Loop. This value is used with the Supply Air Temperature by the P
Submaster Loop. To override the submaster reference, force this decision.
116
AO—Cooling CV
CCCV_xxM
Function Type 2

This decision displays the value of the AI point that provides the air handler’s
supply air temperature.
P_Submaster_Loop
The P (proportional) Submaster Loop controls to the difference between the
submaster reference and the Supply Air Temperature. This loop executes every
two seconds.
Reference Output
algorithm output point.
Reference Output = (Submaster Proportional Term + Submaster Center
Value)
Proportional Term
the submaster loop.
Proportional Term = (Submaster Reference - Supply Air Temperature)
* Submaster Proportional Gain
Submaster Flags
This two-digit field displays the status of the P Submaster Loop.
Left Digit 0 = Submaster Loop is Active
1 = Submaster Loop is Inactive (Disabled or
Clamped)
Right Digit 0 = No PID clamp
1 = PID Clamp Active
Task Timer
executes again. This algorithm will execute every second.
117
AO—Cooling VAV
CCVAVxxC
Function Type 3
The AO—Cooling VAV algorithm modulates the output to control a

AO—Cooling VAV chilled water valve in a variable air volume air handler to maintain a
constant supply air temperature and prevent the space temperature
from exceeding the configured setpoint. This algorithm can also be
configured to perform dehumidification.
The AO—Cooling VAV algorithm uses a PID (Proportional Integral

Derivative) Master Loop to calculate the cooling coil valve position
required to achieve the configured Supply Air Setpoint. The supply
air setpoint is a configured value that can be reset linearly based on
the space temperature.
If one of the following conditions exists, the output value will be set
to the Disabled Output Value:
• the space temperature is below the average value of the high and
low temperature setpoints.
• the fan status indicates that the fan is off.
• the Supply Air Temperature sensor is out of range.
During dehumidification, the output value will be set to the Maxi-

mum Output Value.
The Setpoint Schedule gives you the capability to configure high

and low space temperature setpoints for both occupied and unoccu-
pied states.
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to control a chilled water valve serving a
cooling coil in a variable air volume air handler.
118
AO—Cooling VAV
CCVAVxxC
Function Type 3
optional.

* Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
Humidity Setpoint
VAV Setpoint Reset
Supply Air Setpoint
Reset Ratio
Start Reset
Maximum Reset
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
Power on Delay
119
AO—Cooling VAV
CCVAVxxC
Function Type 3

* Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
VAV Setpoint Reset
Setpoint
Setpoint Offset
* CCV Supply Air Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Task Timer
120
Figure 5-3
AO—Cooling VAV
Time
Schedule
Output PID_Master Loop Cooling
Fan Status Point Coil
Maintenance Valve
Output
AND Enable
Status Output Input
Force Status
Output
Space Setpoint
Force
Low Setpoint (Low Setpoint +
High Setpoint)/2 Status
High Setpoint < Status
Occupancy State ?
Sensor Group/ VAV Supply Air

SPT Sensor Setpoint Setpoint
Reset (Software
TS Override
Status Output Point)

Input
Sensor
High Output Setpoint
Input
Low
Sensor Force
Average Status
Status
Supply Air
Temperature
Output Sensor Input
Status
Force Status
High Humidity Switch Minimum Output
Output
OR Maximum Output
Status
Force Status

Output
Status > Clamp Integrator
Force Status
Reset Integrator
Humidity Setpoint
+
Occupied Low Setpoint SELECT A
1 A
SELECT A
CCVAVxxC
O B
-3 A OR
O B
Function Type 3
AO—Cooling VAV
121
AO—Cooling VAV
CCVAVxxC
Function Type 3

Decisions You must configure this decision to specify the AO point that is controlling the
air handler’s chilled water valve.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Fan Status Point

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

Note: Use the same sensor group or SPT Sensor for all algorithms that control
a common air handler.
Time Schedule
Note: Use the same Time Schedule for all algorithms that control a common
air handler.
122
AO—Cooling VAV
CCVAVxxC
Function Type 3
Setpoint Schedule
the occupied and unoccupied space temperature setpoints for this algorithm.
For more information on Setpoint Schedules, refer to the How to Configure
Schedules chapter of this manual.
Note: Use the same space temperature Setpoint Schedule for all algorithms
that control a common air handler.

If the air handler is performing dehumidification, use this decision to specify
the DI point that indicates when dehumidification needs to be performed. The
algorithm can use a High Humidity Switch or High Humidity Sensor to deter-
mine if dehumidification is needed. If reheat is being done, the sensor speci-
fied here should be the same one that is specified in the associated heating
VAV algorithm.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Humidity Setpoint
the Setpoint Schedule that provides the humidity setpoint for this algorithm.
Schedules section in this manual. If reheat is being done, the setpoint specified
here should be the same one that is specified in the associated heating VAV
algorithm.

the AI point that provides the space or return air humidity sensor being moni-
tored. Dehumidification is required if the High Humidity Sensor value is
greater than the high setpoint from the Humidity Setpoint schedule. If reheat is
being done, the sensor specified here should be the same one that is specified in
the associated heating VAV algorithm.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
123
AO—Cooling VAV
CCVAVxxC
Function Type 3
VAV Setpoint Reset

VAV Setpoint Reset provides the supply air setpoint to the master loop. The
configured setpoint can be reset upward based on space temperature.
Supply Air Setpoint

Use this decision to specify the minimum supply air temperature that
this algorithm will maintain.
Allowable Entries 0.0 to 120.0°F (-17.8 to 48.9°C)

Reset Ratio
If the supply air setpoint is being reset, use this decision to specify the
amount of reset for every degree the space temperature is above the
value in the Start Reset configuration decision. The value in this
decision is expressed in degrees per degrees error.
Allowable Entries 0.0 to 5.0^F (0.0 to 2.8^C)

Start Reset
If the Supply Air Setpoint is being reset, use this decision to specify the
space temperature that must be exceeded before the Supply Air
Setpoint is reset. If you enter zero in this decision, the algorithm uses
the Occupied High Setpoint as the start reset temperature.

Default Value 0.0 (-17.8)
Maximum Reset
maximum amount the Supply Air Setpoint can be reset above the
configured value.

124
AO—Cooling VAV
CCVAVxxC
Function Type 3

handler’s supply air temperature to this algorithm.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the valve position required to achieve the desired Supply Air
Setpoint.
Proportional Gain

Default Value -9.0
Integral Gain

Default Value -1.0
Derivative Gain

Default Value 0.0
125
AO—Cooling VAV
CCVAVxxC
Function Type 3

space temperature is below the average value of the temperature
setpoints, the fan status indicates the fan is off, or the supply air tem-
perature sensor is out of range.
Default Value 0.0

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output value. During
dehumidification, the algorithm sets the output to the value entered in
this decision.
Default Value 100.0
Starting Value
Master Loop is enabled.
Default Value 30.0

valve position.
Default Value 30
Power on Delay
Default Value 0
126
AO—Cooling VAV
CCVAVxxM
Function Type 3

algorithm.
Fan Status Point

whether this algorithm is enabled. If this point is off or not configured, then
this algorithm will not be enabled.

Occupied ?
default mode will be occupied and Yes will be displayed.

This decision displays the value of the high humidity switch being monitored.
If this decision is not configured, this value will default to the Off state.

This decision displays the high humidity setpoint for this algorithm. If the
prevent any dehumidification. The algorithm uses the occupied high setpoint
that is obtained from the humidity Setpoint Schedule.
127
AO—Cooling VAV
CCVAVxxM
Function Type 3

This decision displays the value of the space or return air humidity sensor
being monitored. Dehumidification is required only if this value exceeds the
High Humidity Setpoint.
VAV Setpoint Reset

VAV Setpoint Reset provides the supply air setpoint value to the master loop.
Setpoint
This decision displays the calculated supply air setpoint that is used by
to the master loop. This value represents the sum of calculated offset
added to the configured Supply Air Setpoint.
Valid Display 0.0 to 120.0°F (-17.8 to 48.8°C)
Setpoint Offset
This calculated value represents the amount of reset that is added to the
configured Supply Air Setpoint to generate the setpoint value.
Setpoint Offset = (VAV Start Reset - Sensor Group/SPT Sensor) *

Reset Ratio
CCV Supply Air Setpoint

This decision displays the calculated Supply Air Setpoint for the PID Master
Loop. To override the Supply Air Setpoint, force this decision.

128
AO—Cooling VAV
CCVAVxxM
Function Type 3
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (CCV Supply Air Setpoint - Supply Air
Temperature) * Proportional Gain
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = ((CCV Supply Air Setpoint - Supply Air Temperature)
* Integral Term + Previous Integral Term)
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Note: Error = (CCV Supply Air Setpoint - Supply Air Temperature)
129
AO—Cooling VAV
CCVAVxxM
Function Type 3
Integrator Flags



Task Timer
130
AO—Fan Tracking
FANTRxxC
Function Type 4
The AO—Fan Tracking algorithm modulates the analog output to

AO—Fan Tracking control the return air fan speed or inlet guide vane position to main-
tain a constant delta pressure between the supply and return air fans
in a variable air volume system.
The Fan Tracking algorithm uses a PID (Proportional Integral
Derivative) Master Loop to control the fan speed or inlet guide vane
position. The PID Master Loop compares the Return Air Pressure to
a calculated setpoint in order to compute the desired output value.
The PID Master Loop calculates the output value in order to keep
the Return Air Pressure (CFM) equal to the Supply Air Pressure
(CFM) minus the configured Delta CFM Setpoint. If the fan is off
or either the supply or return air velocity pressure sensor value is
invalid, the output is set to the Disabled Output Value.
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to control the inlet guide vanes or speed
controller of a return air fan in a variable air volume system. In
such an instance, the return fan would be controlled to maintain a
delta pressure in CFM between the supply and return air fans in the
system.
optional.
* Fan Status Point
* Supply Air Pressure
* Return Air Pressure
RAV Control (Return Air Velocity)
Delta CFM Setpoint
Supply Air Duct Area
Return Air Duct Area
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
Power on Delay
131
AO—Fan Tracking
FANTRxxC
Function Type 4
configuration of this algorithm. You can force the asterisked
decisions.

* Fan Status Point
* Supply Air Pressure
* Return Air Pressure
RAV Control
Setpoint RVP
Actual Supply Air Flow
Actual Return Air Flow
Return Air Flow Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Task Timer
132
Figure 5-4
AO—Fan Tracking
Fan Status Point PID_Master_Loop Analog Output Point

Output
AND Enable Output Input Status
Status OR
Force Status Force Status
Minimum Output
Return Air Pressure
Maximum Output
Status
OR NOT
Force Status
Output Sensor Input
RAV Control
Supply Air Pressure Sensor Input (RVP)
Status Setpoint (RVP) Setpoint

Force Status
Output Sensor Input (SVP) Clamp Integrator
Reset Integrator
FANTRxxC
Function Type 4
AO—Fan Tracking
133
AO—Fan Tracking
FANTRxxC
Function Type 4

return air fan speed or inlet guide vane position.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Fan Status Point

off status of the air handler’s fan. The DI point provides the actual state of the
fan.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Supply Air Pressure

You must configure this decision to define the AI point that provides the
Supply Air Pressure for the air handler.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Return Air Pressure

You must configure this decision to define the AI point that provides the
Return Air Pressure for the air handler.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
134
AO—Fan Tracking
FANTRxxC
Function Type 4
RAV Control
RAV (Return Air Velocity) Control computes the desired Return Air Pressure
based on the Supply Air Pressure and the configured Delta CFM Setpoint.
Delta CFM Setpoint

Use this decision to define the required difference between the Supply
and Return Air Pressure.
Allowable Entries 0.0 to 40000.0 CFM

Default Value 500.0
Supply Air Duct Area

Use this decision to define the area of the air handler’s supply air duct.
Allowable Entries 0.0 to 100.00 Sq Ft (0.0 to 929.0 m2)

Return Air Duct Area

Use this decision to define the area of the air handler’s return air duct.
Allowable Entries 0.0 to 100.0 Sq Ft (0.0 to 929.0 m2)

PID_Master_Loop
calculates the return air fan speed or guide vane position required to achieve the
calculated setpoint.
Proportional Gain

Default Value 0.5
135
AO—Fan Tracking
FANTRxxC
Function Type 4
Integral Gain

Default Value 0.5
Derivative Gain

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the output value (i.e., return air fan speed or
inlet guide vane position) to be maintained when the fan is off or when
either the supply or return air velocity pressure sensor is invalid.

Default Value 0.0


Default Value 0.0


Default Value 3.0
136
AO—Fan Tracking
FANTRxxM
Function Type 4
Starting Value

Default Value 0.0


Default Value 10
Power on Delay
Use this decision to specify the number of seconds the Comfort Controller
must wait to activate this algorithm after a power failure occurs.

Default Value 0

algorithm.
Fan Status Point

This decision displays the actual state of the air handler’s which determines
whether this algorithm is enabled. If this point is not configured or the value
displayed in this decision is Off, then this algorithm will not be enabled.
Supply Air Pressure

This decision displays the value of the Supply Air Pressure for the air handler.
Valid Display 0.00 to 5.00 “H20 (0.00 to 1244.4 Pa)
137
AO—Fan Tracking
FANTRxxM
Function Type 4
Return Air Pressure

This decision displays the value of the Return Air Pressure for the air handler.
RAV Control
This function computes the desired Return Air Pressure based on the Supply Air
Pressure and the configured Delta CFM Setpoint.
Setpoint RVP
This decision displays the calculated Return Air Velocity Setpoint which
is used by the master loop.
Actual Supply Air Flow

This decision displays the calculated supply air flow.
Supply Air Flow = SQRT (Supply Air Pressure) * Supply Air Duct Area
* 4005
Valid Display 0.0 to 99999.9 CFM
Actual Return Air Flow

This decision displays the calculated return air flow.
Return Air Flow = SQRT (Return Air Pressure) * Return Air Duct Area
* 4005
Return Air Flow Setpoint

This decision displays the setpoint value for the return air flow that is
necessary to achieve the desired return air pressure.
Return Air Flow Setpoint = (Actual Supply Air Flow - Delta CFM
Setpoint)
138
AO—Fan Tracking
FANTRxxM
Function Type 4
PID_Master_Loop
The PID_Master_Loop function calculates the desired output based on the
configured PID gains and the current deviation from setpoint. The calculated
output is readjusted periodically to move closer toward the desired setpoint.
Reference Output
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Setpoint RVP - Return Air Pressure) *
Proportional Gain
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = ((Setpoint RVP - Return Air Pressure) * Integral Term +
Previous Integral Term)
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Note: Error = (Setpoint RVP - Return Air Pressure)
139
AO—Fan Tracking
FANTRxxM
Function Type 4
Integrator Flags



Task Timer
140
AO—Heating CV
HCCV_xxC
Function Type 5
The AO—Heating CV algorithm modulates the analog output to

AO—Heating CV control a hot water or steam valve in a constant volume air handler
to prevent the space temperature from falling below the configured
setpoint.
The AO—Heating CV algorithm uses both a PID (Proportional

Integral Derivative) Master Loop and a P (Proportional) Submaster
Loop to control the valve. The PID Master Loop calculates the
Supply Air Temperature setpoint (submaster reference) required to
achieve the desired space temperature setpoint. The space tempera-
ture setpoint is increased by the Heating Setpoint Offset if dehu-
midification is being performed by the associated AO—Cooling CV
algorithm. The PID Master Loop calculates the submaster reference
by obtaining the lowest sensor input from the Sensor Group/SPT
Sensor and comparing it to the low setpoint from the Setpoint
Schedule. The PID Master Loop output equals the Disable Output
Value whenever the fan is off or the Sensor Group/SPT Sensor
status is invalid. The P Submaster Loop is a proportional loop that
computes the hot water or steam valve’s position by comparing the
calculated submaster reference to the Supply Air Temperature.
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to control a hot water or steam valve
serving an air handler’s cooling coil in a constant volume system.
141
AO—Heating CV
HCCV_xxC
Function Type 5
optional.
* Heating Coil Valve

* Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
Heating Setpoint Offset
Humidity Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
P_Submaster_Loop
Proportional Gain
Center Value
Power on Delay
142
AO—Heating CV
HCCV_xxC
Function Type 5

* Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
Space Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
* Heating Coil Subm Ref
P_Submaster_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Submaster Flags
Task Timer
143
144
Figure 5-5
HCCV_xxC
AO—Heating
Supply Air P_Submaster_Loop
Function Type 5
Temperature
AO—Heating CV
Time Output Sensor Input Heating Coil

Schedule Status NOT Fan Status Valve
Output Force Status
Output Input Output
Maintenance
Force
PID_Master Loop
Status
Fan Status Point
Status
Output
AND Enable
Status
Force Status
Heating Coil
Subm Ref
Sensor Group/SPT (Software
Sensor
TS Override Point)
Output Input
Status NOT
High Output Setpoint
Low Sensor Input
Average Force
Reference Forced?
Status
Space Setpoint
Low Setpoint
+ Setpoint
High Setpoint Point Forced?
Occupancy State ?
PID
Integrator
High Humidity Switch OR Select Clamp

Output A
Status Minimum Output
Force Status
Heating
Setpoint A Maximum Output OR
Offset
Output
> 0 B
Status
Force Status
Clamp Integrator
Humidity Setpoint Reset Integrator

OR
SELECT A SELECT A
-3 A I A
O B O B
AO—Heating CV
HCCV_xxC
Function Type 5
Configuration Heating Coil Valve

air handler’s hot water or steam valve.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Fan Status Point

fan.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

You must configure this decision to specify the sensor group or single sensor
that is providing the space temperature inputs. For more information on Sensor
Note: Use the same sensor group or SPT sensor for all algorithms that control
LID = xx, when xx = function number
Time Schedule
Time Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules chapter in this
manual.
air handler.
145
AO—Heating CV
HCCV_xxC
Function Type 5
Setpoint Schedule
Note: Use the same space temperature Setpoint Schedule for all algorithms
that control a common air handler.


the offset that will be added to the low heating setpoint during dehumidifica-
tion.
Allowable Entries -10.0 to 10.0^F (-5.5 to 5.5^C)


the DI point that indicates if dehumidification needs to be performed. The
mine if dehumidification is needed. If dehumidification is being done, the
same sensor that is used here should be used in the associated cooling CV
algorithm.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
146
AO—Heating CV
HCCV_xxC
Function Type 5
Humidity Setpoint
Schedules chapter in this manual. If dehumidification is being done, the same
setpoint that is used here should be used in the associated cooling CV algo-
rithm.


the AI point that provides the space humidity to this algorithm. Dehumidifica-
tion is required if the High Humidity Sensor value is greater than the occupied
high setpoint from the Humidity Setpoint schedule. If dehumidification is
being done, the same sensor that is used here should be used in the associated
cooling CV algorithm.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the Supply Air Setpoint (submaster reference) required to achieve
the desired space temperature.
Proportional Gain

Default Value 10.0
147
AO—Heating CV
HCCV_xxC
Function Type 5
Integral Gain
Default Value 1.0
Derivative Gain
Default Value 0.0

tained when all the space temperature input(s) are invalid or when the
fan status indicates the fan is off. When either of these events occurs,
the value entered in this decision is used as the submaster reference.
Allowable Entries -40.0 to 245.0°F (-40.0 to 118.3°C)
Default Value 45.0

ture (minimum submaster reference).
Default Value 40.0

Default Value 140.0
148
AO—Heating CV
HCCV_xxC
Function Type 5
Starting Value
perature when the PID Master Loop is enabled.

Default Value 80.0

Use this decision to indicate how often the PID Master Loop calculates
the submaster reference.

Default Value 120


LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
P_Submaster_Loop
The submaster loop is a proportional control loop that computes the hot water
or steam valve’s position by comparing the calculated submaster reference to
the Supply Air Temperature.
Proportional Gain

Default Value -5.5
149
AO—Heating CV
HCCV_xxC
Function Type 5

Use this decision to specify the output to the hot water or steam valve
when the Supply Air Temperature sensor is invalid.
Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output to the hot water
or steam valve.
Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output to the hot
water or steam valve.
Default Value 100.0
Center Value
condition.
Default Value 30.0

new output value.
Default Value 2
Power on Delay
Default Value 0
150
AO—Heating CV
HCCV_xxM
Function Type 5
Maintenance Heating Coil Valve

algorithm.
Fan Status Point


lowest sensor in the sensor group (if chosen).
Occupied ?
Space Setpoint
This decision displays the low setpoint of the configured Setpoint Schedule.
151
AO—Heating CV
HCCV_xxM
Function Type 5

monitored. If the decision was not configured, this value will default to the Off
state.

This decision displays the high humidity setpoint for this algorithm. The
algorithm uses the occupied high setpoint from the humidity Setpoint Schedule.
If the decision was not configured, this value will default to 99% RH, which
will prevent any dehumidification.

Humidity Setpoint.
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Space Setpoint - Sensor Group/SPT Sensor) *
Proportional Gain
152
AO—Heating CV
HCCV_xxM
Function Type 5
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = ((Space Setpoint - Sensor Group/SPT Sensor) *
Integral Term + Previous Integral Term)
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Integrator Flags
Heating Coil Subm Ref

This decision displays the calculated submaster reference from the PID Master
Loop. This value is used with the Supply Air Temperature by the submaster
loop. To override the submaster reference, force this decision.

supply air temperature. This must be configured to enable the submaster loop
to execute properly.
153
AO—Heating CV
HCCV_xxM
Function Type 5
P_Submaster_Loop
submaster reference and the supply air temperature. This loop executes every
two seconds.
Reference Output
Value)
Proportional Term
the submaster loop.
Submaster Flags
Clamped)
Task Timer
154
AO—Heating VAV
HCVAVxxC
Function Type 6
The AO—Heating VAV algorithm modulates the analog output to

AO—Heating VAV control a hot water or steam valve in a variable air volume air
handler for morning warm-up or to prevent the space temperature
from falling below the configured setpoint.
The AO—Heating VAV algorithm uses both a PID (Proportional

Integral Derivative) Master Loop and a P (Proportional) Submaster
loop to control the value. The PID Master Loop calculates the
Supply Air Temperature setpoint (submaster reference) required to
achieve the desired space temperature setpoint. The space tempera-
ture setpoint is increased by the Heating Setpoint Offset if dehu-
midification is being performed by the associated AO—Cooling
VAV algorithm. The PID Master Loop calculates the submaster
reference by obtaining the lowest sensor input from the Sensor
Group/SPT Sensor and comparing it to the low setpoint from the
Setpoint Schedule. The PID Master Loop output equals the Dis-
abled Output Value whenever the fan is off or the Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor status is invalid. The P Submaster Loop computes the
hot water or steam valve’s position by comparing the calculated
submaster reference to the Supply Air Temperature.
For applications that have alternate heat sources, you can use Morn-
ing Warmup to preheat the space prior to occupancy.
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to control a hot water or steam valve
serving an air handler’s heating coil in a variable air volume system.
155
AO—Heating VAV
HCVAVxxC
Function Type 6
optional.

* Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
Humidity Setpoint
Occupied Heating
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
P_Submaster_Loop
Proportional Gain
Center Value
Power on Delay
156
AO—Heating VAV
HCVAVxxC
Function Type 6

* Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
Space Setpoint
Morning Warm Up
Reference Output
Morning Warmup ?
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
* HCV Supply Air Setpoint
P_Submaster_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Submaster Flags
Task Timer
157
158
Figure 5-6
AO—Heating VAV
HCVAVxxC
Function Type 6
Fan Morning
Status Point Warm Up
AO—Heating VAV
Output Fan Status

Status
Force Status
Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor
TS Override Supply Air P_Submaster_Loop
Status Disable Temperature
High Sensor Input
Output
Low Heating
Status Status NOT Fan Status Coil
Average
Force Status Valve
Space
Time Schedule Temp. Output Input
Output Occupancy Output
State? Heating
Maintenance PID_Master_Loop Coil Subm Force
Setpoint Ref
(Software Status
Status
Point)
AND Enable Output Input
NOT
Space Setpoint
Sensor Input Output Setpoint
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint Force

Reference
+ Setpoint
Status
Forced? PID
High Integrator
Humidity Switch
Clamp
Output Select
Status A
Force Status Minimum Output Point Forced?
High Heating
Setpoint A Maximum Output
Humidity Sensor Offset
Output
Clamp Integrator
Status
Force Status OR
0 B Reset Integrator
Humidity
Setpoint
OR
Occupied >
Low Setpoint
OR
Occupied
High Setpoint
+
SELECT A
SELECT A I A
-3 A
O B
O B
05
AO—Heating VAV
HCVAVxxC
Function Type 6
Configuration Heating Coil Valve

air handler’s hot water or steam valve.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = up to 8 character
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Fan Status Point

fan.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

You must configure this decision to specify the Sensor Group or a single sensor
Note: Use the same Sensor Group or SPT Sensor for all algorithms that
Time Schedule
manual.
air handler.
159
AO—Heating VAV
HCVAVxxC
Function Type 6
Setpoint Schedule
For more information on Setpoint Schedule, refer to the How to Configure
Note: Use the same Space Temperature Setpoint for all algorithms that


the offset that will be added to the low heating setpoint during dehumidifica-
tion.


the DI point that indicates if dehumidification needs to be performed. The
mine if dehumidification is needed. If dehumidification is being performed,
the same sensor that is used here should be used in the associated cooling VAV
algorithm.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
160
AO—Heating VAV
HCVAVxxC
Function Type 6
Humidity Setpoint
Schedules section in this manual. If dehumidification is being performed, the
same setpoint that is used here should be used in the associated cooling VAV
algorithm.

the AI point that provides the space humidity to this algorithm. Dehumidifica-
tion is required if the High Humidity Sensor value is greater than the occupied
high setpoint from the Humidity Setpoint schedule. If dehumidification is
being performed, the same sensor that is used here should be used in the associ-
ated cooling VAV algorithm.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Occupied Heating
Use this decision to enable heating during Occupied periods.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = No or Yes
LID = 0 (No) or 1 (Yes)
Default Value No
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the Supply Air Setpoint (submaster reference) required to achieve the
desired space temperature.
Proportional Gain
Default Value 10.0
161
AO—Heating VAV
HCVAVxxC
Function Type 6
Integral Gain

Default Value 0.4
Derivative Gain

Default Value 0.0

tained when all the space temperature input(s) are invalid or when the
fan status indicates the fan is off. When either of these events occurs,
the value entered in this decision is used as the submaster reference.

Default Value 45.0

ture (minimum submaster reference).

Default Value 40.0


Default Value 140.0
162
AO—Heating VAV
HCVAVxxC
Function Type 6
Starting Value
perature when the PID Master Loop is enabled.


Use this decision to indicate how often the PID Master Loop calculates

Default Value 120

handler’s supply air temperature to this algorithm. The submaster loop con-
trols to the difference between the submaster reference and the value of the
point that you specify in this decision.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
P_Submaster_Loop
The submaster loop is a proportional control loop that computes the hot water
or steam valve’s position by comparing the calculated submaster reference to
the Supply Air Temperature.
Proportional Gain

Default Value -7.5
163
AO—Heating VAV
HCVAVxxC
Function Type 6

Use this decision to specify the output to the hot water or steam valve
when the Supply Air Temperature sensor is invalid.
Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output to the hot water
or steam valve.
Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output to the hot
Default Value 100.0
Center Value
condition.
Default Value 30.0

new output value.
Default Value 2
Power on Delay
Default Value 0
164
AO—Heating VAV
HCVAVxxM
Function Type 6
Maintenance Heating Coil Valve

Decisions This decision displays the value of the AO point being controlled by this algo-
rithm.
Fan Status Point

Off, then this algorithm will not be enabled.

This decision displays the value of the single AI sensor (if chosen) or the lowest
sensor in the sensor group (if chosen).
Occupied ?
data in the Time Schedule. If no Time Schedule has been selected, then the
default mode will be Yes.
Space Setpoint
This decision displays the low setpoint of the configured setpoint schedule.

monitored. If this decision was not configured, the value will default to the Off
state.
165
AO—Heating VAV
HCVAVxxM
Function Type 6

from the Humidity Setpoint schedule.

Humidity Setpoint.
Morning Warmup
Morning Warmup function is used to bring the space temperature up to occu-
pied setting after a setback period. Once the setpoint is reached, Heating will
be disabled for the remainder of that occupied period, unless Occupied Heating
configuration decision is set to Yes.
Reference Output
This decision along with the Fan Status determines whether the PID
loop becomes enabled. If Occupied Heating is Yes, the output is On
whenever Fan Status is On. Otherwise, the output is On only when Fan
Status is On and Morning Warmup is True.
Morning Warmup?
This decision tells if the algorithm is executing the morning warmup
function.
Valid Display True/False
166
AO—Heating VAV
HCVAVxxM
Function Type 6
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Valid Display -40.0 to 245.0°F
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Space Setpoint - Sensor Group/SPT Sensor)
* Proportional Gain
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = (Space Setpoint - Sensor Group/SPT Sensor) * Integral

Derivative Term
PID equation.

167
AO—Heating VAV
HCVAVxxM
Function Type 6
Integrator Flags
HCV Supply Air Setpoint

This decision displays the calculated submaster reference from the PID Master
Loop. This value is used with the Supply Air Temperature by the P Submaster
Loop. To override the submaster reference, force this point.

supply air temperature. This must be configured to enable the submaster loop
to execute properly.
P_Submaster_Loop
submaster reference and the supply air temperature. This loop executes every
two seconds.
Reference Output

Value)
168
AO—Heating VAV
HCVAVxxM
Function Type 6
Proportional Term
the submaster loop.

Submaster Flags

Clamped)

Task Timer
169
AO—Humidity Control
HUMIDxxC
Function Type 7
The AO—Humidity Control algorithm provides an output to a humidi-

AO—Humidity fier that requires modulating control. The humidifier is controlled to
Control maintain the space or return air humidity to the configured setpoint.
The Humidity Control algorithm uses a PID (Proportional Integral

Derivative) Master Loop to control the humidifier. The PID Master
Loop uses the Space Humidity Sensor input and compares it to the
configured occupied low setpoint from the Humidity Setpoint schedule
to compute the desired amount of humidification. If the Space Humid-
ity Sensor input is greater than the configured occupied high setpoint
or if the High Humidity Switch is closed, the output is set to the
Minimum Output Value. If the air handler supply fan is off, the output
is set to the configured Disabled Output Value.
The Humidity Setpoint schedule provides the occupied high and low
humidity setpoints. The algorithm uses the high setpoint to determine
if dehumidification is required. It uses the low setpoint as the refer-
ence for the PID Master Loop to control the humidifier.
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to control a steam grid type of humidifier.
optional.
* Fan Status Point
* Space Humidity Sensor
* Humidity Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
Power on Delay
170
HUMIDxxC
Function Type 7

* Fan Status Point
* Space Humidity Sensor
Humidity Setpoint
High Humidity Limit
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Task Timer
171
172
Figure 5-7
HUMIDxxC
PID_Master_Loop
Function Type 7
Fan Status Point Analog Output Point

Output Enable Output Input
AND
Status Status
Force Status
Force
Space
Humidity Sensor Status
Output Sensor Input
Status NOT
Force Status

Output
OR SELECT A Minimum Output
Status
I A
Force Status
Maximum Output
O B
Output
Status
>
Force Status
Humidity Setpoint SELECT A

-3 A
Occupied +
High Setpoint O B
Occupied Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Clamp Integrator
Reset Integrator
OR
HUMIDxxC
Function Type 7

air handler’s humidifier.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Fan Status Point

fan.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Space Humidity Sensor

You must configure this decision to specify the AI point that is providing the
space or return duct humidity input.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

If the air handler is performing humidification, use this decision to specify the
DI point that indicates when supply duct humidity is unacceptably high. The
algorithm can use a High Humidity Switch or Space Humidity Sensor to deter-
mine if the humidity is unacceptably high.
Note: Use the same High Humidity Switch to determine dehumidification in

all algorithms that control a common air handler.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
173
HUMIDxxC
Function Type 7
Humidity Setpoint
You must configure this decision to specify the Setpoint Schedule that will
provide the Humidity Setpoint and High Humidity Limit for this algorithm. For
more information on Setpoint Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Sched-
ules section in this manual.
Note: Use the same Humidity Setpoint schedule for all algorithms that control a
common air handler.

If the air handler is performing humidification, use this decision to specify the AI
point that provides the space or return air humidity sensor being monitored.
the high setpoint from the Humidity Setpoint Schedule.
Note: Use the same High Humidity Sensor to determine dehumidification in all
algorithms that control a common air handler.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the amount of humidification that is required to achieve the desired
space or return air humidity.
Proportional Gain
produce the proportional term. The value in this decision is expressed in
units-per-unit of error.
Default Value 9.0
Integral Gain
Use this decision to enter the value that is multiplied by the error plus the
current integral term to produce the new integral term. The value in this
decision is expressed in units-per-unit of error.
Default Value 1.0
174
HUMIDxxC
Function Type 7
Derivative Gain

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the output value to the humidifier when the
fan is off.

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output value to the
humidifier. During dehumidification, the value in this decision is used
as the output value.

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output value to the
humidifier.

Default Value 100.0
Starting Value
Master Loop is enabled by the Fan Status Point.

Default Value 20.0
175
HUMIDxxM
Function Type 7

The value in this decision indicates how often the master loop calculates

Default Value 120
Power on Delay

Default Value 0

algorithm.
Fan Status Point

Space Humidity Sensor

This decision displays the value of the humidity sensor providing the duct or
space humidity input.
176
HUMIDxxM
Function Type 7

This decision displays the High Humidity Switch sensor being monitored. If
this decision is not configured, the value will default to the Off state.
Humidity Setpoint
This decision displays the humidity setpoint for this algorithm. This algorithm
uses the occupied low setpoint from the Humidity Setpoint schedule.

This decision displays the value of the supply duct humidity sensor being
monitored. If this value exceeds the High Humidity Limit, humidification will
be needed.
High Humidity Limit

This decision specifies the high humidity setpoint for this algorithm. If a
setpoint schedule is not configured, this value will default to 99% RH, which
will prevent dehumidification. The algorithm uses the occupied high setpoint
from the Humidity Setpoint schedule.
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
177
HUMIDxxM
Function Type 7
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Humidity Setpoint - Space Humidity Sensor) *
Proportional Gain
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = ((Humidity Setpoint - Space Humidity Sensor) *
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Note: Error = (Humidity Setpoint - Space Humidity Sensor)
Integrator Flags
Task Timer
178
AO—Mixed Air CV w IAQ
MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
The AO—Mixed Air CV w IAQ algorithm controls the outside air,

AO—Mixed Air CV
return air, and exhaust dampers in a constant volume air handler.
w IAQ
When outside air conditions are unsuitable for cooling, the algo-
rithm holds the dampers at an adjustable, minimum position. If
outside air conditions are suitable for cooling, the algorithm modu-
lates the mixed air dampers as required to maintain a space tempera-
ture that is between the low and high occupied setpoints.
PID Master Loop and This algorithm uses both a PID (Proportional Integral Derivative)
P Submaster Loop Master Loop and a P (Proportional) Submaster Loop to control the
damper position. The PID Master Loop calculates the mixed air
temperature setpoint (submaster reference) required to achieve the
desired space temperature setpoint. The PID Master Loop calculates
the submaster reference by obtaining the highest or lowest space
temperature sensor input from the Sensor Group/SPT Sensor and
comparing it to the space temperature setpoint. The high space
temperature input is used during Night Time Free Cooling or when
summer conditions exist. The low space temperature input is al-
ways used when winter conditions exist. If the outside air condi-
tions are unacceptable for cooling, the submaster reference is set to
its configured maximum value. The P Submaster Loop computes
the damper’s position by comparing the calculated submaster refer-
ence to the Mixed Air Temperature. If the air handler’s supply fan
is off or if the Mixed Air Temperature sensor is out of range, the
output is set to the configured Disabled Output Value.
Indoor Air Quality Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) allows the algorithm to override the
damper position, thus allowing additional outside air into the build-
ing when the indoor air quality is below the configured limit. The
damper position is computed every two minutes.
IAQ controls the level of carbon dioxide (CO ), volatile organic

2
compounds (VOCs), or other indoor air pollutants by modulating the
mixed air damper. Varying quantities of outdoor air are admitted
during the occupied period to maintain pollutants at or below the
configured setpoints of the IAQ sensors.
179
MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
VOC, or other types of sensors, can be field-supplied and installed,

and configured in two ways:
• One sensor can be installed in either the space or return air

stream to continuously monitor a single gas.
• Two sensors (typically VOC sensors monitoring the same gas)

can be installed inside and outside the occupied space for com-
parative measurements. The control is configured to modify the
damper position based on the value of the sensor in the occupied
space, but before admitting outside air, the control performs a
differential check to determine if the value of the sensor measur-
ing the outside air is higher. If the outside sensor has a higher
pollutant value, the damper does not change position.
Schedules The Time Schedule indicates the current occupancy state for this
Night Time Free NTFC w Enthalpy Check is required if the air handler is equipped to
Cooling use outside air as a suitable source for cooling the space during night
time unoccupied hours or if the air handler needs to modulate the
dampers in either a drybulb or enthalpy type economizer operation.
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to store excess internal heat within the
structure during winter months, or to use cool outside air during
summer months to the greatest possible extent. This minimizes the
need for heating or mechanical cooling.
180
MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
optional.

* Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
NTFC Algorithm
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
* Mixed Air Temperature
P_Submaster_Loop
Proportional Gain
Center Value
IAQ Sensor
Comparison IAQ Snsor
Indoor Air Quality
IAQ Setpoint
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Temp & Humidity Test
Differential Gas
Power on Delay
181
MADCVxxC
Function Type 8

* Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
NTFC Active?
NTFC Setpoint
Outside Enthalpy Good?
* Control Point
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
* Mixed Air CV Subm Ref
P_Submaster_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Submaster Flags
* IAQ Sensor
* Comparison IAQ Snsor
IAQ Setpoint
Indoor Air Quality
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Clamp
Task Timer
182
Figure 5-8
PID_Master_Loop
NTFC ALGORITHM
Enthalpy Test NOT Minimum Output
Sensor Group/ Setpoint
SPT Sensor Setpoint
NTFC
TS Override
Status Sensor Select Enable
NOT
High High Sensor Output
Low Sensor Input Output
Low Sensor
Average
Maximum Output
Control Point
Setpoint Schedule
NTFC?
Low Setpoint
Bias Input Low Setpoint
High Setpoint
Occupancy State? High Setpoint
Occupied
AND Analog
Bias High Offset Occupied
High Setpoint Time Schedule Output
Output
Point
Maintenance Indoor Air Quality
NOT Input
Low Setpoint
Status
High Setpoint
IAQ Sensor PPM Force
AND
Status AND
NOT Status OR Reset Integrator
Force Status Enable
Output
Comparison AQ Sensor Input (IAQ1)

Sensor PPM Sensor Input (SPT)
Status
Force Status Output
Output Select
Sensor Input (IAQ2) >
High Humidity A
Sensor
Humidity Check?
Output
> A
Status
Force Status
P_Submaster_Loop
High Humidity
Setpoint Minimum Output B
Fan Status Output

Output Override
Status AND Enable
NOT
Force Status
PID
Clamp Integrator
Mixed Air Integrator
Temperature
Status Clamp
Output Sensor Input
Force Status
Mixed Air Subm Ref
Input Output Setpoint
Force Status Reference Forced?
Point Forced?
MADCVxxC
OR
Function Type 8
NOT
183
MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
Configurations Analog Output Point

Decisions You must configure this decision to specify the AO point that is controlling
the air handler’s outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Fan Status Point

fan.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

that is providing the space temperature inputs. For more information on
Sensor Group, refer to that section in this chapter of the manual.
Note: Use the same sensor group or SPT sensor for all algorithms that
Time Schedule
state for this algorithm. If you do not specify a Time Schedule in this deci-
sion, the algorithm will assume to be in the occupied state.
air handler.
184
MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
Setpoint Schedule


If the indoor air quality is being monitored and Temp & Humidity Test is set to
Yes, use this decision to specify the maximum allowable return air humidity
before the IAQ control routine is disabled.
Allowable Entries 0.0 to 100.0%

Default Value 99.0

Yes, use this decision to specify the AI point that provides the return air humid-
ity. When the High Humidity Sensor value is greater than the High Humidity
Setpoint, the IAQ control routine will be disabled.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
NTFC Algorithm
If Night Time Free Cooling will be performed or the dampers will modulate in
either a drybulb or enthalpy type economizer operation, use this decision to
specify the algorithm that will determine if the outside air is suitable for cool-
ing the space. If the outside air is not suitable for cooling during unoccupied
hours, the submaster reference is held to the configured Maximum Output
Value.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = NTFC_xx,

Default Value NTFC_00
185
MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the mixed air temperature setpoint (submaster reference) required to
achieve the desired space temperature.
Proportional Gain

Default Value 10.0
Integral Gain

Default Value 1.0
Derivative Gain

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the Mixed Air Temperature to be main-
tained when the space temperature sensor has failed.

186
MADCVxxC
Function Type 8

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable Mixed Air Tempera-
ture. The value entered in this decision is known as the minimum
submaster reference. The submaster reference is equal to this value
during unoccupied hours when Night Time Free Cooling is not being
performed.

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable Mixed Air Tempera-
ture. The value entered in this decision is known as the maximum
Starting Value
Use this decision to specify the starting value for the Mixed Air
Temperature when the PID Master Loop is enabled.

The value in this decision indicates how often the master loop calcu-
lates the submaster reference.
Default Value 120
Mixed Air Temperature

You must configure this decision to specify the AI point that provides the
mixed air temperature to this algorithm. The submaster loop controls to the
point that you specify in this decision.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
187
MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
P_Submaster_Loop
The submaster loop is a proportional control loop that computes the outside
air, return air, and exhaust damper positions by comparing the calculated
submaster reference (mixed air temperature setpoint) to the Mixed Air Tem-
perature. The damper positions will be controlled by the Indoor Air Quality
or the P Submaster Loop, depending on whose calculated output value is
greater.
Proportional Gain
Default Value -9.0

Use this decision to specify the output to the dampers when the fan is
off or when the Mixed Air Temperature sensor is invalid.
Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output to the outside
air, return air, and exhaust dampers. During the unoccupied state, the
Minimum Output Value is overriden to 0, thus allowing the dampers
to fully close.
Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output to the outside
air, return air, and exhaust dampers.
Default Value 100.0
188
MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
Center Value
Use this decision to specify the output value appropriate for the no
load condition.

Default Value 30.0

new output value.

Default Value 2
IAQ Sensor
If the indoor air quality is being monitored, use this decision to specify the
indoor air quality sensor.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value CMAMPI00

If Differential Gas is configured to Yes, use this decision to specify the out-
door air quality sensor.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
189
MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
Indoor Air Quality

Indoor Air Quality is a proportional and integral control loop that compares
the IAQ setpoint to the IAQ sensors in order to compute the return air, out-
side air, and exhaust air damper positions. The damper positions will be
controlled by the Indoor Air Quality or the P Submaster Loop, depending on
whose calculated output value is greater.
IAQ Setpoint
Use this decision to specify the Indoor Air Quality setpoint.
Allowable Entries 0 to 2000 PPM

Default Value 650
Proportional Gain
produce the proportional term. The value in this decision is ex-
pressed in units-per-unit of error.

Default Value -0.10
Integral Gain
the current integral term to produce the new integral term. The value
in this decision is expressed in units-per-unit of error.

Default Value -0.03

Use this decision to disable the IAQ control routine if either the space
temperature setpoint or High Humidity Setpoint is exceeded.

LID = 0 (No)/1(Yes)
Default Value No
190
MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
Differential Gas
Use this decision to indicate if the outside air is being tested to deter-
mine its suitability for use. If the Comparison IAQ Snsor value (out-
side air quality sensor value) is greater than the IAQ Sensor value
(indoor air quality value), the IAQ control routine will be disabled.

LID = 0 (No)/1 (Yes)
Default Value No

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output to the mixed
air damper for the IAQ control routine.

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output to the mixed

Default Value 50.0
Power on Delay

Default Value 0
191
MADCVxxM
Function Type 8

Decisions This decision displays the output value of the AO point being controlled by this
algorithm.
Fan Status Point


average of the Sensor Group (if chosen).
Occupied ?

This decision displays the value of the return air humidity sensor being moni-
tored. If this value exceeds the High Humidity Setpoint, the IAQ control
routine will be disabled.
NTFC Active?
This decision indicates when Night Time Free Cooling is active. If the NTFC
w Enthalpy Check algorithm was not selected as part of the configuration,
Night Time Free Cooling will be inactive and No will be displayed.
192
MADCVxxM
Function Type 8
NTFC Setpoint
This decision displays the space temperature setpoint when Night Time Free
Cooling is active. The space temperature setpoint will be the occupied high
setpoint from the configured Setpoint Schedule.

This decision indicates when the outside air is suitable for cooling. If the value
displayed in this decision is No, the submaster reference is maintained at its
configured maximum value.
Control Point
This decision displays the space temperature sensor value from the sensor group
being used as the control point when Night Time Free Cooling is active.
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Setpoint - SPT Sensor) * Proportional Term
193
MADCVxxM
Function Type 8
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = (Setpoint - SPT Sensor) * Integral Gain + Previous
Integral Term
Derivative Term
This decision displays the derivative error term as it is calculated by
the PID equation.
Note: Error = (Setpoint - SPT Sensor)
Integrator Flags
This three digit field displays three reference flags which indicate
certain statues for the PID_Master_Loop.
Left Flag 0 = PID Active
Center Flag 0 = Integrator calculating normally
Right Flag 0 = No Integrator Clamp
1 = Integrator Clamp Active
Mixed Air CV Subm Ref

This decision displays the calculated submaster reference from the PID Mas-
ter Loop. This value is used with the Mixed Air Temperature by the P
Submaster Loop. To override the submaster reference, force this decision to
the desired value.

This decision displays the value of the AI point that provides the mixed air
temperature.
194
MADCVxxM
Function Type 8
P_Submaster_Loop
The P (proportional) Submaster Loop controls to the difference between the submaster
reference and the supply air temperature. This loop executes every two seconds.
Reference Output
This decision displays the calculated output that is used to determine the
algorithm's output point value. The algorithm's output point value will be
either that of the IAQ Reference Output or the value displayed in this
decision, depending on which is greater.
Value)
Proportional Term
the submaster loop.
Submaster Flags
Clamped)
IAQ Sensor
This decision displays the value of the indoor air quality in parts per million
(ppm).

This decision displays the value of the outdoor air quality in parts per million
(ppm).
195
MADCVxxM
Function Type 8
IAQ Setpoint
This decision displays the value of the configured indoor air quality setpoint in
parts per million (ppm).
Indoor Air Quality

This function monitors the indoor air quality, and if desired, the outdoor air quality.
Reference Output
algorithm's output point value. The algorithm's output point value will
be either that of the P Submaster Loop's Reference Output or the value
displayed in this decision, depending on which is greater.
Reference Output = (Proportional Term + Integral Term)
Proportional Term
the IAQ Submaster Loop.
Proportional Term = (IAQ Setpoint - IAQ Sensor) * Proportional Gain
Integral Term
IAQ Submaster Loop.
Integral Term = (IAQ Setpoint - IAQ Sensor) + Integral Gain +
Previous Integral Term
Clamp
This decision displays whether the IAQ control routine is being clamped.
The clamp is set whenever the output is less than the minimum output
value or greater than the maximum output value.
Task Timer
196
AO—Mixed Air VAV w IAQ
MADVVxxC
Function Type 9
The AO—Mixed Air VAV w IAQ controls the outside air, return
AO—Mixed Air air, and exhaust dampers in a variable air volume air handler.
VAV w IAQ
PID Master Loop The Mixed Air VAV w IAQ algorithm uses a PID (Proportional
Integral Derivative) Master Loop to control the damper position.
The PID Master Loop calculates the damper position required to
achieve the desired mixed air temperature setpoint. The PID Master
Loop calculates the damper position by comparing the mixed air
temperature to the associated cooling coil supply air setpoint minus
three degrees. If the outside air conditions are unacceptable for
cooling, the output is set to its configured Minimum Output Value.
Indoor Air Quality Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) allows the algorithm to override the
damper position, thus allowing additional outside air into the build-
ing when the indoor air quality is below the configured limit. The
damper position is computed every two minutes.
IAQ controls the level of carbon dioxide (CO2), volatile organic

compounds (VOCs), or other indoor air pollutants by modulating the
mixed air damper. Varying quantities of outdoor air are admitted
during the occupied period to maintain pollutants at or below the
configured setpoints of the IAQ sensors.
VOC, or other types of sensors, can be field-supplied and installed,

and configured in two ways:
• One sensor can be installed in either the space or return air

stream to continuously monitor a single gas.
• Two sensors (typically VOC sensors monitoring the same gas)

can be installed inside and outside the occupied space for com-
parative measurements. The control is configured to modify the
damper position based on the value of the sensor in the occupied
space, but before admitting outside air, the control performs a
differential check to determine if the value of the sensor measur-
ing the outside air is higher. If the outside sensor has a higher
pollutant value, the damper does not change position.
197
MADVVxxC
Function Type 9
Night Time Free NTFC w Enthalpy Check is required if the air handler is equipped to
Cooling use outside air as a suitable source for cooling the space during night
time unoccupied hours or if the air handler needs to modulate the
dampers in either a drybulb or enthalpy type economizer operation.
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to store excess internal heat within the
structure during winter months, or use cool outside air during sum-
mer months to minimize the need for heating or mechanical cooling.
optional.
* Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
NTFC Algorithm
* CCV Supply Air Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
198
MADVVxxC
Function Type 9
IAQ Sensor
Comparison IAQ Sensor
Indoor Air Quality
IAQ Setpoint
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Differential Gas
Power on Delay

* Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
NTFC Active?
* Mixed Air Subm Ref
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
* IAQ Sensor
* Comparison IAQ Snsor
IAQ Setpoint
Indoor Air Quality
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Clamp
Task Timer
199
200
Figure 5-9
MADVVxxC
Setpoint Schedule
Function Type 9
Low Setpoint
Bias Input Indoor Air Quality
High Setpoint
Time Schedule Occupancy State?
Occupied
Low Setpoint Low Setpoint
Bias Low Offset
Occupancy
Occupied
Bias High Offset High Setpoint High Setpoint
Maintenance
Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor
TS Override
Status
High Sensor Input (SPT)
Low
Average NOT AND Enable
AND
IAQ Sensor PPM

Status
NAND
Force Status
Output Sensor Input (IAQ1)
Comparison AQ
Sensor PPM Output
Status
Select
Force Status >
Output Sensor Input (IAQ2) A
High Humidity Analog

Sensor Output Point
Output
Humidity Check? A Input Status
Status > OR
Force Status Force
NTFC ALGORITHM
PID_Master_Loop Status
Setpoint Enthalpy Test Minimum Output
NOT
NTFC Maximum Output
Supply Air
3 Output B
Setpoint Setpoint
Output
-
Force Status
Status
OR NOT
Mixed Air AND Enable
Temperature
Status
Output Sensor Input
Force Status
Clamp Integrator
Fan Status
Output Reset Integrator
Status
Force Status
OR
MADVVxxC
Function Type 9

air handler’s outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Fan Status Point

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

is providing the space temperature inputs. For more information on sensor
group, refer to that section in this chapter of the manual.
Note: Use the same sensor group or SPT sensor for all algorithms that control a
common air handler.
Time Schedule
the algorithm will assume to be in the occupied state.
air handler.
201
MADVVxxC
Function Type 9
Setpoint Schedule


Yes, use this decision to specify the maximum allowable return air humidity
before the IAQ control routine is disabled.
Allowable Entries 0.00 to 100.00% RH

Default Value 80.00

Yes, use this decision to specify the AI point that provides the return air humidity.
When the High Humidity Sensor value is greater than the High Humidity Set-
point, the IAQ control routine will be disabled.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
NTFC Algorithm
If Night Time Free Cooling will be performed or the dampers will be modulated
in either a drybulb or enthalpy type economizer operation, use this decision to
specify the algorithm that will determine if the outside air is suitable for cooling
the space. If the outside air is not suitable for cooling during unoccupied hours,
the submaster reference is held to the configured Minimum Output Value.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = NTFC_xx

202
MADVVxxC
Function Type 9

You must configure this decision to specify the name of the supply air setpoint
(software point) in the associated AO—Cooling VAV algorithm whose value
minus three degrees will be used as the PID Master Loop setpoint. Enter the
same point name that is displayed in the associated AO—Cooling VAV
algorithm's maintenance table CCV Supply Air Setpoint decision.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = CCVVRFxx

LID = xx, where xx = function number of the
AO—Cooling VAV (CCVAVxx) algorithm as
listed in the FNCxx-yy Table
Default Value CCVVRF00

mixed air temperature to this algorithm. The master loop controls to the point

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the output required to achieve the desired mixed air temperature.
The damper positions will be controlled by the Indoor Air Quality control
routine or the PID Master Loop, depending on whose calculated
output value is greater.
Proportional Gain

Default Value -5.0
203
MADVVxxC
Function Type 9
Integral Gain
Default Value -2.0
Derivative Gain
Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the output damper position to be main-
tained when any of the following three situations occurs: The fan is off,
the mixed air temperature sensor is out of range, or the CCV Supply Air
Setpoint in the associated AO—Cooling CV algorithm is invalid.
Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output damper posi-
tion. If the outside air is not suitable for cooling, the output is set to the
value in this decision.
Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output damper posi-
tion. During Night Time Free Cooling, the output is set to the value in
this decision.
Default Value 100.0
204
MADVVxxC
Function Type 9
Starting Value

Default Value 50.0


Default Value 30
IAQ Sensor
If the indoor air quality is being monitored, use this decision to specify the AI
point that provides the air quality of the space being conditioned.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Comparison IAQ Sensor

If Differential Gas is set to Yes, use this decision to specify the outdoor air
quality sensor.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
205
MADVVxxC
Function Type 9
Indoor Air Quality

Indoor Air Quality is a proportional and integral control loop that compares the
IAQ setpoint to the IAQ sensors in order to compute the return air, outside air,
and exhaust air damper positions. The damper positions will be controlled by
the Indoor Air Quality control routine or the P Submaster Loop, depending on
whose calculated output value is greater.
IAQ Setpoint
Use this decision to specify the Indoor Air Quality setpoint.
Allowable Entries 0 to 2000 PPM
Default Value 650
Proportional Gain
Default Value -0.10
Integral Gain
Default Value -0.03

Use this decision to disable the IAQ control routine if either the space
temperature setpoint or High Humidity setpoint is exceeded.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = Yes/No
LID = 0(Yes) / 1(No)
Default Value No
206
MADVVxxC
Function Type 9
Differential Gas
Use this decision to indicate if the outside air is being tested to deter-
mine its suitability for use. If the Comparison IAQ Snsor value (out-
side air quality sensor value) is greater than the IAQ Sensor value
(indoor air quality sensor value), the IAQ control routine will be dis-
abled.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = Yes/No

LID = 0(Yes) / 1(No)
Default Value No

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output to the mixed

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output to the mixed

Default Value 50.0
Power on Delay

Default Value 0
207
MADVVxxM
Function Type 9

Fan Status Point


average of the sensor group (if chosen).
Occupied ?

This decision displays the value of the return air humidity sensor being moni-
tored. If this value exceeds the High Humidity Setpoint, the IAQ control
routine is disabled.
208
MADVVxxM
Function Type 9
NTFC Active?
This decision indicates whether Night Time Free Cooling is active. No will be
displayed in this decision if the NTFC w Enthalpy Check algorithm was not
configured.

This decision indicates whether the outside air is suitable for cooling. If the value
displayed in this decision is No, the damper is maintained at its configured mini-
mum position.

This decision represents the supply air setpoint value from the associated AO—
Cooling VAV algorithm.
Mixed Air Subm Ref

This decision displays the value of the CCV Supply Air Setpoint minus 3 degrees.

This decision displays the value of the AI Point that provides the mixed air tem-
perature.
PID_Master_Loop
209
MADVVxxM
Function Type 9
Reference Output
Analog Output Point. The Analog Output Point will be the greater of
this value or the IAQ Reference Output value.
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Setpoint - SPT Sensor) * Proportional Term
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = (Setpoint - SPT Sensor) * Integral Gain + Previous
Integral Term
Derivative Term
PID equation.

210
MADVVxxM
Function Type 9
Integrator Flags
This three digit field displays three reference flags which indicate certain
statues for the PID_Master_Loop.
Left Flag 0 = PID Active
Center Flag 0 = Integrator calculating normally
Right Flag 0 = No Integrator Clamp
1 = Integrator Clamp Active
IAQ Sensor
This decision displays the value of the indoor air quality in parts per million
(PPM).
Valid Display -9999.99 to 9999.99 PPM

This decision displays the value of the outdoor air quality in parts per million
(PPM).
IAQ Setpoint
This decision displays the value of the configured indoor air quality setpoint in
parts per million (PPM).
Indoor Air Quality

This function monitors the indoor air quality, and if desired, the outdoor air quality.
Reference Output
algorithm output point value. The algorithm output point will be this
value or the PID Master Loop Reference Output value, whichever is greater.
Reference Output = (Proportional Term + Integral Term)
211
MADVVxxM
Function Type 9
Proportional Term
the IAQ Submaster Loop.
Proportional Term = (IAQ Setpoint - IAQ Sensor) * Proportional Gain
Integral Term
IAQ Submaster Loop.
Integral Term = (IAQ Setpoint - IAQ Sensor) + Integral Gain +
Previous Integral Term
Clamp
This decision displays if the IAQ control routine is being clamped. The
clamp is set whenever the output is less than the minimum output value
or greater than the maximum output value.
Task Timer
212
AO—Permissive Interlock
AOPI_xxC
Function Type 10
The AO—Permissive Intrlock algorithm overrides the value of an

AO—Permissive analog point. The algorithm bases its decision on the current state
Intrlock of the Discrete Control Point or the current value of the Analog
Control Point compared to a setpoint.
If you configure the Control Point Type decision to be discrete and

the Discrete Control Point is equal to the configured occupied or
unoccupied discrete state for the Persistence Time, the algorithm
forces the Analog Output Point to the Override Value. If the control
point is not equal to the configured occupied or unoccupied discrete
state for the Persistence Time, the algorithm sets the Analog Output
Point to automatic control.
If you configure the Control Point Type decision to be analog and

the Analog Control Point is higher or lower (based on the occupied
or unoccupied analog test decision) than the configured low setpoint
for the Persistence Time, the algorithm forces the Analog Output
Point to the Override Value. If this condition is not true for the
Persistence Time, the algorithm sets the Analog Output Point to
automatic control.

do not configure a Setpoint Schedule, the algorithm sets the Analog
Output Point to automatic control.
ler is using the occupied or unoccupied setpoints and indicates the
test conditions used to override the point. If you do not configure a
Time schedule for this algorithm, the algorithm will assume to be in
the occupied state.
The Setpoint Schedule allows you to configure the low setpoint for
both occupied and unoccupied states.
Typical Application You could use this algorithm to control a preheat coil’s two-way
steam valve. For example, when the outside air temperature is
above 38°F, the valve would be forced closed. When the outside air
temperature is below 38°F, the valve would be modulated to main-
tain a 45°F setpoint.
213
AOPI_xxC
Function Type 10
optional.

Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Permissive Interlock
* Control Point Type
Occ Discrete State
Unocc Discrete State
Occ Analog Test
Unocc Analog Test
Override Value
Hysteresis
Persistence Time
Analog Control Point
Discrete Control Point
Power on Delay

Occupied ?
Reference Output
Perm Interlock Flag
Conditional
Modified Setpoint
Persistence Timer
Setpoint Limit
* Analog Control Point
* Discrete Control Point
Task Timer
214
Figure 5-10
AO—Permissive Intrlock
Controlling Point Permissive Interlock Analog Output Point

Output Sensor Input
Force Output Input
Status Disable
Setpoint Schedule
Bias Input Low Setpoint Setpoint
High Setpoint
Occupancy State?
Bias Low Offset Occupied Low Setpoint
Bias High Offset Occupied High Setpoint
Time Schedule
Output Occupancy State
Maintenance
AOPI_xxC
Function Type 10
215
AOPI_xxC
Function Type 10

Decisions You must configure this decision to specify the AO point that will be overrid-
den when the test conditions have been met for the configured Persistence
Time.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Time Schedule
manual.

Setpoint Schedule
If the Control Point Type decision is set to Analog, use this decision to specify
the Setpoint Schedule (temperature type) that provides the occupied and unoc-
cupied low setpoint to which the controlling point will be compared.

216
AOPI_xxC
Function Type 10
Permissive Interlock determines if the Analog Output Point should be forced to
the configured override value when the input conditions are met.
Control Point Type

You must configure this decision to define whether the Control Point is
an analog or discrete type point.
Allowable Entries Analog/Discr

Default Value Analog
Occ Discrete State

If the Control Point Type is discrete, use this decision to define the
input state when the Time Schedule is occupied that will cause the
Analog Output Point to be overridden.
Allowable Entries On/Off

Default Value On

If the Control Point Type is discrete, use this decision to define the
input state when the Time Schedule is unoccupied that will cause the
Analog Output Point to be overridden.

Default Value Off
Occ Analog Test

If the Control Point Type is analog, use this decision to indicate if the
Analog Control Point must be higher or lower than the occupied low
setpoint in order to override the Analog Output Point.
Allowable Entries High/Low

Default Value High
217
AOPI_xxC
Function Type 10
Unocc Analog Test

If the Control Point Type is analog, use this decision to indicate if the
Analog Control Point must be higher or lower than the unoccupied low
setpoint in order to override the Analog Output Point.
Default Value Low
Override Value
Use this decision to specify the value to which the Analog Output Point
is forced when the proper input condition for the configured Persistence
Time exists.
Default Value 0.0
Hysteresis
If the Control Point Type is analog, use this decision to specify the
number of degrees above or below the setpoint (based upon the analog
test) the Analog Control Point must be before the override is released.
Allowable Entries 0.0 to 9999.9
Default Value 1.0
Persistence Time
Use this decision to indicate how long the input condition must exist
before the Analog Output Point is overridden or how long the input
condition must not exist before the Analog Output Point is returned to
automatic control.
Default Value 30

Use this decision to configure the analog point that the algorithm tests to
determine if the Analog Output Point should be overridden. If this decision is
configured, the Control Point Type should be set to Analog.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value PNT_NAME
218
AOPI_xxM
Function Type 10

Use this decision to configure the discrete point that the algorithm tests to
determine if the Analog Output Point should be overridden. If this decision is
configured, the Control Point Type should be set to Discr.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Power on Delay
Default Value 0

Occupied ?
This decision displays the current occupancy status based on the configured data
in the Time Schedule. If a Time Schedule has not been selected, then the default
mode will be Yes.
This function determines if a configured condition has occurred, and if so, the
Output point is overridden and set equal to the Reference Output, until the causal
condition no longer exists.
Reference Output
This decision displays the configured Override Value that the output will
be driven to.
Perm Interlock Flag

This decision indicates whether Permissive Interlock is in effect.
219
AOPI_xxM
Function Type 10
Conditional
This decision displays the current analog conditional value (High or
Low) based on the Occupancy state.
Valid Display High/Low
Modified Setpoint
This decision displays the modified Setpoint Value that is currently
being used to compare with the Analog Control point. It includes a
configured hysteresis, and allows for the conditional check being
performed (High or Low). This value will be “0” if the Control Point
Type is discrete.
Persistence Timer
This decision displays how much time is left before the Permissive
Interlock condition will take effect.
Setpoint Limit
This decision displays the Low Setpoint from the Setpoint Schedule that is being
compared to determine if the Permissive Interlock condition will take effect.

This decision displays the value of the configured Analog Point which is being
used to determine when the Permissive Interlock will occur when the Control
Point Type is analog.

This decision displays the value of the configured Discrete Point which is
being used to determine when the Permissive Interlock will occur when the
Control Point Type is discrete.
Task Timer
executes again. This algorithm will execute every five seconds.
220
AO—Reset
RESETxxC
Function Type 11
The AO—Reset algorithm modulates its analog output that controls

AO—Reset a valve or damper in a constant volume air handler in order to
maintain the discharge air or water temperature whose setpoint can
be reset based on the Outside Air Temperature.
The Reset algorithm uses a PID (Proportional Integral Derivative)

Master Loop to determine the output value. The PID Master Loop
calculates the damper or valve position by comparing the tempera-
ture setpoint to the Control Point. The temperature setpoint can be
reset linearly between the configured high and low setpoints based
on the Reset Temperature between the configured start and stop
reset temperatures. If the air handler’s fan status is off or if the
Control Point sensor status is invalid, the PID Master Loop sets the
output to the configured Disabled Output Value.
The Setpoint Schedule allows you to configure high and low tem-
perature setpoints for both occupied and unoccupied states.
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to control an air handler’s water tem-
perature to a setpoint that varies linearly with the outside air tem-
perature.
221
AO—Reset
RESETxxC
Function Type 11
optional.

* Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
* Temperature Setpoint
Reset Point
Reset
Start Reset Value
Stop Reset Value
* Control Point
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
Power on Delay

* Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
* Reset Point
* Control Point
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Task Timer
222
Figure 5-11
AO—Reset
Output
Status OR
Force Status
Force Status
Minimum Output
Discharge Temperature
Maximum Output
Status NOT
Force Status
Output Sensor Input
Time Schedule
Setpoint
Output Temperature Setpoint Reset
Maintenance Occupancy Low Low
State? Setpoint Setpoint
Bias Input High High

Setpoint Setpoint
Output Setpoint
Reset Point
Sensor
Output Input
Clamp Integrator
Status Sensor
Status Reset Integrator
Force
RESETxxC
AO—Reset
Function Type 11
223
AO—Reset
RESETxxC
Function Type 11

valve or damper.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Fan Status Point

Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = up to 8 characters,

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Time Schedule

Temperature Setpoint
the occupied and unoccupied temperature setpoints for this algorithm.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. =SETPTyy

224
AO—Reset
RESETxxC
Function Type 11
Reset Point
Use this decision to specify the AI point that will reset the setpoint to the PID
Master Loop. This setpoint is reset between the configured low and high
setpoints from the Setpoint Schedule based on the value from the sensor speci-
fied in this decision. If you do not configure the sensor, the low setpoint will be
used.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Reset
Reset calculates the desired setpoint to the PID Master Loop based on the reset
temperature input and the configured temperature setpoints.
Start Reset Value

Use this decision to specify the start of reset. If the reset temperature is
less than or equal to the value entered in this decision, the PID Master
Loop setpoint is equal to the configured low setpoint.

Default Value -40.0 (-40.0)
Stop Reset Value

Use this decision to specify the end of reset. If the reset temperature is
greater than or equal to the value entered in this decision, the PID
Master Loop setpoint is equal to the configured high setpoint.

Control Point
discharge air or water temperature that will be compared to the calculated
setpoint by the PID Master Loop.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
225
AO—Reset
RESETxxC
Function Type 11
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the valve or damper position to maintain the desired calculated
setpoint.
Proportional Gain

Default Value 2.0
Integral Gain

Default Value 1.0
Derivative Gain

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the damper or valve position to be main-
tained when the fan status is off or the Control Point status is invalid.

Default Value 0.0
226
AO—Reset
RESETxxC
Function Type 11

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output value to the
valve or damper.

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output value to the
valve or damper.

Default Value 100.0
Starting Value

Default Value 0.0


Default Value 10
Power on Delay

Default Value 0
227
AO—Reset
RESETxxM
Function Type 11

Decisions This decision displays the value of the AO point being controlled by this algo-
rithm.
Fan Status Point

Occupied ?
in the Time Schedule. If a Time Schedule has not been selected, then the de-
fault mode will be Yes.
Reset Point
This decision displays the value of the point used to reset the Temperature
Setpoint.
This decision displays the calculated Temperature Setpoint used by the PID
Master Loop.
Control Point
This decision displays the value of the discharge air or water temperature that is
compared to the Controlling Setpoint.
228
AO—Reset
RESETxxM
Function Type 11
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Controlling Setpoint - Control Point) *
Proportional Gain
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = ((Controlling Setpoint - Control Point) *
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Note: Error = (Controlling Setpoint - Control Point)
229
AO—Reset
RESETxxM
Function Type 11
Integrator Flags



Task Timer
230
AO—Shared Transducer
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12
The AO—Shared Transducer algorithm controls sequenced heating

AO—Shared and cooling coil valves in a constant volume air handler.
Transducer
The AO—Shared Transducer algorithm uses both a PID (Propor-
tional Integral Derivative) Master Loop and a P (Proportional)
Submaster Loop to control the chilled water and hot water or steam
valve positions.
The PID Master Loop calculates the supply air temperature setpoint
(submaster reference) required to achieve the desired space tempera-
ture setpoint. The PID Master Loop calculates the submaster refer-
ence by obtaining the highest or lowest sensor inputs from the
Sensor Group/SPT Sensor and comparing it to the high or low space
temperature setpoint. The high space temperature input and high
setpoint are used when the highest space temperature is greater than
the high setpoint minus 1.5°F. The low space temperature input and
low setpoint are used when the lowest space temperature is less than
the low setpoint plus 1.5°F. If the Sensor Group/SPT Sensor status
is invalid the Submaster Loop is set to the disabled output value. If
the highest space temperature is less than the high setpoint minus
1.5°F and the lowest space temperature is greater than the low
setpoint plus 1.5°F, then the No Heat/No Cool flag is set and the
submaster reference is set to the Minimum Output Value. The P
Submaster Loop computes the valve position by comparing the
calculated submaster reference to the Supply Air Temperature. The
PID Master Loop starting value and the P Submaster Loop’s Pro-
portional Gain and Center Value are set based on whether the
algorithm is heating or cooling.
configure a Time Schedule for this algorithm, the algorithm will
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to control sequenced heating and cooling
coil valves in an air handler.
231
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12
optional.

* Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
Heat Cool Select
Heat Proportional Gain
Cool Proportional Gain
Heat Center Value
Cool Center Value
Heat Starting Value
Cool Starting Value
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
** Starting Value
Submaster Loop - Shared
** Proportional Gain
Heating Minimum Output
Heating Maximum Output
Cooling Minimum Output
Cooling Maximum Output
** Center Value
Power on Delay
** NOTE: Do not configure these decisions. The appropriate value

from the Heat Cool Select configuration will be used.
232
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12
configuration of this algorithm. You can force the asterisked deci-
sions.

* Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
Low SPT Setpoint
High SPT Setpoint
Heat Cool Select
Cool
No Heat No Cool
Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
* Shared Xducer Subm Ref
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Submaster Flags
Task Timer
233
234
Figure 5-12
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12
Fan
Status Point Heat / Cool Select Submaster Loop-Shared
Output Fan Status Kp Kp

Status
Force Status Center Value Center Value
Space Setpoint Cool Cool

PID_Master_Loop Supply Analog
High Setpoint High Setpoint Air Output
Setpoint Setpoint Temp Point
Occupancy State? Output Sensor Input Output Input
Output Sensor Input
Sensor Group/ Status Output
SPT Sensor Starting Value Starting Value Force
Status Force
TS Override
NOT Enable Status
Status Minimum Output Supply Status
Air OR
High High Sensor Setpoint
Low Low Sensor Output Input
No Heat / No Cool
Average
Output Setpoint
Status
Force Reference
NOT Enable Status
Forced?
Time Schedule PID

Output Integrator
Maintenance Clamp
Clamp Integrator
Reset Integrator Point Forced?
OR
OR
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12

Decisions Use this decision to specify the AO point that is controlling the air handler’s
sequenced chilled water valve and hot water or steam valve.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Fan Status Point

Use this decision to specify the DI point that provides the on/off status of the air
handler’s fan. The DI point provides the actual state of the fan.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

You must configure this decision to specify the Sensor Group or single sensor
Note: Use the same Sensor Group or SPT Sensor for all algorithms that control
Time Schedule
Note: Use the same Time Schedule for all algorithms that control a common air
handler.
235
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12
Setpoint Schedule
You must configure this decision to specify the Setpoint Schedule that pro-
vides the occupied and unoccupied space temperature setpoints for this algo-
rithm. For more information on Setpoint Schedule, refer to the How to Config-
ure Schedules chapter of this manual.

Heat Cool Select

Heat Cool Select determines if the space requires heating, cooling, or neither.
If heating is required, it provides the lowest space temperature, low setpoint,
Heat Starting Value, Heat Center Value, and Heat Proportional Gain. When
cooling is required, it provides the highest space temperature, high setpoint,
Cool Starting Value, Cool Center Value, and Cool Proportional Gain.
Heat Proportional Gain

produce the P Submaster Loop proportional term during heating. The

Default Value -6
Cool Proportional Gain

produce the P Submaster Loop proportional term during cooling. The

Default Value -10
236
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12
Heat Center Value

submaster error condition for heating. This value will override the P
Submaster Loop’s Center Value configuration decision during heating.

Default Value 35.0
Cool Center Value

submaster error condition for cooling. This value will override the P
Submaster Loop’s Center Value configuration decision during cooling.

Default Value 70.0
Heat Starting Value

Use this decision to specify the PID Master Loop Starting Value when in
heating mode.

Cool Starting Value

Use this decision to specify the PID Master Loop Starting Value when in
cooling mode.

237
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the supply air temperature setpoint (submaster reference) required to
achieve the desired space temperature.
Proportional Gain

Default Value 10.0
Integral Gain
this decision is expressed in units-per-unit of error per iteration.

Default Value 0.4
Derivative Gain

Default Value 0.0

tained when the space temperature input(s) are invalid or if the fan
status is off.

238
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12

ture (minimum submaster reference). When no heating or cooling is
required the submaster reference is set to this value.



Starting Value
This decision is not used. The value is overridden by the appropriate
Starting Value from the Heat/Cool select function.


Default Value 120


LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
239
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12

The submaster loop is a proportional control loop that computes a sequenced
heating coil and cooling coil valve position by comparing the calculated
submaster reference to the Supply Air Temperature.
Proportional Gain
This decision is not used. The value is overridden by the appropriate
gain from the Heat/Cool Select function.

Use this decision to specify the output value when the Supply Air
Temperature sensor is invalid.

Default Value 50.0
Heating Minimum Output

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output for the hot water
or steam valve.

Default Value 10.0
Heating Maximum Output

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output for the hot

Default Value 40.0
240
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12
Cooling Minimum Output

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output for the chilled
water valve.

Default Value 60.0
Cooling Maximum Output

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output for the chilled
water valve.

Default Value 100.0
Center Value
This decision is not used. The value will be overridden by the value in
the Heat Center Value or Cool Center Value decision.

new output value.

Default Value 2
Power on Delay

Default Value 0
241
SHXDRxxM
Function Type 12

algorithm.
Fan Status Point


This decision displays the value of the Single AI sensor (if chosen) or the
average of the sensor group (if chosen).
Occupied ?
Low SPT Setpoint

This decision displays the low space temperature setpoint value. The occu-
pancy state is used to decide if the occupied or unoccupied setpoint is used.
242
SHXDRxxM
Function Type 12
High SPT Setpoint

This decision displays the high space temperature setpoint value. The occu-
pancy state is used to decide if the occupied or unoccupied setpoint is used.
Heat Cool Select

The Heat Cool Select function determines if the space requires heating, cool-
ing, or neither.
This decision displays the selected high or low setpoint based on the
input conditions. This value will be 0°F (-17.8°C) when No Heat No
Cool is True.
Cool
This decision displays whether or not cooling is required for the space.
If Cool is True, then the high space temperature, high setpoint, and the
Cool Starting Value, Cool Center Value, and Cool Proportional Gain
are used.
No Heat No Cool
This decision indicates if the space does not require heating or cooling.
243
SHXDRxxM
Function Type 12
Setpoint
This decision displays the setpoint value that is currently selected based
on the input conditions.
PID_Master_Loop
The PID Master Loop function calculates the submaster reference based on the
configured PID gains and the current deviation from setpoint. The calculated
output is re-adjusted periodically to move closer toward the desired setpoint.
Reference Output
Term + Heat or Cool Starting Value)
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Setpoint - Sensor) * Proportional Gain
Valid Display -9999.9 to 9999.9^F
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = (Setpoint - Sensor) * Integral Term + Previous
Integral Term)
Valid Display Valid range based upon display units.
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Note: Error = (Setpoint - Sensor)
244
SHXDRxxM
Function Type 12
Integrator Flags
Shared Xducer Subm Ref

This decision displays the calculated value of the PID Master Loop. This
value is used with the Supply Air Temperature by the submaster loop. To
override the submaster reference, force this point.

supply air temperature. This point must be configured to enable the submaster
loop to execute properly.

The submaster loop for the shared transducer algorithm controls to the differ-
ence between the submaster reference and the supply air temperature. This
loop executes every two seconds.
Reference Output
Reference Output = (Proportional Term + Heat or Cool Center Value)
245
SHXDRxxM
Function Type 12
Proportional Term
the shared transducer submaster loop.
Proportional Term = (Shared Xducer Subm Ref - Supply Air Tempera-

ture) * Heat or Cool Proportional Gain
Submaster Flags

Clamped)

1 = PID clamp is in effect.
Task Timer
246
AO—Static Pressure
STPR_xxC
Function Type 13
The AO—Static Pressure algorithm provides an output to an inlet

AO—Static guide vane, fan discharge damper, or variable speed fan to maintain
Pressure constant static pressure in the duct.
The AO—Static Pressure algorithm uses a PID (Proportional Inte-

gral Derivative) Master Loop to calculate the desired output value.
The PID Master Loop compares the duct static pressure to the
configured low setpoint to compute the output value. If the air
handler supply fan status is off or the duct static pressure sensor is
invalid, the PID Master Loop sets the output to the configured
Minimum Output Value.
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to control the inlet guide vane to main-
tain a constant duct static pressure in a constant volume system.
You can also use this algorithm to control a variable speed fan to
maintain a constant duct static pressure in a variable air volume
system.
optional.

* Fan Status Point
* Duct Static Pressure
* Static Pressure Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
Power on Delay
247
STPR_xxC
Function Type 13

* Fan Status Point
* Duct Static Pressure
Static Pressure Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Task Timer
248
Figure 5-13

Output
Status OR
Duct Static Pressure Minimum Output
Status NOT Maximum Output
Force Status
Output Sensor Input
Static Pressure Setpoint Setpoint
Clamp Integrator
Reset Integrator
STPR_xxC
Function Type 13
249
STPR_xxC
Function Type 13

inlet guide vane or damper position or variable fan speed.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Fan Status Point

fan.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Duct Static Pressure

You must configure this decision to specify the AI point that provides the duct
static pressure for the air handler.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

You must configure this decision to specify the duct static pressure setpoint
that you desire the system to maintain.
Allowable Entries 0.00 to 5.00 “H20

Default Value 2.50
250
STPR_xxC
Function Type 13
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the desired output to maintain the configured static pressure setpoint.
Proportional Gain

Default Value 20.0
Integral Gain

Default Value 10.0
Derivative Gain

Default Value 0.0

fan is off or the duct static pressure sensor is invalid.

Default Value 0.0
251
STPR_xxC
Function Type 13


Default Value 0.0


Default Value 100.0
Starting Value

Default Value 0.0


Default Value 10
Power on Delay

Default Value 0
252
STPR_xxM
Function Type 13

algorithm.
Fan Status Point

This decision displays the actual state of the air handler’s fan which deter-
mines whether this algorithm is enabled. If this point is not configured or the
value is off, then this algorithm will not be enabled.
Duct Static Pressure

This decision displays the duct static pressure in inches of water.
Valid Display 0.00 to 5.00 “H20 (0 to 1244.2 Pa)

This decision displays the configured duct static pressure setpoint.
Valid Display 0.00 to 5.00 “H20 (0 to 1244.2 Pa)
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
253
STPR_xxM
Function Type 13
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Static Pressure Setpoint - Duct Static Pressure) *
Proportional Gain
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = (Static Pressure Setpoint - Duct Static Pressure) *
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Note: Error = (Static Pressure Setpoint - Duct Static Pressure)
Integrator Flags
Task Timer
254
DO—Analog Comparison
ANCTLxxC
Function Type 14
The DO—Analog Comparison algorithm compares the lowest and

DO—Analog highest temperature sensors to the configured low and high setpoints.
Comparison The algorithm can work with a single Temperature Sensor or a
Sensor Group with multiple sensors. If either sensor is outside of the
setpoint range, the output point is commanded on. When both
sensors are within the region bordered by low setpoint plus hysteresis
and high setpoint minus hysteresis, the output point is commanded
off. If the output point is forced or the input sensor is out of range,
the algorithm will be disabled.
algorithm. The occupancy state defines when the Comfort Controller
is using the occupied or unoccupied setpoints. If you do not config-
ure a Time Schedule for this algorithm, the algorithm will assume to
be in the occupied state.
The Setpoint Schedule allows you to configure high and low

setpoints for both occupied and unoccupied states.
Typical Applications You can use this algorithm to start a hot water pump when the out-
side air temperature is below 50°F and stop the pump when the
outside air temperature is above 51°F.
You could also use this algorithm to start a supply fan if space
temperature drifts out of limits and stop the fan when the space
temperature is within limits.
255
ANCTLxxC
Function Type 14
optional.
* Discrete Output Point

* Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
Analog
Hysteresis
Power on Delay

Occupied ?
Analog
Low Setpoint
Lo Setpoint + Hyst
Hi Setpoint - Hyst
High Setpoint
Reference Output
Task Timer
256
Figure 5-14
Sensor Group/ Analog Discrete Output Point

SPT Sensor
Output
TS Override
OR
Status Disable Output Input Status
High High Sensor
Force Status
Low Low Sensor
Average
Time Schedule
Output
Maintenance
Setpoint Schedule
Low Setpoint
Bias Input
High Setpoint
Occupancy State?
Occupied
Bias High Offset High Setpoint High Setpoint
ANCTLxxC
Function Type 14
257
ANCTLxxC
Function Type 14
Configuration Discrete Output Point

Decisions You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that is being con-
trolled by this algorithm.
Allowable Entries Blgd. Supvr. = up to 8 characters

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value DISCRO00

You must configure this decision to specify the sensor group or single space
temperature sensor that is providing the space temperature inputs.

Time Schedule
You must configure this decision to specify the Time Schedule that determines
the occupancy state for this algorithm. If you do not specify a Time Schedule
in this decision, the algorithm will assume to be in the occupied state. For
more information on Time Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules
chapter in this manual.

258
ANCTLxxC
Function Type 14
Setpoint Schedule
type) that provides the occupied and unoccupied setpoints for this algorithm.

Analog
Analog provides a discrete output by comparing the highest and lowest space
sensor values to the configured setpoint values. If either sensor is outside the
setpoint range, the DO is commanded on and remains on until both sensors are
within the region bordered by low setpoint plus hysteresis and high setpoint
minus hysteresis.
Hysteresis
Use this decision to specify the amount that is added to the low setpoint
and subtracted from the high setpoint.

Default Value 1.0

Use this decision to specify how often the input conditions are checked to
determine if the output state must change.

Default Value 120
Power on Delay
wait to activate this algorithm after a power restart occurs.

Default Value 0
259
ANCTLxxM
Function Type 14
Maintenance Discrete Output Point

Decisions This decision displays the actual state of the DO point being controlled by this
algorithm.

This decision displays the value of the single AI sensor or the average of the
sensor group, depending on which is selected.
Occupied ?
in the Time Schedule. If a Time Schedule has not been selected, the default
mode will be Yes.
Analog
Analog displays the current controlling setpoint data, with hysteresis, based on
the occupancy state.
Low Setpoint
This decision displays the low setpoint value, excluding hysteresis. If the
space temperature falls below this value, the Discrete Output Point will be
commanded on.
Lo Setpoint + Hyst
This decision displays the Low Setpoint value, including hysteresis. If
the space temperature is within the range of this value and the Hi Setpoint
- Hyst value, the Discrete Output Point will be commanded off.
260
ANCTLxxM
Function Type 14
Hi Setpoint - Hyst
This decision displays the High Setpoint value, including hysteresis. If
the space temperature is within the range of this value and the Lo
Setpoint + Hyst value, the Discrete Output Point will be commanded off.
High Setpoint
This decision displays the High Setpoint value, excluding hysteresis. If
the space temperature exceeds this value, the Discrete Output Point will
be commanded on.
Reference Output
This decision displays the value that the algorithm output will be driven
to, unless a force condition overrides this output.
Task Timer
This decision displays the number of seconds remaining before the algorithm
executes again. This algorithm will execute every 60 seconds.
261
DO—DX Staging VAV
DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15
The DO—DX Staging VAV algorithm controls up to six stages of

DO—DX Staging DX (direct expansion) cooling in a variable air volume air handler.
VAV
The DO—DX Staging VAV algorithm uses a PID (Proportional
Integral Derivative) Master Loop to control the cooling stages. The
PID Master Loop calculates the number of output stages required to
maintain the Supply Air Setpoint. The DX Supply Air Setpoint is a
calculated value that can be reset linearly based on the space tem-
perature.
The PID Master Loop computes the required number of cooling

stages by comparing the calculated Supply Air Setpoint to the
Supply Air Temperature. The stages are activated sequentially,
allowing for a configured delay time between each stage. Once a
stage is activated, it will not be de-activated until the calculated
number of stages has decreased by a full stage. This hysteresis
prevents short cycling of stages. When all available stages are
activated, the algorithm clamps the PID Master Loop integrator at
its current value. During dehumidification, the percentage of stages
activated will equal the configured Maximum Output Value. If the
space temperature is below the average value of the high and low
temperature setpoints or the supply air temperature sensor status is
invalid, the percentage of stages activated will equal the configured
Disabled Output Value. If the supply fan is off all the cooling stages
are turned off.
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to control up to six stages of DX cooling
in a VAV air handler unit.
262
DO—DX Staging VAV
DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15
optional.
* Discrete Output
Discrete Output
Discrete Output
Discrete Output
Discrete Output
Discrete Output
* Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
Humidity Setpoint
VAV Setpoint Sensor
Supply Air Setpoint
Reset Ratio
Start Reset
Maximum Reset
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
Staging Control
* Total Number of Stages
On Time Delay
Off Time Delay
Power on Delay
263
DO—DX Staging VAV
DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15
configuration of this algorithm. You can force the asterisked deci-
sions.

* Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
VAV Setpoint Reset
Setpoint
Setpoint Offset
* DX Supply Air Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Staging Control
Number of Stages
Requested Stages
Delta Stages
Delay Timer
PID Integrator Clamp
Task Timer
264
Figure 5-15
DO—DX Staging VAV
Staging Control
Fan Status Point
Output Fan Status
Status
Force Status PID_Master_Loop
Time Schedule Discrete
Output Input Output Point
Output
Supply Air Stage 1 Input
Maintenance Temperature
Force Status
Output Sensor Input
Force Status
Status NOT
Discrete
Output Point
Space Setpoint
Stage 2 Input
High Setpoint
High - 0.5 (High - Low) AND Enable Force Status
Occupancy State? <
Low Setpoint
Discrete
Output Point
Sensor Group/ Stage 3 Input
SPT Sensor VAV Setpoint Supply Air
Setpoint Force Status
TS Override Reset
(Software
Status Sensor Status Point)
Sensor Input Discrete
High
Output Point
Output Setpoint
Low
Stage 4 Input
Average Output Input Force Status
Force Status
High Humidity Switch Discrete

Minimum Output Output Point
Output
OR Maximum Output Stage 5 Input
Status

Discrete
Output Output Point
Status
> SELECT A
Stage 6 Input
1 A
O B
Humidity Setpoint
Occ High Setpoint
+ Clamp Integrator PID
Occ Low Setpoint
Integrator
Reset Integrator Clamp
SELECT A
-3 A
O B
DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15
DO—DX Staging VAV
265
DO—DX Staging VAV
DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15
Configuration Discrete Output

Decisions You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the
first stage of DX (direct expansion) cooling.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Discrete Output
Use this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the second stage of
DX (direct expansion) cooling.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Discrete Output
Use this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the third stage of

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Discrete Output
Use this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the fourth stage of

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Discrete Output
Use this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the fifth stage of

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
266
DO—DX Staging VAV
DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15
Discrete Output
Use this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the sixth stage of

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Fan Status Point

off status of the air handler’s fan. The DI point provides the actual state of the fan.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

that is providing the space temperature inputs. For more information on sensor
Note: Use the same Sensor Group or SPT sensor or space temperature sensor
for all algorithms that control a common air handler.

Time Schedule
Time Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules chapter in this manual.
air handler.
267
DO—DX Staging VAV
DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15
Setpoint Schedule

DI point that indicates when dehumidification is needed. The algorithm can use
a High Humidity Switch or High Humidity Sensor to determine if dehumidifica-
tion is needed. If reheat is being done, the same sensor that is used here should
be used in the associated heating VAV algorithm.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Humidity Setpoint
Setpoint Schedule that provides the humidity setpoints for this algorithm. For
ules chapter in this manual. If reheat is being done, the same setpoint that is
used here should be used in the associated heating VAV algorithm.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = SETPTxx
LID = xx, where xx = 0 to 16

AI point that provides the space or return air humidity sensor being monitored.
the high setpoint from the Humidity Setpoint schedule. If reheat is being done,
the same sensor that is used here should be used in the associated heating VAV
algorithm.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
268
DO—DX Staging VAV
DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15
VAV Setpoint Reset

VAV Setpoint Reset provides the supply air setpoint to the master loop. The
configured setpoint can be reset upward based on space temperature.
Supply Air Setpoint

Use this decision to specify the minimum supply air temperature that this
algorithm will maintain.

Reset Ratio
If the supply air setpoint is being reset, use this decision to specify the
amount of reset of every degree the space temperature is above Start Reset
configuration decision. The value in this decision is expressed in degrees
per degrees error.

Start Reset
space temperature that must be exceeded before the Supply Air Setpoint
is reset.

Default Value 0.0 (-18.0)
Maximum Reset
maximum amount the Supply Air Setpoint can be reset above the config-
ured value.

269
DO—DX Staging VAV
DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15


LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the valve position required to achieve the desired setpoint.
Proportional Gain

Default Value -5.0
Integral Gain

Default Value -0.4
Derivative Gain

Default Value 0.0
270
DO—DX Staging VAV
DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15

Use this decision to specify the percent of stages to be activated when
the fan is off.

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the minimum percent of stages that will
always be activated.

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the maximum percent of stages that can be
activated.

Default Value 100.0
Starting Value
Use this decision to specify the percent of stages that will be activated
when the PID Master Loop is enabled by the Fan Status Point.

Default Value 0.0

calculates the percent of stages required to maintain the Supply Air
Setpoint.

Default Value 30
271
DO—DX Staging VAV
DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15
Staging Control
Staging Control starts and stops up to six discrete stages of DX cooling based
on the requesting input, whose value can range from 0 to 100%. You can
configure the minimum time between starting and stopping stages.
Total Number of Stages

You must configure this decision to specify the number of discrete
stages of DX cooling the algorithm will control.
Default Value 6
On Time Delay
Use this decision to specify the minimum time delay between the
starting of stages. This value should represent the time required by a
newly activated stage to have its effect on the supply temperature.

Default Value 1
Off Time Delay

stopping of stages. This value should represent the time from when the
algorithm stops the stage to the time there is an effect on the controlled
supply temperature.

Default Value 5
Power on Delay
must wait to activate this algorithm after a power restart occurs.

Default Value 0
272
DO—DX Staging VAV
DXVAVxxM
Function Type 15

Decisions This decision displays the value of the point controlling the first stage of DX
(direct expansion) cooling.
Discrete Output Point

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the second stage of DX

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the third stage of DX

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the fourth stage of DX

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the fifth stage of DX

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the sixth stage of DX
273
DO—DX Staging VAV
DXVAVxxM
Function Type 15
Fan Status Point


Occupied ?

monitored. If this decision is not configured, this value will default to the Off
state.

from the Humidity Setpoint Schedule.

Humidity Setpoint.
274
DO—DX Staging VAV
DXVAVxxM
Function Type 15
VAV Setpoint Reset

VAV Setpoint Reset provides the supply air setpoint value to the master loop.
Setpoint
This decision displays the calculated supply air setpoint which is used by
the master loop. This value represents the sum of calculated offset added
to the configured Supply Air Setpoint.
Setpoint Offset
This calculated value represents the amount of reset that is added to the
configured Supply Air Setpoint to generate the setpoint value.
Setpoint Offset = (VAV Start Reset - Sensor Group/SPT Sensor)

* Reset Ratio
DX Supply Air Setpoint

This decision displays the calculated Supply Air Setpoint for the PID Master
Loop. To override the DX Supply Air Setpoint, force the point.

PID_Master_Loop
275
DO—DX Staging VAV
DXVAVxxM
Function Type 15
Reference Output
Discrete Output Points.
Term + Center Value)
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (DX Supply Air Setpoint - Supply Air
Temperature) * Proportional Gain
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = (Setpoint - Supply Air Temperature) * Integral
Derivative Term
PID equation. Note: Error = (Setpoint - Supply Air Temperature)
Integrator Flags
276
DO—DX Staging VAV
DXVAVxxM
Function Type 15
Staging Control
This function starts and stops up to six stages of DX cooling. The control is
based on the reference output from the PID Master Loop.
Number of Stages
This decision displays the number of stages that are currently on.
Requested Stages
This decision displays the number of stages that the algorithm requests
on. The number is determined by percent of stages requested from the
PID Master Loop in relation to the configured Total Number of Stages.
Delta Stages
This decision displays the difference determined by the Number of
Stages subtracted from the Requested Stages.
Delay Timer
This decision displays the number of minutes that must elapse before
another stage can be started or stopped.
Valid Display 0 to 30 minutes

This decision displays whether or not the PID Clamp is currently in
effect for the staging control function.
Task Timer
277
DO—Electric Heat CV
EHCV_xxC
Function Type 16
The DO—Electric Heat CV algorithm controls up to six stages of

DO—Electric electric heat in a constant volume air handler.
Heat CV
The Electric Heat CV algorithm uses a PID (Proportional Integral
Derivative) Master Loop to control the output stages. The PID
Master Loop calculates the number of output stages required to
achieve the desired space temperature setpoint. The PID Master
Loop calculates the required number of output stages by obtaining
the lowest sensor input from the Sensor Group/SPT Sensor and
comparing it to the low temperature setpoint configured in the
Setpoint Schedule. The setpoint is increased by the heating setpoint
offset when dehumidification is being performed. The stages are
activated sequentially, allowing for a configured delay time between
each stage. Once a stage is activated, it will not be de-activated
until the calculated number of stages has decreased by a full stage.
This hysteresis prevents short cycling of stages. When all available
stages of electric heat are activated, the algorithm clamps the PID
Master Loop integrator at its current value.
If the fan status is off, all stages of electric heat are turned off. If the
sensor group status in invalid, the PID Master Loop sets the output
to the Disabled Output Value. If the Duct Temperature input ex-
ceeds the configured Duct High Limit, the PID Master Loop sets the
output to the Minimum Output Value.
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to control up to six stages of electric heat
in a constant volume air handler.
278
EHCV_xxC
Function Type 16
optional.

* Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
Humidity Setpoint
Duct Temperature
Duct High Limit
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
Staging Control
On Time Delay
Off Time Delay
Power on Delay
279
EHCV_xxC
Function Type 16

* Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
* Duct Temperature
Duct High Limit
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Space Setpoint
Staging Control
Number of Stages
Requested Stages
Delta Stages
Delay Timer
Task Timer
280
Figure 5-16
Staging Control
Fan Status Point
Sensor Group/ Output Fan
SPT Sensor Status Status
Average Force Status PID_Master_Loop

Discrete
High Output Point
Low
AND Enable Output Input Stage 1 Input Force
Status NOT
Status
TS Override
Sensor Input
Time Schedule Discrete
Output Point
Output
Maintenance Stage 2 Input Force
Status
Space Setpoint
Discrete
High Setpoint Output Point
Occupancy State? Stage 3 Input Force
Setpoint Status
Low Setpoint +
High Humidity Switch Discrete

Output Point
Output Select
OR Stage 4 Input Force
Status A Status
Force Status Heating Setpoint A
Offset
High Humidity Sensor Discrete
0 B Output Point
Output
> Stage 5 Input Force
Status
Status
Force Status
Humidity Setpoint Discrete

SELECT A SELECT A Output Point
Occ High Setpoint -3
+ A 1 A
Stage 6 Input Force
Occ Low Setpoint O B O B Status
Duct Temperature
Maximum Output
Output
> Minimum Output
Status
Force Status
Clamp Integrator PID
Duct High Limit Integrator
+
Reset Integrator Clamp
SELECT A
EHCV_xxC
SELECT A
-5 A 1 A
O B O B
Function Type 16
281
EHCV_xxC
Function Type 16
Configuration Discrete Output

first stage of electric heating.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Discrete Output
electric heating.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Discrete Output
electric heating.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Discrete Output
electric heating.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Discrete Output
electric heating.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
282
EHCV_xxC
Function Type 16
Discrete Output
electric heating.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Fan Status Point

off status of the air handler’s fan. A DI point provides the actual state of the
fan.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = up to 8 characters,
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

that is providing the space temperature inputs. For more information on sensor
Note: Use the same Sensor Group or SPT Sensor or space temperature sensor
Time Schedule
Time Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules chapter in this
manual.
Note: Use the same Time Schedule for all algorithms that control
283
EHCV_xxC
Function Type 16
Setpoint Schedule
type) that provides the occupied and unoccupied low setpoints for this algorithm.


DI point that indicates when dehumidification is needed. The algorithm can use a
High Humidity Switch or High Humidity Sensor to determine if dehumidification
is needed. If dehumidification is being performed, the same sensor that is used
here should be used in the associated Cooling CV algorithm.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Humidity Setpoint
Setpoint Schedule that provides the humidity setpoint for this algorithm. For
ules chapter in this manual. If dehumidification is being performed, the same
setpoint that is used here should be used in the associated Cooling CV algorithm.


If the air handler is performing dehumidification, use this decision to specify the AI
point that provides the space or return air humidity sensor being monitored. Dehu-
midification is required if the High Humidity Sensor value is greater than the high
setpoint from Humidity Setpoint schedule. If dehumidification is being performed,
the same sensor that is used here should be used in the associated Cooling CV algorithm.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
284
EHCV_xxC
Function Type 16
Duct Temperature
Use this decision to specify the AI point that is used as a safety to prevent the
duct temperature from exceeding the high temperature limit.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Duct High Limit

Use this decision to specify a maximum duct temperature before the PID
Master Loop output is clamped to the Minimum Output Value.
Allowable Entries 80.00 to 245.00°F (26.7 to 188.3°C)

Default Value 150.00 (66)
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain

Default Value 5.0
Integral Gain

Default Value 0.4
285
EHCV_xxC
Function Type 16
Derivative Gain

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the percent of stage to be activated when
the fan is off.

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the minium percent of stages that will
always be activated. The output will equal this value if the Duct
Temperature exceeds the High Duct Limit.

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the maximin percent of stages that can be
activated.

Default Value 100.0
Starting Value

Default Value 0.0
286
EHCV_xxC
Function Type 16


Default Value 30

how much the space temperature setpoint is offset during dehumidification.

Staging Control
Staging Control starts and stops up to six discrete stages of electric heating
based on the requesting input, whose value can range from 0 to 100%. You
can configure the minimum time between starting and stopping stages.

stages of electric heating the algorithm will control.
Default Value 6
On Time Delay
newly activated stage to have its effect on the space temperature.

Default Value 1
287
EHCV_xxM
Function Type 16
Off Time Delay

space temperature.

Default Value 0
Power on Delay

Default Value 0

Decisions This decision displays the value of the point controlling the first stage of
electric heating.

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the second stage of
electric heating.

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the third stage of
electric heating.
288
EHCV_xxM
Function Type 16

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the fourth stage of
electric heating.

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the fifth stage of
electric heating.

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the sixth stage of
electric heating.
Fan Status Point


Occupied ?
289
EHCV_xxM
Function Type 16

state.

from the High Humidity schedule.

Duct Temperature
This decision displays the duct temperature sensor value used as a safety value
to prevent excessive duct temperatures.
Duct High Limit

This decision displays the maximum duct temperature, that, if exceeded, will
cause the PID Master Loop output to clamp to the minimum output value.
Valid Display -80.00 to 245.00°F (26.6 to 118.3°C)
290
EHCV_xxM
Function Type 16
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
This decision displays the calculated output that is used to determine
the percentage of Discrete Output Points required.
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Setpoint - SPT Sensor) * Proportional Gain
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = ((Setpoint - SPT Sensor) * Integral Term + Previous
Integral Term)
Derivative Term
PID equation.
291
EHCV_xxM
Function Type 16
Integrator Flags



Space Setpoint
This decision displays the low space temperature setpoint from the configured
Setpoint Schedule. The occupancy state is taken into effect when this value is
determined.
Staging Control
This function starts and stops up to six stages of electric heating. The control is
Number of Stages
Requested Stages
PID Master Loop in relation to the configured Total Number of Stages.
292
EHCV_xxM
Function Type 16
Delta Stages
Delay Timer

This decision displays whether or not the PID Clamp is currently in effect
for the staging control function.
Task Timer
293
DO—Electric Heat VAV
EHVAVxxC
Function Type 17
The DO—Electric Heat VAV algorithm controls up to six stages of

DO—Electric electric heat in a variable air volume air handler.
Heat VAV
The Electric Heat CV algorithm uses a PID (Proportional Integral
Derivative) Master Loop to control the output stages. The PID
Master Loop calculates the number of output stages required to
achieve the desired space temperature setpoint. The PID Master
Loop calculates the required number of output stages by obtaining
the lowest sensor input from the Sensor Group/SPT Sensor and
comparing it to the low temperature setpoint configured in the
Setpoint Schedule. The setpoint is increased by the Heating Set-
point Offset when dehumidification is being performed. The stages
are activated sequentially, allowing for a configured delay time
between each stage. Once a stage is activated, it will not be de-
activated until the calculated number of stages has decreased by a
full stage. This hysteresis prevents short cycling of stages. When
all available stages of electric heat are activated, the algorithm
clamps the PID Master Loop integrator at its current value.
If the fan status is off all stages of electric heat are turned off. If the
sensor group status in invalid, the PID Master Loop sets the output
to the Disabled Output Value. If the Duct Temperature input ex-
ceeds the configured Duct High Limit, the PID Master Loop sets the
output to the Minimum Output Value.
configure a Time Schedule for this algorithm, the algorithm will
For applications that have alternate heat sources, you can use Morn-
ing Warmup to preheat the space.
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to control up to six stages of electric heat
in a variable air volume air handler.
294
EHVAVxxC
Function Type 17
optional.

* Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
Humidity Setpoint
Duct Temperature
Duct High Limit
Occupied Heating
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
Staging Control
On Time Delay
Off Time Delay
Power on Delay
295
EHVAVxxC
Function Type 17

* Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
* Duct Temperature
Duct High Limit
Morning Warm Up
Reference Output
Morning Warmup ?
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Space Setpoint
Staging Control
Number of Stages
Requested Stages
Delta Stages
Delay Timer
Task Timer
296
Figure 5-17
NOT
Staging Control
Fan Status Point Fan
Morning Status Discrete
Force Status
Warm Up Output
Status Point
Fan PID_Master_Loop
Output
Status Stage 1 Input
Sensor Group/ Output Input Force
Status
SPT Sensor
Status Disable
TS Override
Discrete
Output
Average Status
Point
High Stage 2 Input
Low Space Force
Temp. Status
Time Schedule
Discrete
Occupancy Occupancy
State?
Output
Maintenance Point
Stage 3 Input
Setpoint Force
Status
Discrete
AND Enable Output
NOT
Point
Space Setpoint Stage 4 Input
Sensor Input
High Setpoint Force
Status
Low Setpoint
+ Setpoint
Discrete
Output
High Humidity Point
Switch
Duct Temp. stage 5 Input
Output
Maximum Output Force
Status Output Status
Force Status > Minimum Output
Force
Status Discrete
OR Select
High Humidity Output
Sensor A Point
Duct High Limit
Output Heating + Stage 6 Input
Status > Setpoint A
Offset Force
Force Status Status
Clamp Integrator PID
Humidity 0 B Integrator
Setpoint Reset Integrator Clamp
Occupied
High Setpoint
+ SELECT A
Occupied
EHVAVxxC
Low Setpoint -3 A
O B
SELECT A
SELECT A
Function Type 17
1 A
SELECT A 1 A
O B
-5 A O B
B
297
EHVAVxxC
Function Type 17

first stage of electric heating.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

electric heating.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

electric heating.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

electric heating.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

electric heating.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
298
EHVAVxxC
Function Type 17

electric heating.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Fan Status Point

You must configure this decision to specify the discrete point that provides the
on/off status of the air handler’s fan. A DI point provides the actual state of the
fan.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

is providing the space temperature inputs. For more information on sensor
Note: Use the same Sensor Group or SPT sensor or space temperature sensor
Time Schedule
Time Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules chapter in this manual
air handler.
299
EHVAVxxC
Function Type 17
Setpoint Schedule
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = SETPTyy,


the DI point that indicates when dehumidification is needed. The algorithm
can use a High Humidity Switch or High Humidity Sensor to determine if
dehumidification is needed. If dehumidification is being performed, the same
sensor that is used here should be used in the associated Cooling VAV algo-
rithm.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Humidity Setpoint
Setpoint Schedule that provides the humidity setpoints for this algorithm. For
ules chapter in this manual. If dehumidification is being performed, the same
sensor that is used here should be used in the associated Cooling VAV algorithm.


greater than the high setpoint from Humidity Setpoint schedule. If dehumidifi-
cation is being performed, the same sensor that is used here should be used in
the associated Cooling VAV algorithm.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
300
EHVAVxxC
Function Type 17
Duct Temperature
Use this decision to specify the AI point that is used as a safety value to prevent
the duct temperature from exceeding the high temperature limit.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Duct High Limit

Use this decision to specify the maximum duct temperatures reached before the
PID Master Loop output is clamped to the Minimum Output Value.
Allowable Entries 80.00 to 245.00°F (27.0 to 118.3°C)

Occupied Heating
Use this decision to disable heating during Occupied periods. If this decision
is set to No, the algorithm will be enabled only to preheat the space.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = No or Yes

LID = 0(No) or 1(Yes)
Default Value No
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain

Default Value 5.0
301
EHVAVxxC
Function Type 17
Integral Gain

Default Value 0.4
Derivative Gain

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the percent of stages to be activated when
the fan is off.

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the minimum percent of stages that will
always be activated. The output also will be set to this value when the
Duct Temperature exceeds the Duct High Limit.

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the maximum percent of stages that can be
activated.

Default Value 100.0
302
EHVAVxxC
Function Type 17
Starting Value

Default Value 0.0


Default Value 30

how much space temperature setpoint is offset during dehumidification.

Staging Control
Staging Control starts and stops up to six discrete stages of electric heating
based on the requesting input, whose value can range from 0 to 100%. You
can configure the minimum time between starting and stopping stages.

stages of electric heating the algorithm will control.
Default Value 6
303
EHVAVxxM
Function Type 17
On Time Delay
newly activated stage to have its effect on the space temperature.

Default Value 1
Off Time Delay

space temperature.

Default Value 0
Power on Delay

Default Value 0

Decisions This decision displays the value of the point controlling the first stage of
electric heating.

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the second stage of
electric heating.
304
EHVAVxxM
Function Type 17

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the third stage of
electric heating.

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the fourth stage of
electric heating.

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the fifth stage of
electric heating.

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the sixth stage of
electric heating.
Fan Status Point


305
EHVAVxxM
Function Type 17
Occupied ?

state.

from the High Humidity schedule.

Duct Temperature
This decision displays the duct temperature sensor value used as a safety to
prevent excessive duct temperatures.
306
EHVAVxxM
Function Type 17
Duct High Limit

This decision displays the maximum duct temperature that, if exceeded, will
cause the PID Master Loop output to clamp to the minimum output value.
Valid Display 80.00 to 245.00°F (26.6 to 118.3°C)
Morning Warm Up
Morning Warmup is used to bring the space temperature up to occupied heat-
ing setpoint after an unoccupied period. Once the setpoint is reached, heating
will be disabled for the remainder of that occupied period, unless Occupied
Heating is enabled.
Reference Output
This decision determines whether the PID loop will be enabled. If
Occupied Heating is Yes, the output is On whenever Fan Status is On.
Otherwise, the output is On only when Fan Status is On and Morning
Warmup is True.
Morning Warmup ?
This decision displays whether the algorithm is executing morning
warm-up.
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
This decision displays the calculated percentage of stages that will be
activated.

307
EHVAVxxM
Function Type 17
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term)
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Integrator Flags
308
EHVAVxxM
Function Type 17
Space Setpoint
This decision displays the low space temperature setpoint from the configured
Setpoint Schedule. The occupancy state is taken into effect when this value is
determined.
Staging Control
This function starts and stops up to six stages of electric heating. The control is
Number of Stages
Requested Stages
PID Master Loop value in relation to the configured Total Number of
Stages.
Delta Stages
Delay Timer
309
EHVAVxxM
Function Type 17

This decision displays whether or not the PID Clamp is currently in
effect for the staging control function.
Task Timer
310
DO—Enthalpy Comparison
ENTH_xxC
Function Type 18
The DO—Enthalpy Comparison algorithm compares values from

DO—Enthalpy two air streams and indicates if the outside air is suitable for condi-
Comparison tioning the space.
Typical Application This algorithm normally controls a discrete output point based on an
analog (heat content) comparison of two airstreams: i.e., outside
and return air. The discrete output point may be used to drive a
relay or solenoid air valve as required to accomplish enthalpy
switch-over of dampers.
optional.
Outside Air Temperature
* Return Air Temperature
Outside Air Humidity
* Return Air Humidity
Outside Air Dewpoint
Enthalpy Comparison
Default OA Enthalpy
Default RA Enthalpy
Maximum OA Enthalpy
Power on Delay
* Outside Air Temperature
* Outside Air Humidity
* Outside Air Dewpoint
Enthalpy Comparison
Reference Output
OA Enthalpy
RA Enthalpy
OAT > RAT ?
Task Timer
311
312
Figure 5-18
ENTH_xxC
DO—Enthalpy
Comparison
Function Type 18
Enthalpy Comparison
Output OAT
Status OAT Status
Force Status
Return Air Temperature

Output RAT
Status RAT Status
Force Status Discrete Output Point
Outside Air Humidity Enthalpy Check Input
Output OARH
OAT > RAT Force Status
Status OARH Status
Force Status

Output Dewpoint
Status Dewpoint Status
Force Status
Return Air Humidity

Output RARH
Status RARH Status
Force Status
ENTH_xxC
Function Type 18

Decisions You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that is being con-
trolled based on an enthalpy (heat content) comparison of two airstreams:
outside air and return air.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

This decision defines the AI point that provides the outside air temperature to
the algorithm. If the AI point and the Outside Air Dewpoint are not available,
the algorithm uses the value in the Default OA Enthalpy decision.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

return air temperature to this algorithm. If the AI point is not available, the
algorithm uses the value in the Default RA Enthalpy decision.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

This decision defines the AI point that provides the outside air humidity to the
algorithm. If this AI point and the Outside Air Dewpoint sensor are not
available, the algorithm uses the value in the Default OA Enthalpy decision.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
313
ENTH_xxC
Function Type 18
Return Air Humidity

relative humidity of the return air to this algorithm. If the AI point is not
available, the algorithm uses the value in the Default RA Enthalpy decision.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

If an outside air humidity sensor is not used, this decision defines the AI point
that provides the outside air dewpoint to the algorithm.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Enthalpy Comparison
Enthalpy Comparison calculates the heat content of outside air and return air.
It determines if the outside air is suitable for conditioning the space.
Default OA Enthalpy
If an Outside Air Humidity or Dewcell sensor is not available, use this
decision to specify the outside air enthalpy that Return Air Humidity
must exceed for the output to be activated.
Allowable Entries 0 to 51 BTU/lb

Default Value 10
Default RA Enthalpy
If a Return Air Humidity sensor is not available, use this decision to
specify the return air enthalpy that the Outside Air Humidity cannot
exceed.

Default Value 50
314
ENTH_xxM
Function Type 18
Maximum OA Enthalpy
Use this decision to specify the maximum outside air enthalpy that the
algorithm can use to condition the space.

Default Value 30
Power on Delay

Default Value 0

algorithm.

This decision displays the value of the outside air temperature sensor being
used by this algorithm.

This decision displays the value of the return air temperature sensor being used
by this algorithm.

This decision displays the value of the outside air humidity sensor being used
by this algorithm.
315
ENTH_xxM
Function Type 18
Return Air Humidity

This decision displays the value of the return air humidity sensor being used by
this algorithm.

This decision displays the value of the outside air dewpoint sensor being used
by this algorithm.
Enthalpy Comparison
Enthalpy Comparison determines if outside air can be used for conditioning the
space, based on a drybulb or enthalpy comparison of the outside and return air.
Reference Output
This decision displays the result of the enthalpy comparison, which
indicates when true that the outside air is suitable for cooling.
OA Enthalpy
This decision displays the value of the enthalpy of the outside air
expressed in units of BTU/lb.
Valid Display -9999.9 to 9999.9 Btu/lb
RA Enthalpy
This decision displays the value of the enthalpy of the return air ex-
pressed in units of BTU/lb.
OAT > RAT ?

This decision indicates if the outside air temperature is greater than the
return air temperature. If the outside air temperature is greater, than the
OAT will be deemed not suitable for cooling.
Task Timer
316
DO—Interlock
INTLKxxC
Function Type 19
The DO—Interlock algorithm provides a DO point that is controlled

DO—Interlock by the state of either a single or a pair of discrete points. The algo-
rithm commands the output on whenever the state of the single or
pair of inputs equals its respective comparison states for the On
Persistence Time. The output remains on until the state of the single
or pair of inputs does not equal the respective comparison state for
the Off Persistence Time.
Typical Application You could use this algorithm to control the state of a return fan
based on the state of its associated supply fan. Therefore, if the
supply fan status was off, the return fan would also be off.
optional.

* Discrete Input Point 1
Discrete Input Point 2
Discrete Interlock
Input 1 Comparison
Input 2 Comparison
Off Persistence Time
On Persistence Time
Output Logic Type
Power on Delay

Reference Output
Task Timer
317
318
Figure 5-19
INTLKxxC
DO—Interlock
DO—Interlock
Function Type 19
Disc Interlock
Disable
Discrete Input Point 1 Discrete Output Point
Output Sensor Input (1) Output Input

Status Force Status
Force Status

Output Sensor Input (2)
Status
Force Status
DO—Interlock
INTLKxxC
Function Type 19

Decisions You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that the algorithm
controls.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

You must configure this decision to specify the DO or DI point that is com-
pared to Input 1 Comparison state. If a DO or DI is not configured, the algo-
rithm assumes that the input is off.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

Use this decision to specify the DO or DI point that is compared to Input 2
Comparison state. If a DO or DI is not configured, the algorithm assumes that
the input is off.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Discrete Interlock
Discrete Interlock determines the output state by comparing the inputs to their
configured comparison states. These states must exist for the duration of the
persistence time to activate or deactivate the output.
Input 1 Comparison
Use this decision to specify the active comparison state for Discrete
Input 1.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = On or Off, LID = 0 or 1

Default Value Off
319
DO—Interlock
INTLKxxC
Function Type 19
Input 2 Comparison
Use this decision to specify the active comparison state for Discrete
Input 2.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = On or Off

LID = 0 or 1
Default Value Off
Off Persistence Time

Use this decision to specify the amount of time the input conditions
must remain not equal to their comparison states before the algorithm
turns off the output point.

Default Value 30
On Persistence Time
Use this decision to specify the amount of time the input conditions
must remain equal to their comparison states before the algorithm turns
on the output point.

Default Value 30
Output Logic Type

Use this decision to specify if normal or inverted logic is desired.
Normal logic will drive the output on when the conditions are met.
Invert logic will do the opposite.
Allowable Entries Normal/Invert

Power on Delay

Default Value 0
320
DO—Interlock
INTLKxxM
Function Type 19

Decisions This decision displays the actual state of the Discrete Output Point being
controlled by this algorithm.

This decision displays the state of Discrete Input 1. This value is compared
with the configured Input 1 Comparison state to help determine the output
state.

This decision displays the state of Discrete Input 2. This value is compared
with the configured Input 2 Comparison state to help determine the output
state.
Reference Output
This decision displays the output state of the Discrete Interlock function,
without regard to the Output Logic Type. The Discrete Output Point is driven
to this value during Normal logic, and driven to the opposite value when
Output Logic Type is Invert.
Task Timer
321
DO—Lighting Control
LIGHTxxC
Function Type 20
The DO—Lighting Control algorithm controls the state of two

DO—Lighting discrete points. These points are pulsed on based upon the current
Control state of the Discrete Input Point. One point is the Pulsed On Output
and the other is the Pulsed Off Output.
If the input transitions from off to on, the algorithm turns the Pulsed
On Output on for one second. If the input transitions from on to off,
the algorithm turns the Pulsed Off Output on for one second. Addi-
tionally, the Pulsed Off Output can be continually re-pulsed on at
configured intervals.
Typical Application This algorithm can be used to control lighting.
optional.

* Discrete Input Point
OFF Re-Pulse Interval
Power on Delay

Task Timer
322
Figure 5-20
Lighting Control

Off Repulse Interval Off Interval
Output
Pulsed On Control Input Status
Force
Discrete Input Point Discrete Output Point

Output Input Output
Pulsed Off Control Input
Status Status
Force Force
LIGHTxxC
Function Type 20
323
LIGHTxxC
Function Type 20

Decisions You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that acts as the Pulsed
On Output whenever the input transitions to the ON state.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that acts as the Pulsed
Off Output whenever the input transitions to the OFF state.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Discrete Input Point

You must configure this decision to specify the DI point that will be monitored
to determine which output point to pulse on and when to do so.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
OFF Re-Pulse Interval

Use this decision to configure the interval, in minutes, that the OFF interval will
re-pulse automatically when the Discrete Input Point remains in the off state.

Default Value 60
Power on Delay

Default Value 0
324
LIGHTxxM
Function Type 20

Decisions This decision displays the status of the Pulsed On Output point.

This decision displays the status of the Pulsed Off Output point.

This decision displays the value of the DI point that controls the pulsing of the
DO points.
Task Timer
325
DO—Permissive Intrlock
DOPI_xxC
Function Type 21
The DO—Permissive Interlock algorithm overrides the state of a

DO—Permissive discrete point. The algorithm bases its decision on the current state
Intrlock of the Discrete Control Point or the current value of the Analog
Control Point compared to a setpoint.
If you configure the Control Point Type decision to be discrete and

the Discrete Control Point is equal to the configured occupied or
unoccupied discrete state for the Persistence Time, the algorithm
forces the Discrete Output Point to the Override Value. An Over-
ride Value of 0 will force the point off. A value greater than zero
will force the point on. If the control point is not equal to the con-
figured occupied or unoccupied discrete state for the Persistence
Time, the algorithm sets the Discrete Output Point to automatic
control.

the Analog Control Point is higher or lower (based on the occupied
or unoccupied analog test decision) than the configured setpoint for
the Persistence Time, the algorithm forces the Discrete Output Point
to the Override Value. If this is not true for the Persistence Time,
the algorithm sets the Discrete Output Point to automatic control.

do not configure a Setpoint Schedule, the algorithm sets the Discrete
Output Point to automatic control.
ler is using the occupied or unoccupied setpoints and indicates the
test conditions used to override the point. If you do not configure a
Time schedule for this algorithm, the algorithm will assume to be in
the occupied state.
The Setpoint Schedule allows you to configure the low setpoints for
Typical Application If a DO Time Clock normally controls a reheat coil hot water pump,
you can use this algorithm to prevent the pump from starting when
the supply fan is off.
326
DOPI_xxC
Function Type 21
optional.

Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
* Control Point Type
Occ Discrete State
Occ Analog Test
Unocc Analog Test
Override Value
Hysteresis
Persistence Time
Power on Delay

Occupied ?
Reference Output
Perm Interlock Flag
Conditional
Modified Setpoint
Persistence Timer
Setpoint Limit
* Analog Control Point
* Discrete Control Point
Task Timer
327
328
Figure 5-21
DOPI_xxC
Function Type 21
Controlling Point Permissive Interlock Discrete Output Point

Output Sensor Input
Force Output Input
Status Disable
Setpoint Schedule
Bias Input Low Setpoint Setpoint
High Setpoint
Occupancy State?
Bias Low Offset Occupied Low Setpoint

Bias High Offset
Time Schedule
Output Occupancy State
Status
DOPI_xxC
Function Type 21

Decisions You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that will be overridden
when the test conditions have been met for the configured Persistence Time.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
If the Control Point Type decision is set to Analog, you must configure this
decision to specify the Setpoint Schedule that provides the occupied and unoccu-
pied low setpoints to which the controlling point will be compared.
Permissive Interlock determines if the Discrete Output Point should be forced to
the configured override value when the input conditions are met.
Control Point Type
You must configure this decision to define whether the Control Point is
analog or discrete.
Allowable Entries Analog/Discr
Default Value Analog
329
DOPI_xxC
Function Type 21
Occ Discrete State

If the Control Point Type is Discr, use this decision to define the input
state when the Time Schedule is occupied that will cause the Discrete
Output Point to be overridden.

Default Value On

If the Control Point Type is Discr, use this decision to define the input
state when the Time Schedule is unoccupied that will cause the Discrete
Output Point to be overridden.

Default Value On
Occ Analog Test

If the Control Point Type is Analog, use this decision to indicate if the
Analog Control Point must be higher or lower than the occupied low
setpoint in order to override the Discrete Output Point.

Default Value Low
Unocc Analog Test

If the Control Point Type is Analog, use this decision to indicate if the
Analog Control Point must be higher or lower than the unoccupied
low setpoint in order to override the Discrete Output Point.

Default Value Low
330
DOPI_xxC
Function Type 21
Override Value
Use this decision to specify the state to which the Discrete Output Point
is forced when the proper input condition for the configured Persistence
Time exists.
Note: You should only enter either 0.0 (off) or 1.0 (on). Any non-zero
value indicates an on state.

Default Value 0.0
Hysteresis
If the Control Point Type is Analog, use this decision to specify how far
above or below the setpoint (based upon the analog test) the Analog
Control Point must be before the override is released.

Default Value 0.0
Persistence Time
Use this decision to indicate how long the input condition must exist
before the Discrete Output Point is overridden or released to automatic
control.

Default Value 0

Use this decision to configure the analog point that the algorithm tests to
determine if the Discrete Output Point should be overridden. If this decision is
configured, the Control Point Type should be set to Analog.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
331
DOPI_xxM
Function Type 21

Use this decision to configure the discrete point that the algorithm tests to
determine if the Discrete Output Point should be overridden. If this decision is
configured, the Control Point Type should be set to Discr.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Power on Delay
Default Value 0

algorithm.
Occupied ?
This function determines if a configured condition has occurred, and if so, the
Output point is overridden and set equal to the Reference Output, until the
causal condition no longer exists.
Reference Output
This decision displays the configured Override Value that the output
will be driven to.
332
DOPI_xxM
Function Type 21
Perm Interlock Flag

This decision indicates whether the Permissive Interlock condition is in
effect.
Conditional
This decision displays the current conditional value (High or Low)
based on the Occupancy state.
Valid Display High/Low
Modified Setpoint
This decision displays the modified Setpoint Value that is currently
being used to compare with the Analog Control point. It includes a
configured hysteresis, and allows for the conditional check being
performed (High or Low). This value will be 0 if a Discrete Control
point is being used.
Persistence Timer
This decision displays how much time is left before the Permissive
Interlock condition will take effect.
Setpoint Limit
This decision displays the Setpoint Limit that is being compared to determine if
the Permissive Interlock condition will take effect.

This decision displays the value of the configured Analog Point which is being
used to determine when the Permissive Interlock will occur.
333
DOPI_xxM
Function Type 21

This decision displays the value of the configured Discrete Point which is being
used to determine when the Permissive Interlock will occur.
Task Timer
executes again. This algorithm will execute every five seconds.
334
DO—Prop Thermo Elec
PT2E_xxC
Function Type 23
The DO—Proportional Thermostat algorithm provides two discrete

DO—Prop Thermo stages of electric heat and modulating control for a chilled water
Elec valve. Additionally, this algorithm can control the air terminal fan
in two different operating modes. You can configure this algorithm
to lock out heating or cooling if the outside air temperature exceeds
a user configurable limit.
Fan Control Modes The two types of control modes for the fan are:
• automatic
• manual
In the automatic mode, the algorithm starts the fan when the space
being controlled requires heating or cooling. When the space
temperature is outside the configured high and low setpoints, the
algorithm starts the fan; otherwise, the fan is off.
In the manual mode, the algorithm only starts the fan during occu-
pied times, thereby disabling the fan, heating, and cooling during
unoccupied times.
Thermostat Operating The three types of operating modes for the thermostat are:
Modes • automatic heating and cooling
• manual heating
• manual cooling
In the automatic operating mode, the algorithm decides whether to

activate either one or two stages of heating or to modulate the
chilled water valve, depending on the space temperature error from
the high or low setpoint. If the fan is on and the space temperature
is less than the low setpoint, the algorithm activates stages of heat-
ing. If the fan is on and the space temperature is higher than the
high setpoint, the algorithm modulates the chilled water valve.
In the manual heating mode, you configure the algorithm to activate

only stages of heating when the fan is on and the space temperature
is less than the low setpoint. Otherwise, the algorithm disables
manual heating. No cooling is done in this mode.
In the manual cooling mode, you configure the algorithm to modu-

late the chilled water valve when the fan is on and the space tem-
perature is greater than the high setpoint. Otherwise, the algorithm
closes the chilled water valve. No heating is done in this mode.
335
PT2E_xxC
Function Type 23
Whenever Fan Status Point indicates that the supply fan is off, the
algorithm turns off heating stages and closes the chilled water valve.
the occupied or unoccupied setpoints.
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to control a rooftop with two stages of
heating and a cooling coil valve.
optional.

* Stage 1 Heat
Stage 2 Heat
* Fan Control Point
* Space Temperature
* Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
Setpoint Bias
Offset Low Value
Offset High Value
Thermostat
Fan Mode
Fan Off Delay
Operating Mode
For Manual Mode
Stage On Delay
Cooling Lockout Temp
Heating Lockout Temp
Cooling Prop Gain
Heating Prop Gain
Hysteresis
Power on Delay
336
PT2E_xxC
Function Type 23

* Stage 1 Heat
* Stage 2 Heat
* Fan Control Point
* Space Temperature
* Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
* Setpoint Bias
Low Setpoint
High Setpoint
Thermostat
Output Cool
Output Heat
Task Timer
337
338
Figure 5-23
PT2E_xxC

Function Type 23
Time Schedule Thermostat

Output Occupancy State? Stage 1 (Cool)
Stage 2 (Cool)
Maintenance
Setpoint Schedule Stage 1 Heat
Stage 1 (Heat) Input
Setpoint Bias Occupancy State?
Stage 2 Heat
Output Bias Input Stage 2 (Heat) Input
Occupied
Status Bias Low Offset Low Setpoint
Force Occupied
Bias High Offset High Setpoint
Offset Low Value

Fan Control Point
Offset High Value Sensor Input (OAT) Fan Input
Space Temperature
Output Sensor Input Output (Heat)
Force Cooling Coil Valve
Status Output (Cool) Input
NOT
Fan Status Point

AND Fan Status
Output
Status
Force
Outside Air
Temperature
Output
Status SELECT A
Force 70 A
B
PT2E_xxC
Function Type 23

chilled water valve.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Stage 1 Heat
You must configure this decision to configure the DO point that is controlling
the first stage of electric heating.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Stage 2 Heat
Use this decision to configure the DO point that is controlling the second stage
of electric heating.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Fan Control Point

You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the
fan.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Space Temperature
temperature input of the space being monitored.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
339
PT2E_xxC
Function Type 23
Fan Status Point

status of the fan. The DI point provides the actual state of the fan.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

Use this decision to specify the AI point that provides the temperature input for
the outside air.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Time Schedule

Setpoint Schedule

340
PT2E_xxC
Function Type 23
Setpoint Bias
If you are adjusting the configured space temperature setpoints with the T-56
Space Temperature Sensor, use this decision to specify the input point that
provides the bias input.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = up to 8 characters, LID = 1 to 96 (6400),

1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value VOLT_I00
Offset Low Value

If you are adjusting the configured setpoints with the setpoint bias, use
this decision to specify minimum setpoint bias.

Offset High Value

this decision to specify maximum setpoint bias.

Thermostat
Thermostat provides two discrete stages of electric heat and modulates a chilled
water valve. Additionally, this algorithm can control the fan in two different
operating modes—automatic and manual.
Fan Mode
Use this decision to indicate whether the fan will be started automati-
cally or manually. If you select auto, the fan will start automatically
when the space temperature is outside the high and low setpoints. If
you select manual, the fan will only start when the Time Schedule is
occupied.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = Auto/Manual

LID = 0(Auto) / 1(Manual)
Default Value Auto
341
PT2E_xxC
Function Type 23
Fan Off Delay

Use this decision to configure how long the fan should remain on after the
heating stages have been turned off.
Default Value 1
Operating Mode
Use this decision to indicate whether the algorithm can activate stages of
heating or modulate the chilled water valve automatically or manually. If
you select auto, stages of heating will start or the chilled water valve will
be modulated automatically when the space temperature is outside the high
and low setpoints.
Default Value Auto
For Manual Mode

If Operating Mode is set to manual, use this decision to indicate whether
the controller will perform only heating or cooling.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = Heat/Cool
LID = 0(Heat) / 1(Cool)
Default Value Cool
Stage On Delay
Use this decision to configure how long the system should wait after one
stage of heating has begun before the next stage can be activated.
Default Value 30

Use this decision to indicate the outside air temperature below which
cooling will be disabled.
342
PT2E_xxC
Function Type 23

Use this decision to indicate the outside air temperature above which
heating will be disabled.

Cooling Prop Gain

Use this decision to indicate the chilled water valve position for every
degree the space temperature is above the high setpoint. The value in this
decision is expressed in percent per degrees error.

Default Value 0.5
Heating Prop Gain

Use this decision to indicate the number of heating stages for every degree
the space temperature is below the low setpoint. The value in this decision
is expressed in stages per degrees error.

Default Value 0.5
Hysteresis
Use this decision to specify how many degrees the error must be reduced to
turn off an activated stage. This method prevents the short cycling of
heating stages.
Allowable Entries -10 to 10^F (-5.5 to 5.5^C)

Default Value 0.2^F (0.1^C)
Power on Delay

Default Value 0
343
PT2E_xxM
Function Type 23

algorithm for cooling. The value is normally expressed as a percentage of full
capacity.
State 1 Heat
This decision displays the status of the point controlling the first stage of
electric heating.
Stage 2 Heat
This decision displays the status of the point controlling the second stage of
electric heating.
Fan Control Point

This decision displays the commanded state of the DO point controlling the
fan.
Space Temperature
This decision displays the value of the space being monitored.
Fan Status Point

This decision displays the actual state of the fan, which determines whether this
algorithm is enabled. If the Fan Status Point is not configured, this algorithm
will not be enabled.
344
PT2E_xxM
Function Type 23

This decision displays the value of the outside air temperature being used by this
algorithm.
Occupied ?
mode will be Yes.
Setpoint Bias
This decision displays the percentage value (0-100) used in determining the
Setpoint Bias value. The determination of the bias value is done by linear
conversion 50% - 0% to 0 - Offset Low Value and 50% - 100% to 0 - Offset
High value. For example, 90% would add 4/5 of the Offset High Value to both
the Low and High Setpoints.
Valid Display 0.0 to 100.0%
Low Setpoint
This decision displays the low setpoint value, including any adjustments for
Occupancy and Setpoint Bias.
High Setpoint
This decision displays the high setpoint value, including any adjustments for
Thermostat
This function calculates the output heating and cooling values for this algorithm.
This decision displays the setpoint that is currently being used to deter-
mine the desired heating or cooling output for this algorithm.
345
PT2E_xxM
Function Type 23
Output Cool
This decision displays the cooling proportional term, if any, currently
being calculated by this algorithm.
Output cool = (controlling space temperature setpoint)* cooling prop. gain.
Output Heat
This decision displays the heating proportional term, if any, currently
being calculated by this algorithm.
Output heat = (controlling space temperature setpoint)* heating prop. gain.
Task Timer
346
DO—Prop Thermo 2 Pipe
PT2P_xxC
Function Type 24
The DO—Proportional Thermostat 2 Pipe algorithm provides a

DO—Prop Thermo single modulated output to control the air terminal’s fan coil valve.
2 Pipe The algorithm uses the Control Point to determine if the system is
performing heating or cooling, then modulates the output accord-
ingly. The algorithm can control the air terminal fan in two differ-
ent operating modes. You can configure this algorithm to lock out
heating or cooling if the outside air temperature exceeds a user
configurable limit.
• automatic
• manual
unoccupied times.
Modes
• automatic heating and cooling
• manual heating
• manual cooling
modulate a heating output or a cooling output, depending on the
state of the control point. If in the heat mode and the space tempera-
ture is less than the low setpoint, the algorithm modulates a heating
output. If in the cool mode, the fan is on, and the space temperature
is higher than the high setpoint, the algorithm modulates a cooling
output.
In the manual heating mode, you configure the algorithm to modu-
late the heating output when the fan is on and the space temperature
heating. No cooling is done in this mode.
late the cooling output when the fan is on and the space temperature
is greater than the high setpoint. Otherwise, the algorithm disables
cooling. No heating is done in this mode.
347
PT2P_xxC
Function Type 24
algorithm does not modulate any outputs.
The Control Point decides if the Analog Output Point is heating or
cooling. When the control point is active, the system is cooling.
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to control a two-pipe fan coil (with a
single output) that performs both heating and cooling.
optional.
* Fan Control Point
* Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
Setpoint Bias
Offset Low Value
Offset High Value
* Control Pt Heat = 0 Cool = 1
Thermostat
Fan Mode
Fan Off Delay
Operating Mode
For Manual Mode
Stage on Delay
Cooling Prop Gain
Heating Prop Gain
Hysteresis
Power on Delay
348
PT2P_xxC
Function Type 24

* Fan Control Point
* Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
* Setpoint Bias
Low Setpoint
High Setpoint
* Control Pt Heat = 0 Cool = 1
Thermostat
Output Cool
Output Heat
Task Timer
349
350
Figure 5-24
PT2P_xxC

Function Type 24
0 A
> AND A B
B
OR Select A
>
AND
NOT
Control PT Heat=0 Cool=1
Output Select A
Status
Force Analog Output
Point
Output Occupancy State? Output (Cool) A
Input
Output (Heat) B
Maintenance
Setpoint Schedule
A B Fan Control
Occupancy State?
Setpoint Bias High Setpoint High Setpoint Point
Output Bias Input
Occupied Fan Input
Force Occupied
Offset Low Value
Sensor Group/ Sensor Input (OAT)

Offset High Value SPT Sensor
TS Override
Status NOT
High Stage 1 (Cool)
Low
Stage 2 (Cool)
Average Sensor Input
Stage 1 (Heat)
Fan Status Point
AND Fan Status Stage 2 (Heat)
Output
Status
Force Status
Outside Air
Temperature
Output
Status SELECT A
Force 70 A
B
PT2P_xxC
Function Type 24

fan coil valve.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Fan Control Point

fan.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

You must configure this decision to specify the sensor group or space tempera-
ture sensor that is providing the space temperature inputs.

Fan Status Point

status of the fan. The DI point provides the actual state of the fan.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
351
PT2P_xxC
Function Type 24

the outside air temperature.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Time Schedule

Setpoint Schedule

Setpoint Bias

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
352
PT2P_xxC
Function Type 24
Offset Low Value

this decision to specify the minimum setpoint bias.

Offset High Value

this decision to specify the maximum setpoint bias.

Control Pt Heat=0 Cool=1

You must configure this decision to specify the DI point that decides if the
Analog Output Point is performing heating or cooling. When the control point
is active, the Analog Output Point will be equal to the cooling output.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Thermostat
Thermostat provides control of the air terminal’s fan coil valve. Additionally,
this algorithm can control the air terminal fan in two different operating
modes—automatic and manual.
Fan Mode
occupied.

Default Value Auto
353
PT2P_xxC
Function Type 24
Fan Off Delay

This decision is not currently used.
Default Value 1
Operating Mode
Use this decision to indicate whether the algorithm can modulate the fan
coil valve automatically or manually. If you select auto, the fan coil
valve will be modulated automatically when the space temperature is
outside the high and low setpoints.
Default Value Auto
For Manual Mode

Default Value Cool
Stage On Delay
The algorithm does not use this decision.
Default Value 30

354
PT2P_xxC
Function Type 24


Cooling Prop Gain

Use this decision to determine the output cool valve for every degree the
space temperature is above the high setpoint. The value in this decision
is expressed in percent per degrees error.

Default Value 0.5
Heating Prop Gain

Use this decision to determine the output heat valve for every degree the
space temperature is below the low setpoint. The value in this decision is
expressed in stages per degrees error.

Default Value 0.5
Hysteresis

Power on Delay

Default Value 0
355
PT2P_xxM
Function Type 24

Fan Control Point

This decision displays the commanded state of the DO point controlling the air
terminal fan.

Fan Status Point

This decision displays the on/off status of the air terminal’s fan.

This decision displays the value of the outside air temperature being used by
this algorithm.
Occupied ?
Setpoint Bias
This decision displays the percentage value (0-100) used in determining the
Setpoint Bias value. The determination of the bias value is done by converting
50% - 0% to 0 - Offset Low Value and 50% - 100% to 0 - Offset High value.
For example, 90% would add 4/5 of the Offset High Value to both the Low and
High Setpoints.
356
PT2P_xxM
Function Type 24
Low Setpoint
High Setpoint
Control Pt Heat=0 Cool=1

This decision indicates whether the Analog Output Point is being driven by the
heating or cooling output.
Valid Display 0/1
Thermostat
This decision displays the setpoint that is currently being used to determine
the desired heating or cooling output for this algorithm.
Output Cool
being calculated by this algorithm. Output cool = (space temperature -
controlling setpoint)*cool prop. gain.
Output Heat
This decision displays the heating proportional term, if any, currently being
calculated by this algorithm. Output heat = (controlling setpoint - space
temperature)*heat prop. gain.
Task Timer
357
PT4P_xxC
Function Type 25
The DO—Proportional Thermostat 4 Pipe algorithm provides

DO—Prop Thermo modulated outputs to control a chilled water valve and hot water or
4 Pipe steam valve in a fan coil. This algorithm can also control the fan
coil’s fan in two different operating modes. You can configure this
algorithm to lock out heating or cooling if the outside air tempera-
ture exceeds a user configurable limit.
• automatic
• manual
unoccupied times.
Modes
• manual heating
• manual cooling
modulate a heating output or a cooling output, depending on the
space temperature error from the high or low setpoint. If the fan is
on and the space temperature is less than the low setpoint, the
algorithm modulates a heating output. If the fan is on and the space
temperature is higher than the high setpoint, the algorithm modu-
lates a cooling output.
In the manual heating mode, you configure the algorithm to modu-
late the heating output when the fan is on and the space temperature
heating. No cooling is done in this mode.
late the cooling output when the fan is on and the space temperature
is greater than the high setpoint. Otherwise, the algorithm disables
cooling. No heating is done in this mode.
algorithm does not modulate any outputs.
358
PT4P_xxC
Function Type 25
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to control a four-pipe fan coil with
outputs for both heating and cooling.
optional.
* Cooling Coil Value

* Heating Coil Value
* Fan Control Point
* Space Temperature
* Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
Setpoint Bias
Offset Low Value
Offset High Value
Thermostat
Fan Mode
Fan Off Delay
Operating Mode
For Manual Mode
Stage On Delay
Cooling Prop Gain
Heating Prop Gain
Hysteresis
Power on Delay
359
PT4P_xxC
Function Type 25

* Fan Control Point
* Space Temperature
* Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
* Setpoint Bias
Low Setpoint
High Setpoint
Thermostat
Output Cool
Output Heat
Task Timer
360
Figure 5-25

Output Occupancy State?
Maintenance
Setpoint Schedule
Setpoint Bias Occupancy State?
High Setpoint Stage 1 (Cool)
High Setpoint
Output Bias Input
Occupied Stage 2 (Cool)
Force Occupied
Bias High Offset High Setpoint Stage 1 (Heat)
Stage 2 (Heat)
Offset Low Value

Fan Control Point
Offset High Value Sensor Input (OAT) Fan Input
Cooling Coil Valve

Space Temperature
Output Sensor Input Output (Cool) Input
Force
Status NOT
Heating Coil Valve
Fan Status Point
AND Fan Status Output (Heat) Input
Output
Status
Force
Outside Air
Temperature
Output
Status SELECT A
Force 70 A
B
PT4P_xxC
Function Type 25
361
PT4P_xxC
Function Type 25

fan coil’s chilled water valve.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Heating Coil Valve

You must configure this decision to specify the AO point that is controlling the
fan coil’s hot water or steam valve.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Fan Control Point

fan coil’s fan.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Space Temperature
temperature input of the space being monitored.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
362
PT4P_xxC
Function Type 25
Fan Status Point

status of the fan. A DI point provides the actual state of the fan.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

the outside air.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Time Schedule

Setpoint Schedule

363
PT4P_xxC
Function Type 25
Setpoint Bias

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Offset Low Value


Offset High Value


Thermostat
Thermostat provides control to modulate a chilled water valve, hot water valve
or steam valve. Additionally, this algorithm can control the fan coil’s fan in
two different operating modes—automatic and manual.
Fan Mode
occupied.

Default Value Auto
364
PT4P_xxC
Function Type 25
Fan Off Delay


Default Value 1
Operating Mode
Use this decision to indicate whether the algorithm can modulate the
chilled water, hot water or steam valve automatically or manually. If you
select auto, the chilled water valve, hot water or steam valve will be
modulated automatically when the space temperature is outside the high
and low setpoints.

Default Value Auto
For Manual Mode


Default Value Cool
Stage On Delay
The algorithm does not use this decision.

Default Value 30


365
PT4P_xxC
Function Type 25


Cooling Prop Gain

Use this decision to indicate the chilled water valve position for every
decision is expressed in percent per degrees error.

Default Value 0.5
Heating Prop Gain

Use this decision to indicate the hot water valve position for every degree
the space temperature is below the low setpoint. The value in this deci-
sion is expressed in stages per degrees error.

Default Value 0.5
Hysteresis

Power on Delay

Default Value 0
366
PT4P_xxM
Function Type 25

Decisions This decision displays the output value of AO point being controlled by this
algorithm for cooling. The value is normally expressed as a percentage of full
capacity.
Heating Coil Valve

This decision displays the output value of AO point being controlled by this
algorithm for heating. The value is normally expressed as a percentage of full
capacity.
Fan Control Point

This decision displays the commanded state of the DO point controlling the fan
coil’s fan.
Space Temperature
This decision displays the temperature of the space being monitored.
Fan Status Point

This decision displays the actual state of the fan coil’s fan, which determines
whether this algorithm is enabled. If the Fan Status Point is not configured,
this algorithm will not be enabled.

this algorithm.
Occupied ?
367
PT4P_xxM
Function Type 25
Setpoint Bias
This decision displays the percentage value (0-100) used in determining the Set-
point Bias value. The determination of the bias value is done by converting 50% -
0% to 0 - Offset Low Value and 50% - 100% to 0 - Offset High value. For ex-
ample, 90% would add 4/5 of the Offset High Value to both the Low and High
Setpoints.
Low Setpoint
High Setpoint
Thermostat
mine the desired heating or cooling output for this algorithm.
Output Cool
being calculated by this algorithm. Output cool = (space temperature -
controlling setpoint)*cool prop. gain.
Output Heat
being calculated by this algorithm. Output heat = (controlling setpoint -
space temperature)*heat prop. gain.
Task Timer
368
DO—Pump Control
PUMP_xxC
Function Type 22
The DO—Pump Control algorithm controls two pumps in either a

DO—Pump fixed or a rotating sequence. The first pump is known as the pri-
Control mary or the lead pump. The second pump is known as the second-
ary or the lag pump.
When using a fixed sequence, you can manually cause a rotation of

the pumps by changing the value in the Rotate Now configuration
decision.
For a rotating sequence, configure the algorithm to switch the

primary and secondary pumps according to the day of week, day of
month, or accumulated runtime.
The algorithm can activate the primary pump according to one of

three things:
• a Time Schedule
• a discrete input
• the analog comparison of a temperature to a Setpoint Schedule
If you use a Time Schedule as a basis for activating the primary

pump, the algorithm will activate the pump when the Time Schedule
is in the occupied state. Otherwise, the pump remains deactivated.
If you use a discrete input as a basis for activating the primary

pump, the algorithm will activate the pump when the input is on.
Otherwise, the pump remains off.
If you use an analog comparison as a basis for activating the primary

pump, the algorithm activates the pump when the Control Point
sensor is outside the high and low setpoints. When the sensor is
within the region bordered by low setpoint plus hysteresis and high
setpoint minus hysteresis, the algorithm deactivates the primary
pump.
Whenever the algorithm activates the primary pump, the pump

status is confirmed. The controller waits the configured time delay
and, if the status remains off, deactivates the primary pump and
activates the secondary pump. Whenever the algorithm activates the
369
DO—Pump Control
PUMP_xxC
Function Type 22
secondary pump, the pump status is confirmed. The controller waits

the configured time delay and, if the status remains off, the algo-
rithm deactivates the secondary pump. If the algorithm successfully
activates the primary pump, and the primary pump status later
indicates off, the algorithm activates the secondary pump. If the
algorithm cannot confirm the status of either pump, it disables both
pumps until you manually cause a rotation of the pumps.
Note: You must configure a separate status point for each pump
in order for the algorithm to operate correctly.
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to automatically start a secondary pump
whenever the primary pump fails.
optional.

Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Status Point
Pump Control
Sequence Type
Rotate Now
Day of Week
Day of Month
Hours of Runtime
Pump Start Delay
Control Point
Analog
Hysteresis
Power on Delay
370
DO—Pump Control
PUMP_xxC
Function Type 22

Occupied ?
* Status Point
Pump Control
Lead Pump
Pump 1 Runtime
Pump 2 Runtime
Failed Flag
Lead Status
* Control Point
Analog
Low Setpoint
Lo Setpoint + Hyst
Hi Setpoint - Hyst
High Setpoint
Reference Output
Task Timer
371
372
PUMP_xxC
Function Type 22
DO—Pump Control
Figure 5-22
DO—Pump Control
Status Point Pump Control

Output
Status
SELECT A SELECT A
Force
0 A A
Time Schedule B B
OR Input
Output
Status
Maintenance
Analog
Output
Setpoint Schedule Discrete Discrete
Low Setpoint Low Setpoint Input Output
Occupancy State? Point Point
Bias Input Output Pump 1 Pump 1 Input
Occupied
Low Setpoint Status Status Force
Bias Low Offset
Occupied Force Status
Discrete Discrete
Input Output
Control Point Point Point
Output Low Sensor Input Output Pump 2 Pump 2 Input

Status Status
Force
Force High Sensor Input
Force Status
Status Disable
DO—Pump Control
PUMP_xxC
Function Type 22

Decisions You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that controls the first
of two pumps.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that controls the
second of two pumps.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

off status for the first pump. This point provides the actual state of the pump.
Note: You must configure a separate status point for each pump in order for
the algorithm to operate correctly.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

off status for the second pump. This point provides the actual state of the
pump.
Note: You must configure a separate status point for each pump in order for
the algorithm to operate correctly.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
373
DO—Pump Control
PUMP_xxC
Function Type 22
Time Schedule
state for this algorithm. If you want the Time Schedule to control pump activa-
tion, do not configure a Control Point or Status Point.

Setpoint Schedule
If using an analog comparison as to a basis for activating a pump, use this
decision to specify the Setpoint Schedule that provides the occupied and unoc-
cupied setpoints.

Status Point
Use this decision to configure a discrete point to control pump activation. If
this point is configured, a pump will start when this point is on. If this point is
not configured, it will have no effect on the pump activation.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Pump Control
Pump Control controls two pumps in either a fixed or a rotating sequence.
374
DO—Pump Control
PUMP_xxC
Function Type 22
Sequence Type
Use this decision to indicate whether the pumps have a fixed or rotating
sequence. A fixed sequence consists of a lead pump with a backup
pump. You can configure the lead pump as the first or second pump. A
rotating sequence consists of pumps that alternate at a configured time
between being a lead pump and a lag pump.
Allowable Entries 0 = Rotating

1 = Fixed Rotation with Pump1 as Lead
2 = Fixed Rotation with Pump2 as Lead
Default Value 0
Rotate Now
Use this decision to indicate whether to switch the designation of the
lead and lag pumps.
Note: When both pumps fail, use this decision to restart the algorithm.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = No/Yes, LID = 0(No) / 1(Yes)

Default Value No
Day of Week
This decision only applies to pumps with a rotating sequence. If you
want to rotate the pumps on a weekly basis, use this decision to indicate
the day of the week on which you want to rotate the pumps.
0 = Disabled 4 = Thursday
1 = Monday 5 = Friday
2 = Tuesday 6 = Saturday
3 = Wednesday 7 = Sunday
Default Value 0
375
DO—Pump Control
PUMP_xxC
Function Type 22
Day of Month
want to rotate the pumps on a monthly basis, use this decision to indi-
cate the day of the month on which you want to rotate the pumps.
0 = Disabled
1 = first day of month, etc.,
31 = 31st day of month
Default Value 0
Hours of Runtime
want to rotate the pumps according to accumulated runtime, use this
decision to indicate the amount of time the pump must run before the
rotation occurs.
Allowable Entries 0 to 8760 hours

Default Value 0
Pump Start Delay

Use this decision to indicate the amount of time to wait after starting a
pump before verifying that the pump is running.

Default Value 15
Control Point
Use this decision to specify the temperature type input that will be compared to
the Setpoint Schedule to determine if a pump should be activated.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
376
DO—Pump Control
PUMP_xxC
Function Type 22
Analog
Analog provides a discrete output by comparing a sensor value to the config-
ured setpoint values. If the Control Point sensor is outside the setpoints, the
pump is commanded on and remains on until the Control Point sensor is within
the region bordered by low setpoint plus hysteresis and high setpoint minus
hysteresis. This prevents short cycling of the controlled device.
Hysteresis
Use this decision to specify the amount that is added to the low setpoint
and subtracted from the high setpoint.

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify how often the input conditions are checked
to determine if the output state must change.

Default Value 600
Power on Delay

Default Value 0
377
DO—Pump Control
PUMP_xxM
Function Type 22

Decisions This decision displays the commanded state of the first pump.

This decision displays the commanded state of the second pump.

This decision displays the status of the first pump.

This decision displays the status of the second pump.
Occupied ?
Status Point
This decision displays the actual state of the discrete control point. On will
cause a pump to start.
378
DO—Pump Control
PUMP_xxM
Function Type 22
Pump Control
Pump Control function displays the current pump sequence, runtime, and
status for this algorithm.
Lead Pump
This decision displays the value of the current lead pump.
Valid Display 1 (First Discrete Output Point)
2 (Second Discrete Output Point)
Pump 1 Runtime
This decision displays how long, in hours, that Pump1 has been on.
Valid Display 0 to 65535 hours
Pump 2 Runtime
This decision displays how long, in hours, that Pump2 has been on.
Valid Display 0 to 65535 hours
Failed Flag
This decision indicates when both pumps fail. If neither the lead nor
lag pump can be started, the Failed Flag will be activated.
Valid Display Normal (Status OK)
Alarm (Pump Failure)
Lead Status
This decision displays the current state of the lead pump
Control Point
This decision displays the current value of the analog Control Point. This
value is used by the Analog function to compare against the configured
Setpoint Schedule. The result determines whether a pump should be started.
379
DO—Pump Control
PUMP_xxM
Function Type 22
Analog
Analog function is one of three methods that can be used to control pump
operation. The setpoint values are compared with the Control Point to deter-
mine whether a pump should be started.
Low Setpoint
This decision displays the configured Low Setpoint value based on the
occupancy state. If the Control Point falls below this value, the pump
will be commanded on.
Lo Setpoint + Hyst
This decision displays the Low Setpoint value, adjusted upward by the
configured hysteresis.
Hi Setpoint - Hyst
This decision displays the High Setpoint value, adjusted downward by
the configured hysteresis value.
High Setpoint
This decision displays the configured High Setpoint value, based on the
current occupancy state. If the Control Point exceeds this value, the
pump will be commanded on.
Reference Output
This decision displays the output value from the analog function. If the
Control Point is outside the setpoint limits, the reference output will be
True and a pump will be commanded on. If the Control Point is within
the setpoints and hysteresis, the reference output will be False.
Task Timer
380
DO—Staged Thermostat
STHRMxxC
Function Type 26
The DO—Staged Thermostat algorithm mimics the operation of a

DO—Staged programmable wall thermostat in two ways—by providing three
Thermostat types of operating modes for the thermostat and two types of control
modes for the fan. You can configure this algorithm to lock out heat
or cooling if the outside air temperature exceeds a user configured
limit.
• automatic
• manual
unoccupied times.
Modes
• manual heating
• manual cooling
activate either one or two stages of heating, or one or two stages of
cooling , depending on the space temperature error from the high or
low setpoint. If the fan is on and the space temperature is less than
the low setpoint, the algorithm activates stages of heating. If the fan
is on and the space temperature is higher than the high setpoint, the
algorithm activates stages of cooling.
In the manual heating mode, you configure the algorithm to activate
only stages of heating when the fan is on and the space temperature
manual heating.
In the manual cooling mode, you configure the algorithm to activate
stages of cooling when the fan is on and the space temperature is
greater than the high setpoint. Otherwise, the algorithm disables
cooling.
algorithm turns off all stages.
381
STHRMxxC
Function Type 26
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to control a rooftop with two stages of
heating and two stages of cooling.
optional.
* Stage 1 Cool
* Stage 2 Cool
* Stage 1 Heat
* Stage 2 Heat
* Fan Control Point
* Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
Setpoint Bias
Offset Low Value
Offset High Value
Thermostat
Fan Mode
Fan Off Delay
Operating Mode
For Manual Mode
Stage On Delay
Cooling Prop Gain
Heating Prop Gain
Hysteresis
Power on Delay
382
STHRMxxC
Function Type 26

Decisions this algorithm. They provide useful information regarding the status
and configuration of this algorithm.
* Stage 1 Cool
* Stage 2 Cool
* Stage 1 Heat
* Stage 2 Heat
* Fan Control Point
* Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
* Setpoint Bias
Thermostat
Output Cool
Output Heat
Task Timer
383
384
Figure 5-26
STHRMxxC
Function Type 26

Stage 1 Cool
Occupancy Occupancy State? Stage 1 (Cool) Input
Maintenance Stage 2 Cool

Setpoint Schedule Stage 2 (Cool) Input

Occupancy State? Stage 1 Heat
Setpoint Bias High Setpoint High Setpoint
Stage 1 (Heat) Input
Output Bias Input
Occupied
Status Bias Low Offset Low Setpoint Stage 2 Heat
Force Occupied
Bias High Offset High Setpoint Stage 2 (Heat) Input
Offset Low Value
Offset High Value

TS Override
Fan Control Point
Status NOT Sensor Input (OAT) Fan Input
High
Low
Average Sensor Input
Fan Status Point

AND Fan Status
Output
Status
Force
Outside Air Temperature Output (Heat)

Output
Status Output (Cool)
SELECT A
Force 70 A
B
STHRMxxC
Function Type 26
Configuration Stage 1 Cool

first stage of cooling.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Stage 2 Cool
second stage of cooling.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Stage 1 Heat
first stage of heating.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Stage 2 Heat
second stage of heating.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Fan Control Point

air terminal’s fan.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
385
STHRMxxC
Function Type 26

You must configure this decision to specify the Sensor Group or single sensor that
Group, refer to the How to Configure Algorithms chapter of this manual.
Note: Use the same Sensor Group/SPT Sensor for all algorithms that control a
common air handler.
Fan Status Point

status of the air handler’s fan. A DI point provides the actual state of the fan.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

If you want to lock out cooling or heating based on the Outside Air Temperature,
you must configure this decision. This decision specifies the AI point that pro-
vides the outside air temperature to the algorithm.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Time Schedule
386
STHRMxxC
Function Type 26
Setpoint Schedule

Setpoint Bias
If you are providing a setpoint bias with the T-56 Space Temperature Sensor
with Setpoint Adjustment, use this decision to specify the input point that

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Offset Low Value

this decision to specify the change at minimum setpoint bias.

Offset High Value

this decision to specify the change at maximum setpoint bias.

387
STHRMxxC
Function Type 26
Thermostat
Thermostat provides thermostat heating and cooling control. Additionally, this
algorithm can control the air terminal fan in two different operating modes—
automatic and manual.
Fan Mode
occupied.

Default Value Manual
Fan Off Delay

Use this decision to configure how long the fan should remain on after
the heating stages have been turned off.

Default Value 30
Operating Mode
Use this decision to indicate whether the algorithm can activate stages
of heating or stages of cooling automatically or manually. If you select
auto, stages of heating or cooling will start automatically when the
space temperature is outside the high and low setpoints.

Default Value Manual
388
STHRMxxC
Function Type 26
For Manual Mode


Default Value Cool
Stage On Delay
Use this decision to configure how long the system should wait after one
stage of heating or cooling has been activated before the next stage can
be activated.

Default Value 30




Cooling Prop Gain

Use this decision to indicate the number of cooling stages for every
decision is expressed in stages per degrees error.

Default Value 0.5
389
STHRMxxC
Function Type 26
Heating Prop Gain

Use this decision to indicate the number of heating stages for every
degree the space temperature is below the low setpoint. The value in
this decision is expressed in stages per degrees error.

Default Value 0.5
Hysteresis
Use this decision to specify how many degrees the error must be re-
duced to turn off an activated stage. This method prevents the short
cycling of heating and cooling stages.

Power on Delay

Default Value 0
390
STHRMxxM
Function Type 26
Maintenance Stage 1 Cool

Decisions This decision displays the actual state of the first stage of cooling.
Stage 2 Cool
This decision displays the actual state of the second stage of cooling.
Stage 1 Heat
This decision displays the actual state of the first stage of heating.
Stage 2 Heat
This decision displays the actual state of the second stage of heating.
Fan Control Point

This decision displays the commanded state of the DO point controlling the fan.

Fan Status Point

This decision displays the on/off status of the fan.

This decision displays the value of the outside air temperature being used by this
algorithm to decide if heating or cooling should be locked out.
391
STHRMxxM
Function Type 26
Occupied ?
mode will be Occupied.
Setpoint Bias
This decision displays the percentage value (0.0 - 100.0%) used to determine the
setpoint bias value. Bias is determined by converting 50-0% to 0-offset low and
50-100% to 0-offset high value.
Thermostat
mine the heating or cooling required for this algorithm.
Output Cool
being calculated by this algorithm. Output cool = (sensor group/SPT
sensor - controlling setpoint)*cool prop. gain.
Valid Display Valid range based upon display unts.
Output Heat
being calculated by this algorithm. Output heat = (controlling setpoint -
sensor group/SPT sensor)*heat prop. gain.
Valid Display Valid range based upon display unts.
Task Timer

392
DO—Staging
STAG_xxC
Function Type 27
The DO—Staging algorithm controls up to six stages of DX (Direct

DO—Staging Expansion) cooling in a constant volume air handler or up to six stages of
fans in a cooling tower.
The DO—Staging algorithm uses a PID (Proportional Integral Derivative)
Master Loop to control the output stages. The PID Master Loop calcu-
lates the percentage of output stages required to achieve the desired space
temperature setpoint. The PID Master Loop calculates the required
percentage of output stages by obtaining the highest sensor input from the
sensor group and comparing it to the space temperature setpoint.
The Comfort Controller activates each stage sequentially, allowing the
configured delay time between each stage. Once a stage is activated, it
will not be de-activated until the calculated number of stages has de-
creased by a full stage. This hysteresis prevents short cycling of stages.
When all available stages are activated, the algorithm clamps the PID
Master Loop integrator at its current value. If the fan status is off or if the
Sensor Group/SPT Sensor status is invalid, the PID Master Loop sets the
output to the Disabled Output Value.
The Time Schedule indicates the current occupancy state for this algo-
rithm. The occupancy state defines when the Comfort Controller is using
the occupied or unoccupied setpoints. If you do not configure a Time
schedule for this algorithm, the algorithm will assume to be in the occu-
pied state.
The Setpoint Schedule allows you to configure high and low setpoints for
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to control up to six DX cooling stages in a
constant volume air handler.
Decisions configure the asterisked decisions. Non-asterisked decisions are optional.
* Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
Humidity Setpoint
393
DO—Staging
STAG_xxC
Function Type 27
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
Staging Control
On Time Delay
Off Time Delay
Power on Delay


* Fan Status Point
Space Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Staging Control
Number of Stages
Requested Stages
Delta Stages
Delay Timer
Task Timer
394
Figure 5-27
DO—Staging
Staging Control
Fan Status Point
Output Fan Status
Status
Force
Sensor Group/ PID_Master_Loop Discrete

SPT Sensor Output Point
TS Override
Stage 1 Input
Status NOT Enable Force Status
High Sensor Input Output Input
Low
Discrete
Average Time Schedule Output Point
Output Stage 2 Input
Maintenance Force Status
Space Setpoint
High Setpoint Setpoint Discrete

Output Point
Occupancy State?
Stage 3 Input
Low Setpoint
Force Status
Minimum Output
Output
OR Maximum Output Discrete
Status Output Point
Force Status
Stage 4 Input
Force Status
Output
> Discrete
Status
Output Point
Force Status
SELECT A stage 5 Input
Humidity Setpoint 1 A Force Status
O B
Occ High Setpoint
+
Occ Low Setpoint Discrete
Output Point
SELECT A
Stage 6 Input
3 A
Force Status
O B Reset Integrator
Clamp Integrator PID Integrator Clamp

STAG_xxC
DO—Staging
Function Type 27
395
DO—Staging
STAG_xxC
Function Type 27

Decisions You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that is
controlling the first stage.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

Use this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the
second stage.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

Use this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the third
stage.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

Use this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the
fourth stage.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

Use this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the fifth
stage.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
396
DO—Staging
STAG_xxC
Function Type 27

Use this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the sixth stage.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Fan Status Point

status of the air handler’s fan. A DI point provides the actual state of the fan.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

that is providing the space temperature inputs.
Note: Use the same Sensor Group/SPT Sensor for all algorithms that control a
common air handler.
Time Schedule
Note: Use the same Time Schedule for all algorithms that contain a common
air handler.
397
DO—Staging
STAG_xxC
Function Type 27
Setpoint Schedule
For more information on Setpoint Schedule, refer to the How to Configure

the DI point that indicates when dehumidification is needed. The algorithm can
use a Humidity Switch or Humidity Sensor to determine if dehumidification is
needed.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Humidity Setpoint
the humidity Setpoint Schedule that provides the high humidity setpoint for this
algorithm. For more information on Setpoint Schedules, refer to the How to
Configure Schedules chapter in this manual.

398
DO—Staging
STAG_xxC
Function Type 27

greater than the occupied high setpoint from the Humidity Setpoint.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the percentage of output stages required to achieve the desired space
temperature setpoint. The percent of output stages will be activated in whole
stage increments.
Proportional Gain

Default Value -5.0
Integral Gain

Default Value -0.4
Derivative Gain
Use this decision to enter the value that is multiplied by the current error
minus the previous error to produce the derivative term. The value in

Default Value 0.0
399
DO—Staging
STAG_xxC
Function Type 27

Use this decision to specify the percentage of available outputs that will
be activated if the sensor group status is invalid.

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the minimum percentage of available output
stages that will always be activated. For example, if five stages are
available, each stage is worth 20%. Therefore, if this decision is set to
20%, one output will always be activated.

Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the maximum percentage of available
output stages that can be activated. For example, if five stages are
available, each stage is worth 20%. Therefore, if this decision is set to
80%, one output can not be activated.

Default Value 100.0
Starting Value
Use this decision to specify the percentage of the available output stages
that are activated when the algorithm is started.

Default Value 0.0


Default Value 30
400
DO—Staging
STAG_xxC
Function Type 27
Staging Control
Staging Control starts and stops up to six discrete stages based on the output
(percentage) from the PID Master Loop. You can configure the minimum time
between starting and stopping stages.

Use this decision to specify the number of discrete stages the algorithm
will control.
Default Value 6
On Time Delay
starting of stages. This value should represent the time from starting
the stage to its effect on the controlled temperature.

Default Value 1
Off Time Delay

stopping of stages. This value should represent the time from stopping
the stage to its effect on the controlled temperature.

Default Value 5
Power on Delay

Default Value 0
401
DO—Staging
STAG_xxM
Function Type 27

Decisions This decision displays the actual state of the discrete point controlling first
stage.

This decision displays the actual state of the discrete point controlling second
stage.

This decision displays the actual state of the discrete point controlling third
stage.

This decision displays the actual state of the discrete point controlling fourth
stage.

This decision displays the actual state of the discrete point controlling fifth
stage.

This decision displays the actual state of the discrete point controlling sixth
stage.
Fan Status Point

whether this algorithm is enabled. If this point is not configured, then this
algorithm will not be enabled.
402
DO—Staging
STAG_xxM
Function Type 27

Occupied ?
default mode will be occupied and Yes will be displayed.
Space Setpoint
This decision displays the high setpoint of the configured Setpoint Schedule.

This decision displays the state of the high humidity switch sensor being
monitored. If the decision was not configured, this value will default to Off.

This decision specifies the current high humidity setpoint for this algorithm. If
the decision was not configured, this value will default to 99% RH, which will
prevent any dehumidification.

Humidity Setpoint.
403
DO—Staging
STAG_xxM
Function Type 27
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
number of Discrete Output Points required.
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term)
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Integrator Flags
404
DO—Staging
STAG_xxM
Function Type 27
Staging Control
This function starts and stops up to six stages of cooling or cooling tower fans.
The control is based on the reference output from the PID Master Loop.
Number of Stages
Requested Stages
on. The number is determined by Reference Output value in relation to
the configured Total Number of Stages.
Delta Stages
This decision displays the difference determined by the Number of Stages
subtracted from the Requested Stages.
Delay Timer
This decision displays the number of minutes remaining in the configured
On Time Delay or Off Time Delay decision (whichever is applicable) that
must elapse before another stage can be added or taken away. When
Delta Stages equals 0, the value in this decision will equal 0.

This decision displays whether or not the PID Clamp is currently in effect
for the staging control function.
Task Timer
405
DO—Time Clock
TCxxC
Function Type 28
The DO—Time Clock algorithm controls a discrete output point

DO—Time Clock based on the occupancy state of a Time Schedule with an optional
capability to duty cycle the output. The Time Schedule indicates the
current occupancy state for this algorithm. When Duty Cycle is
disabled, the algorithm turns on the output whenever the Time
Schedule is occupied and turns it off whenever the Time Schedule is
unoccupied. When Duty Cycle is enabled, the algorithm turns the
output on and off according to the configured off times. The off
times can be different during occupied and unoccupied periods.
You can configure two cycle off periods for the output during each
hour.
If a Redline alert exists during occupied periods, the algorithm

increases the cycle off time by the configured Redline Bias Time.
algorithm. If you do not configure a Time schedule for this algo-
rithm, the algorithm will assume to be in the occupied state.
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to control a fan motor to start during
occupied hours or stop during unoccupied hours.
406
DO—Time Clock
TCxxC
Function Type 28
optional.

* Time Schedule
Loadshed
Duty Cycle
Duty Cycle Enable
First Minute of Hour
Second Minute of Hour
Occupied Off Duration
Unoccupied Off Duration
Minimum Off Time
Redline Bias Time
Power on Delay

Occupied ?
Redline ?
Duty Cycle
Reference Output
Off Time Duration
Region of Hour
Task Timer
407
408
TCxxC
DO—Time Clock
Function Type 28
Figure 5-28
DO—Time Clock
Time Schedule Duty Cycle Discrete Output Point
Output Occupancy State? Output Input
Maintenance
Sensor Input (BIAS)
Loadshed Equipment
Output Loadshed
DO—Time Clock
TCxxC
Function Type 28

Decisions You must configure this decision to define the DO point that this algorithm is
controlling.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Time Schedule
the occupancy state for this algorithm. If you do not specify a Time Schedule in
this decision, the algorithm will assume to be in the occupied state. For more
information on Time Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules chapter
in this manual.
Loadshed
Use this decision to specify the Loadshed equipment part that will indicate the
Redline Alert data from the Loadshed POC.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value LDSHD00
Duty Cycle
Duty Cycle gives you the capability to cycle off the output once or twice every
hour. You can configure the starting time and the duration of the cycle off time.
Duty Cycle Enable

Use this decision to enable the output to duty cycle. If you do not enable
duty cycling, the output will be on during occupied periods and off during
unoccupied periods.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = Disable/Enable
LID = 0(Disable) / 1(Enable)
Default Value Disable
409
DO—Time Clock
TCxxC
Function Type 28

If you want to cycle off the output at least once an hour, use this deci-
sion to enter the minute of the hour that the algorithm will first cycle
off the device. If you enter 0 or 60, the device will cycle off on the
hour.

Default Value 0

If you want to cycle off the output twice an hour, use this decision to
enter the minute of the hour that the algorithm will cycle off the device
for the second time in the same hour.
Caution: If you do not want to cycle off the output for a second time,
enter the same value here that you entered in First Minute of
Hour, or enter a zero

Default Value 0

Use this decision to enter the amount of time the algorithm cycles off
the output during each occupied hour. If you enter 0, the algorithm will
not cycle off the output.

Default Value 0

Use this decision to enter the amount of time the algorithm cycles off
the output during each unoccupied hour. If you enter 0, the algorithm
will not cycle off the output. If you enter 60, the algorithm will cycle
off the output continuously during unoccupied hours.

Default Value 60
410
DO—Time Clock
TCxxM
Function Type 28
Minimum Off Time

To prevent short cycling, use this decision to enter the minimum
amount of time the output must be off during any cycle off period.

Default Value 3
Redline Bias Time

Use this decision to enter the additional amount of desired cycle off
time by which the Occupied Off Duration is increased when the Time
Schedule is occupied and a Redline alert exists.

Default Value 0
Power on Delay

Default Value 0

algorithm.
Occupied ?
411
DO—Time Clock
TCxxM
Function Type 28
Redline ?
This decision displays whether a Redline Alert is in effect. This data is derived
from the Loadshed POC on the CCN.
Duty Cycle
Duty Cycle determines how frequently and for how long to cycle off the
Discrete Output Point controlled by this algorithm.
Reference Output
This decision displays the value to which this algorithm is driving the
output.
Off Time Duration

This decision displays the time remaining before this point will be
cycled back on.
Region of Hour
This decision displays the algorithm’s current region of cycling.
Valid Display 0 Algorithm not enabled
1 Before cycling has begun
2 First duty cycling period
3 After first duty cycle period
4 Second duty cycling period
5 After second duty cycle period
6 Redline Bias time in effect
7 Extended cycle off time
Task Timer
412
DO—Time Clock w Check
TCWSCxxC
Function Type 29
The DO—Time Clock with Check algorithm controls a discrete output

DO—Time Clock point based on the occupancy state of a Time Schedule, with an op-
w Check tional capability to duty cycle the output. When Duty Cycle is dis-
abled, the algorithm turns on the output whenever the Time Schedule
is occupied or when Night Time Free Cooling is enabled. The algo-
rithm turns off the output whenever the Time Schedule is unoccupied.
When Duty Cycle is enabled, the algorithm turns the output on and off
according to the configured off times. However, when both duty cycle
and Night Time Free Cooling are enabled, the algorithm does not cycle
off the output.
The off times can be different during occupied and unoccupied peri-
ods. The off times are reduced based on the space temperature error
from the high and low setpoints. You can configure two cycle off
periods for the output during each hour.
If a Time schedule is not configured for this algorithm, the algorithm

uses the occupied off time. If a Redline alert exists during occupied
periods, the algorithm increases the cycle off time by the configured
Redline Bias Time.
algorithm. The occupancy state defines when the Comfort Controller
is using the occupied or unoccupied setpoints. If you do not configure
a Time schedule for this algorithm, the algorithm will assume to be in
the occupied state.
The Setpoint Schedule allows you to configure high and low setpoints
for both occupied and unoccupied states.
NTFC Algorithm enables the output to allow the system to cool the
space during night time unoccupied hours if the outside air is suitable.
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to control a fan motor to start during
occupied hours or stop during unoccupied hours. If the outside air is
suitable for cooling during night time hours you could start the fan to
cool the building. You can also use this algorithm to duty cycle the
fan during occupied hours based on the space temperature.
413
TCWSCxxC
Function Type 29
optional.

* Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
Loadshed
NTFC Algorithm
Hysteresis
Duty Cycle
Duty Cycle Enable
Minimum Off Time
Redline Bias Time
Power on Delay

Occupied ?
Redline ?
NTFC Active ?
Space Temperature
Reference Output
Error
Cycle Flag
Duty Cycle
Reference Output
Off Time Duration
Region of Hour
Task Timer
414
Figure 5-29
Sensor Group/SPT Sensor Space Temperature

TS Override
Status
High High Sensor
Low Low Sensor
Average
Setpoint Schedule
Low Setpoint Low Setpoint NTFC ALGORITHM
Bias Input
High Setpoint High Setpoint Enthalpy Test Discrete
Occupancy State? NTFC Setpoint Output Point
Occupied
Bias Low Offset Low Setpoint NTFC
OR Input
Occupied
Force Status
Occupancy State Duty Cycle
Occupancy State?
Time Schedule Disable
Output Output Sensor Input (BIAS)
Maintenance Loadshed?
Output
Loadshed Equipment
Output Loadshed
TCWSCxxC
Function Type 29
415
TCWSCxxC
Function Type 29

Decisions You must configure this decision to define the DO point that this algorithm is
controlling.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)


Time Schedule
chapter in this manual.

Setpoint Schedule
type) that provides the occupied and unoccupied setpoints.

416
TCWSCxxC
Function Type 29
Loadshed
Use this decision to specify the Loadshed equipment part that will indicate the
Redline Alert data from the Loadshed POC.

LID = 0 to 16
Default Value LDSHD00
NTFC Algorithm
If Night Time Free Cooling with Enthalpy Check will be performed, use this
decision to specify the algorithm that will determine if the outside air is suitable
for cooling the space. If the outside air is suitable for cooling during unoccu-
pied hours, the output will be activated. It will not cycle off during this time.

Hysteresis
This value is added to the high setpoint or subtracted from the low setpoint and
compared with the space temperature to determine what action should be taken.

Duty Cycle
Duty Cycle gives you the capability to cycle off the output twice every hour.
You configure the starting time and the duration of the cycle off time.
Duty Cycle Enable

Use this decision to enable the output to duty cycle. If you do not
enable duty cycling, the output will be on during occupied periods and
off during unoccupied periods.

Default Value 0 (Disable)
417
TCWSCxxC
Function Type 29

If you want to cycle off the output at least once an hour, use this decision
to enter the minute of the hour that the algorithm will first cycle off the
device. If you enter 0 or 60, the device will cycle off on the hour.

Default Value 0

If you want to cycle off the output twice an hour, use this decision to
enter the minute of the hour that the algorithm will cycle off the device
for the second time in the same hour.
Caution: If you do not want to cycle off the output for a second time,
enter the same value here that you entered in First Minute of
Hour, or enter 0.

Default Value 0

Use this decision to enter the amount of time the algorithm cycles off the
output during each occupied hour. If you enter 0, the algorithm will not
cycle off the output.
Default Value 0

Use this decision to enter the amount of time the algorithm cycles off the
output during each unoccupied hour. If you enter 0, the algorithm will
not cycle off the output. If you enter 60, the algorithm will cycle off the
output continuously during unoccupied hours.
Default Value 60
418
TCWSCxxC
Function Type 29
Minimum Off Time

To prevent short cycling, use this decision to enter the minimum
amount of time the output must be off during any cycle off period.
Default Value 3
Redline Bias Time

Use this decision to enter the additional amount of desired cycle off
time by which the occupied off duration is increased when the Time
Schedule is occupied and a Redline alert exists.
Default Value 0
Power on Delay
Default Value 0
419
TCWSCxxM
Function Type 29

algorithm.

Occupied ?
Redline ?
This decision displays whether a Redline Alert is in effect. This data is de-
rived from the Loadshed POC on the CCN.
NTFC Active ?
This decision indicates whether Night Time Free Cooling is in effect.
420
TCWSCxxM
Function Type 29
Space Temperature
Space Temperature calculates the percentage by which to reduce the cycle off
time based on the space temperature error from the high and low setpoints. If the
space temperature is above the high setpoint plus hysteresis or below the low
setpoint minus hysteresis, the cycle off time is set equal to the configured Mini-
mum Off Time. Cycle off time remains at the computed value until the space
temperature falls within the high setpoint plus half the hysteresis and the low
setpoint minus half the hysteresis. When the space temperature is within this
region, the cycle off time is increased linearly from the configured Minimum Off
Time to the configured Occupied or Unoccupied Off Duration, until the space
temperature is within the high and low setpoints.
Reference Output
This decision displays the reference value that adjusts the duty cycle off
time. This value is expressed as a percentage that is converted and sub-
tracted from (Minimum Off Time + Off Time Duration). The result is the
actual cycle off time for this output device.
Error
This decision displays the calculated setpoint error.
Error is the greater of:

High Sensor - (High Setpoint + 1/2 Hysteresis) or
(Low Setpoint - 1/2 Hysteresis) - Low Sensor
Cycle Flag
This decision displays whether the Cycle Flag has been activated.
Cycle Flag is True if:
High Sensor > (High Setpoint + Hysteresis) or

Low Sensor < (Low Setpoint - Hysteresis)
Cycle Flag is False otherwise.
421
TCWSCxxM
Function Type 29
Duty Cycle
Duty Cycle determines how frequently and for how long to cycle of the Dis-
crete Output Point controlled by this algorithm.
Reference Output
This decision displays the value to which this algorithm is driving the
output.
Off Time Duration

This decision displays the time remaining before this point will be
cycled back on.
Region of Hour
This decision displays the algorithm’s current region of cycling.
Valid Display 0 Algorithm not enabled

1 Before cycling has begun
2 First duty cycling period
3 After first duty cycle period
4 Second duty cycling period
5 After second duty cycle period
6 Redline Bias time in effect
7 Extended cycle off time
Task Timer
422
AOSS
AOSS_xxC
Function Type 301
Many algorithms require AOSS Schedule (a global algorithm) to

AOSS Schedule dictate both their occupied or unoccupied status and their setpoints.
AOSS (Adaptive Optimal Start/Stop) gives you the capability to
expand setpoints and pre-condition the space.
Algorithms serving a common air handler or building space will

usually be under the control of the same Time Schedule and Set-
point Schedule. AOSS provides both of these schedules and serves
two basic purposes:
1. Adaptive Optimal Start heats up or cools down the controlled

space prior to it becoming occupied. This algorithm allows
the space temperature to gradually approach and then achieve
the occupied setpoint at the time of occupancy.
2. Adaptive Optimal Stop allows the temperature of the occu-

pied space to drift to the expanded occupied setpoints during
the last portion of the occupied time.
Configuring an To configure an algorithm to use Adaptive Optimal Start, you must

Algorithm to Use AOSS enter AOSS_xx/algorithm name (where xx is the occurrence of the
AOSS algorithm) in the algorithm’s Time Schedule configuration
decision.
To configure an algorithm to use Adaptive Optimal Stop, you must

enter AOSS_xx/algorithm name (where xx is the occurance of the
AOSS algorithm) in the algorithm’s Setpoint Schedule configuration
decision.
Calculating Expanded The value entered in Adaptive Optimal Stop’s Setpoint Bias deter-
Occupied Setpoints mines the expanded occupied setpoints. If the value entered is 2°F
and the occupied setpoints are 68°F and 78°F, the expanded occu-
pied setpoints would be 66°F and 80°F.
The value entered in Maximum Stop Time determines the maximum

amount of time that expanded occupied setpoints can be in effect
prior to the space becoming unoccupied. For example, if the occu-
pied time is 0800 through 1700, and the Maximum Stop Time is 15
minutes, the expanded occupied setpoints could not come into effect
until 1645.
423
AOSS
AOSS_xxC
Function Type 301
If Adaptive Optimal Stop is not desired (i.e., no relaxation of the

setpoints is desired), then Adaptive Optimal Stop’s Setpoint Bias
and Maximum Stop Time should be set to 0.
Calculating Start and AOSS calculates start and stop time offsets for each period in the
Stop Time Offsets Time Schedule. The factors that affect offset calculations are:
• present space temperature

• occupied and unoccupied setpoints
• how well the building is insulated
• outside air temperature
• the K Factor that accounts for the previous day’s performance
The K Factor represents the time difference between when a setpoint

was achieved and when it was supposed to be achieved. The routine
learns from each day’s performance and, in turn, fine-tunes the K
Factor on a daily basis. The K Factor is affected by the following
factors:
• actual time the setpoint was achieved

• configured occupied and unoccupied times
• response time gain
• previous K Factor
• previous start or stop time offset
AOSS has to accumulate data for a full 24-hour day (0000 to 2400)
before it will function. For example, if the Time Schedule is config-
ured on Monday at 0800, the controller will not compute the Adap-
tive Optimal Start until 0000 on Wednesday. Thereafter, each day
at 0000 the controller will calculate the 24 Hour Unocc Factor for
the first period of any Time Schedule that is configured for Adaptive
Optimal Start/Stop.
Start and Stop Modes Throughout the day, AOSS is in either Start mode or Stop mode.
During Start mode, AOSS computes the start bias every minute,
based on current conditions. Once the time of day passes the biased
start time, AOSS checks the temperature of the controlled space
every minute. As soon as the controlled space temperature comes to
within 1 degree of the occupied setpoint, the algorithm computes the
K Factor for the next day and goes into Stop mode.
424
AOSS
AOSS_xxC
Function Type 301
During Stop mode, AOSS computes the stop bias every minute,
based on current conditions. Once the time of day passes the biased
stop time (next unoccupied time minus stop bias), AOSS checks the
temperature of the controlled space every minute. As soon as the
controlled space temperature comes to within 1 degree of the ex-
panded occupied setpoint, the algorithm computes the K Factor for
the next day and goes into Start mode.
Figure 5-30
ART MO
AOSS Start and Stop ST0000 / 2400 hrs DE
Modes
SEE
TRACKS
EVERY S CHEDU NOTE
ME
1
MINUTE
I L
A T CCUP D
E
O IE {
SEE UN D TRACKS
EVERY 15
NOTE MINUTES
1
1800 0600
hrs hrs
UNOCCUPIED
▼
TIME
BIASED
START
TIME
OC
▼
CUPIED
S TO S
BIA
P
B I A RT
S
A
ST
BIASED
{
STOP
TIME
1200 hrs OCCUPIED
STOP TIME
MODE
SEE SEE
NOTE
NOTE
1 C B 1
TRACKS TRACKS
EVERY 15 EVERY
MINUTES MINUTE
A D A P T I V E O P T I M A L S TA R T / S TO P A L G O R I T H M ( AO S S )
Provides efficient transition between occupied and unoccupied setpoints
NOTE 1 SEE PAGES 78 AND 79 FOR A FLOWCHART REPRESENTING THE AOSS ROUNTINE
Typical Application You can use this algorithm to pre-condition the space prior to
occupancy and relaxing the setpoint at the end of occupancy.
425
AOSS
AOSS_xxC
Function Type 301
optional.

Outside Air Temp
* Time Schedule
* Setpoint Reference
Offset Low Value
Offset High Value
Adaptive Optimal Start
AO Start Enable
Building Insulation
Unoccupied 24hr Factor
Adaptive Optimal Stop
AO Stop Enable
Maximum Stop Time
Setpoint Bias
T56 Slider Bias
Power on Delay

* Outside Air Temp
Occupied ?
AOSS Time Schedule
Mode
Biased Occupied
Next Occupied Day
Next Occupied Time
Next Unoccupied Day
Next Unoccupied Time
Last Unoccupied Day
Last Unoccupied Time
Status
Override is set
426
AOSS
AOSS_xxC
Function Type 301
AOSS Setpoint Schedule

Occupied Lo Setpoint
Occupied Hi Setpoint
Unoccupied Lo Setpoint
Unoccupied Hi Setpoint
Start Bias
Start Cool K Factor
Start Heat K Factor
Biased Start Day
Biased Start Time
Biased Occupied
Cool Flag
Stop Bias
Stop Cool K Factor
Stop Heat K Factor
Biased Low Setpoint
Biased High Setpoint
Biased Stop
Cool Flag
Biased Stop Day
Biased Stop Time
* T56 Slider Bias
Task Timer
427
428
AOSS
Figure 5-31
AOSS_xxC
AOSS
Function Type 301

Outdoor Air Temp.
Output OAT
T56 Slider Bias Status
Output Force
Occupancy
Status
Setpoint Schedule Biased Occupancy
Force
Low Setpoint
Bias Input
High Setpoint Occupancy State?
Offset Low Value Bias Low Offset
Occupied
Low Setpoint Occ Low Setpoint
Offset High Value Bias High Offset
Occupied
Occupancy State? High Setpoint Occ High Setpoint
AOSS Time Next Occ Time

Schedule
Output
Next Occ Time
Low Sensor
Last UnOcc Time
High Sensor
Next UnOcc Time
Status
OR Disable

Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor Disable
TS Override
High Setpoint
Status
Low Setpoint
High
Occupancy State?
Low
Average Biased Low Setpoint
Next Occ T i me
Next UnOcc T i me
AVG Sensor Input

AOSS
AOSS_xxC
Function Type 301
Configuration Sensor Group/SPT Sensor

Decisions Use this decision to specify the Sensor Group or single sensor that is providing
the space temperature inputs.
Note: Use the same Sensor Group/SPT Sensor for all algorithms that control
Outside Air Temp

Use this decision to specify the AI point that provides the outside air tempera-
ture to the algorithm.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Time Schedule
in this decision, the algorithm will assume to be in the occupied state. For more
information on Time Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules
section in this manual.
air handler.

Setpoint Reference
You must configure this decision to specify the Setpoint Schedule that is pro-
viding the space temperature setpoints for this algorithm. Adaptive Optimal
Start and Adaptive Optimal Stop are based on the configured setpoint values.
429
AOSS
AOSS_xxC
Function Type 301
Offset Low Value


Offset High Value



Adaptive Optimal Start heats up or cools down the controlled space prior to it
becoming occupied. It allows the space temperature to gradually approach and
then achieve the occupied setpoint at the time of occupancy.
AO Start Enable
Use this decision to specify if Adaptive Optimal Start will be performed.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = Enable / Disable

Building Insulation
Use this decision to indicate how well the building is insulated. Although
you can enter any number between 1 and 100 in this decision, you should
enter a value that corresponds to the characteristics of the building.

Default Value 30
430
AOSS
AOSS_xxC
Function Type 301

Use this decision to enter the value used by Adaptive Optimal Start to
compensate for the interior mass of the building. The value entered here
represents minutes per degree of error from the desired temperature.
When the building has been unoccupied for 24 or more hours, Adaptive
Optimal Start uses this value in calculating when to begin correcting to
occupied setpoints. The greater the building’s mass, the larger the value
that should be entered in this decision.
Default Value 15

Adaptive Optimal Stop allows the temperature of the occupied space to drift to
the expanded occupied setpoints during the last portion of the occupied time.
AO Stop Enable
Use this decision to specify if Adaptive Optimal Stop will be performed.

Maximum Stop Time

Use this decision to specify the maximum number of minutes that the
expanded occupied setpoints can be used prior to the controlled space
becoming unoccupied.

Default Value 60
Setpoint Bias
Use this decision to enter the number of degrees that are applied to ex-
pand the occupied setpoints during Adaptive Optimal Stop.

431
AOSS
AOSS_xxM
Function Type 301
T56 Slider Bias


LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Power on Delay

Default Value 0
Maintenance Sensor Group/SPT Sensor

Decisions This decision displays the space temperature value of the single AI sensor or
the average of the sensor group, depending on which is selected.

this algorithm.
Occupied ?
data in the Time Schedule. If a Time Schedule has not been selected, the
432
AOSS
AOSS_xxM
Function Type 301
AOSS Time Schedule

AOSS Time Schedule displays the Time Schedule information as configured
and used by the Adaptive Optimal Start and Stop routines.
Mode
This decision displays the current occupancy mode from Adaptive
Optimal Start.
Valid Display 0 = Unoccupied

1 = Occupied
Biased Occupied
This decision identifies when a biased occupancy condition exists.
Valid Display 0 = Not in effect

1 = Biased Occupied in effect
Next Occupied Day

This decision displays the day of the week on which the next occupied
period will occur.
Valid Display Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun
Next Occupied Time

This decision displays the time of day when the next occupied period
will occur.
Valid Display Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 23:59

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Next Unoccupied Day

This decision displays the day of the week on which the next unoccu-
pied period will occur.
433
AOSS
AOSS_xxM
Function Type 301

This decision displays the time of day when the next unoccupied period
will occur.

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Last Unoccupied Day

This decision displays the day of the week on which the last unoccupied
period occurred.

This decision displays the time of day when the last unoccupied period
occurred.

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Status
This decision displays the current status of the Time Schedule
configured within AOSS.
Valid Display 0 = Time Schedule found

1 = Time Schedule not found
Override is set
This decision identifies when the Time Schedule has been overridden
from an unoccupied state to an occupied state.
Valid Display 0 = Override not in effect

1 = Override in effect
434
AOSS
AOSS_xxM
Function Type 301
AOSS Setpoint Schedule

AOSS Setpoint Schedule displays the Setpoint Schedule information as config-
ured and used by the Adaptive Optimal Start and Stop routines.
This decision displays the Occupied Lo Setpoint value, including any
adjustment for T-56 Slider Bias.
This decision displays the Occupied Hi Setpoint value, including any
This decision displays the Unoccupied Lo Setpoint value, including any
This decision displays the Unoccupied Hi Setpoint value, including any
435
AOSS
AOSS_xxM
Function Type 301

Adaptive Optimal Start is used to bring comfort conditions to prescribed levels
by the beginning of the next occupied period.
Start Bias
This decision displays the adjustment value, in minutes, for the Adaptive
Optimal Start routine.
Start Cool K Factor

This decision displays the value of the optimal Start Cool K Factor
currently being used by the algorithm. This value is multiplied times the
space temperature error to create the start time bias for cooling. This
value represents minutes of optimal start per degree of error.
Start Heat K Factor

This decision displays the value of the optimal Start Heat K Factor
currently being used by the algorithm. This value is multiplied times the
space temperature error to create the start time bias for heating. This
value represents minutes of optimal start per degree of error.
Biased Start Day

This decision displays the day of the week that the next biased start time
will occur.
436
AOSS
AOSS_xxM
Function Type 301
Biased Start Time

This decision displays the time of day that the next biased start will
occur. This value is determined by subtracting the calculated start time
bias from the next configured occupied time.
For example, if a Time Schedule has a normal occupied time of 0800
and Adaptive Optimal Start has calculated a start time offset of 15
minutes, Biased Occupied will be noted at 0745.

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Biased Occupied
This decision is used to indicate when the Time Schedule is currently in
an occupied state due to Adaptive Optimal Start.
Cool Flag
This decision is used by the Adaptive Optimal Start routine to indicate
whether the equipment being controlled is currently in a heating or
cooling mode.
Valid Display False = Heating mode

True = Cooling mode

Adaptive Optimal Stop is used to save energy by relaxing the setpoint restric-
tions toward the end of an occupied period.
Stop Bias
This decision displays the adjustment value, in minutes, for the Adap-
tive Optimal Stop routine.
437
AOSS
AOSS_xxM
Function Type 301
Stop Cool K Factor

This decision displays the value of the optimal Stop Cool K Factor
currently being used by the algorithm. This value is multiplied times
the space temperature error to create the stop time bias for cooling.
This value represents minutes of optimal stop per degree of error.
Stop Heat K Factor

This decision displays the value of the optimal Stop Heat K Factor
currently being used by the algorithm. This value is multiplied times
the space temperature error to create the stop time bias for heating. This
value represents minutes of optimal stop per degree of error.
Biased Low Setpoint

This decision displays the adjusted Occupied Lo Setpoint that will be
used when Biased Stop Day and Biased Stop Time are reached. This
value will be used until unoccupied time is reached.

This decision displays the adjusted Occupied Hi Setpoint that will be
used when Biased Stop Day and Biased Stop Time are reached. This
value will be used until unoccupied time is reached.
Biased Stop
This decision is used to indicate when the algorithms are controlling to
the Biased Low and Biased High Setpoints during Adaptive Optimal
Stop.
438
AOSS
AOSS_xxM
Function Type 301
Cool Flag
This decision is used by the Adaptive Optimal Stop routine to indicate
cooling mode.

True = Cooling mode
Biased Stop Day

This decision displays the day of the week that the next Biased Stop
will occur.
Biased Stop Time

This decision displays the time of day that the next Biased Stop will
occur. This value is determined by subtracting the calculated stop time
bias from the next configured unoccupied time.

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
T56 Slider Bias

This decision displays the percentage adjustment value of the T56 Slider Bias.
If the percentage adjustment value is 0 to 50%, the Offset Low Value will be
used as a setpoint adjustment. If the percentage adjustment value exceeds
50%, the Offset High Value will be used as a setpoint adjustment.
Task Timer
439
Network Broadcast
BRCSTxxC
Function Type 302
This global algorithm sends data from the Source Point in the
Network Comfort Controller to all CCN system elements containing the point
Broadcast name specified in the Point Name configuration decision. You can
configure the broadcast to occur on the hour, at a specific time of
day, or at a timed interval.
Typical Application You can use a network broadcast to transmit the outside air tempera-
ture every five minutes to all CCN system elements containing the
specified point name.
optional.
* Source Point
Broadcast Point
* Enable
* Broadcast Address
* Broadcast Bus
* Point Name
Reschedule Type
Reschedule Time
Power on Delay
* Source Point
Network Status
Task Timer
440
Network Broadcast
BRCSTxxC
Function Type 302
Configuration Source Point

Decisions You must configure this decision to indicate the name of the point in
the Comfort Controller that will provide the data to broadcast.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Broadcast Point
Broadcast Point determines the configuration data for the network
broadcast point(s) and also specifies the broadcast parameters.
Enable
You must configure this decision to give the Comfort Con-
troller the capability to broadcast the value of Source Point
to all CCN system elements containing the point name
specified in the Point Name decision.

Default Value No
Broadcast Address
You must configure this decision to indicate the element
number of the devices(s) receiving the data.
Note: Address 241 represents a global broadcast element

number.

Default Value 241
441
Network Broadcast
BRCSTxxC
Function Type 302
Broadcast Bus
Use the decision to indicate the bus number of the device(s) receiving
the data.
Note: Address 241 represents a global broadcast bus.
Default Value 241
Point Name
You must configure this decision to indicate the actual point name that
will receive the broadcasted data.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Reschedule Type
Use this decision to indicate when the broadcast will occur.
0 (timed) = indicates that the broadcast will occur on a timed basis, as
determined by Reschedule Time
1 (hourly) = indicates that the broadcast will occur at the beginning of
every hour
2 (daily) = indicates that the broadcast will occur daily, based on
Reschedule Time of Day
Default Value 0
Rescheduled Time
If you entered a 2 in Reschedule Type, use this decision to indicate the
hour and minute of each day that the broadcast will occur. If you
entered a 0 in Reschedule Type, use this decision to indicate exactly
how many hour(s) and minute(s) must elapse between broadcasts.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 23:59
LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Default Value 00:05
442
Network Broadcast
BRCSTxxM
Function Type 302
Power On Delay
Use this decision to indicate the number of seconds that must elapse after a
power restart before this algorithm executes again.

Default Value 0
Maintenance Source Point

Decisions This decision displays the current value to be broadcasted.
Network Status
This decision displays communication status of the network broadcast.
Valid Display 0 = Successful Broadcast

1 = No Broadcast acknowledge received
Task Timer
443
Linkage/AOSS Schedule
LINK_xxC
Function Type 303
As part of an integrated systems approach, the Comfort Controller

Linkage/AOSS supports linkage to Carrier electronically-controlled air terminals
Schedule creating a Digital Air Volume (DAV) system. Each Comfort Control-
ler can support one DAV linkage controlled system. The Carrier DAV
system uses linkage to provide optimum comfort without sacrificing
energy efficiency. This is done by providing the air handler as config-
ured in the Comfort Controller with the dynamic information neces-
sary to condition the spaces without over or under conditioning.
Unlike traditional VAV systems, which have a fixed discharge tem-
perature, the DAV system with linkage utilizes varying numbers of
zone temperatures to create weighted average temperatures (by nomi-
nal box size). Those weighted average temperatures are then used by
the air handler to provide optimum performance. Specifically, two
weighted average temperatures are calculated. The first is the Aver-
age Zone Temperature (AZT), which is a weighted average of all the
zones connected to a single air handler. This temperature value is the
equivalent of a return air temperature sensor. The second weighted
average temperature is the Average Occupied Zone Temperature
(AOZT). This value contributes to the dynamic flexibility of the DAV
system allowing the system to automatically adapt its operation to
changing zone schedules.
Additionally, as part of the linkage strategy, the Comfort Controller is
provided information such as occupancy status, average setpoints, and
earliest occupied time of any zone. The information is used by the
Comfort Controller algorithms to determine the mode of control, to
reset supply air, to increase indoor air quality, and to minimize energy
consumption. The information is also used by the Adaptive Optimal
Start and Stop routines.
The Comfort Controller sends information such as operating mode,
optimal start bias time, and supply air temperature to the Terminal
System Manager so it can properly control the zone’s temperatures.
In the event that linkage fails, the Linkage/AOSS Schedule algorithm
will use the configured Time Schedule to determine occupancy and use
the configured Setpoint Schedule to determine the occupied and
unoccupied setpoints. If a Time Schedule was not configured and
linkage fails, the algorithm will assume to be in the occupied state. If a
Setpoint Schedule was not configured, the algorithm will use default
occupied setpoints.
444
LINK_xxC
Function Type 303
For additional information on Linkage, refer to the Terminal System

Manager II Overview and Configuration Manual.
Configuring an To configure an algorithm to use Linkage, you must enter LINK_xx/

Algorithm to Use algorithm name (where xx is the occurance of the Linkage algo-
Linkage rithm) in one or more of the algorithm’s configuration decisions.
Refer to the topic below to determine which algorithms can use
Linkage and the configuration decisions in which you must enter
LINK_xx.
Applicable Algorithms You can configure the algorithms in the following table to use
Linkage by entering LINK_xx in their specified decisions.
Table 5-4
Algorithms Capable of Configuration Decisions
Using Linkage
Sensor
Algorithms Group
Time Setpoint /SPT
Schedule Schedule Sensor
AO—Cooling VAV x x x
AO—Heating VAV x x x
AO—Mixed Air Damper VAV x x
DO—DX Cooling VAV x x x
DO—Electric Heat VAV x x x
DO—Time Clock x
DO—Time Clock w Check x x x
optional.
Setpoint Bias
* Setpoint Schedule
AO Start Enable
Building Insulation
Offset Low Value
Offset High Value
445
LINK_xxC
Function Type 303

* Time Schedule
Outside Air Temp
NTFC Algorithm
Heating Algorithm
* Supply Air Temp
* Fan Status
AO Stop Enable
Maximum Stop Time
Setpoint Bias
Power on Delay
Evacuation
Pressurization
Setpoint Bias
Start Bias
Start Cool K Factor
Start Heat K Factor
Biased Start Day
Biased Start Time
Biased Occupied
Cool Flag
Occupied ?
* Outside Air Temp
Linkage Time Schedule
Mode
Biased Occupied
Next Occupied Day
Next Occupied Time
Next Unoccupied Day
Last Unoccupied Day
446
LINK_xxC
Function Type 303
Status
Override is set
Linkage Setpoint Schedule
Linkage Space Temp
* Supply Air Temp
* Fan Status
Air Side Linkage
Linkage Status
Supervisory Element
Supervisory Bus
Supervisory Block No.
Avg Occ Heat Setpoint
Avg Occ Cool Setpoint
Avg Unocc Heat Setpoint
Avg Unocc Cool Setpoint
Avg Zone Temperature
Avg Occ Zone Temperature
Stop Bias
Stop Cool K Factor
Stop Heat K Factor
Biased Low Setpoint
Biased Stop
Cool Flag
Biased Stop Day
Biased Stop Time
Task Timer
* Evacuation
* Pressurization
447
448
Figure 5-32
LINK_xxC
Function Type 303
Heating Algorithm
Fan Status Point Morning Warm Up?
Output
Status Supply Air
Force Status Temperature Air Side Linkage Adaptive Optimal Start
Output
Outdoor Air Temp.
Status Morning Warm Up? Output OAT
Setpoint Bias Occupancy
Force Status Supply Air Temp Status
Output Force Biased Occupancy
Fan Status
Status
Setpoint Schedule
Force
Bias Input Occupancy Occupancy?
Offset Low Value Bias Low Offset Previous Occ Time Previous Occ Time
Occupied
Offset High Value Low Setpoint Occ Low Setpoint Next Occ Time
Bias High Offset Next Occ Time
Occupied
Occupancy State? High Setpoint Occ High Setpoint Next Unocc Time Next Unocc Time
Time Schedule Occ Low Setpoint Occ Low Setpoint
Output Occupancy Occ High Setpoint Occ High Setpoint
Next Occ Time Next Occ Time
Low Sensor Low Sensor
Next UnOcc Time
Next UnOcc Time
Last UnOcc Time Last UnOcc Time High Sensor High Sensor
Status
Start Bias
Sensor Group/ Linkage Status Disable
SPT Sensor
TS Override Adaptive Optimal Stop
Status SG Status
Disable
High High Sensor
High Setpoint
Low Low Sensor
Low Setpoint
Average AVG Sensor
Occupancy?

NTFC ALGORITHM NTFC Active?
Biased Low Setpoint
NTFC Active? Start Bias
Next Unocc Time
Next Occ Time Next Occ Time
AVG Sensor AVG Sensor Input
LINK_xxC
Function Type 303
Configuration Setpoint Bias

Decisions If you are adjusting the configured space temperature setpoints with the T-56
Space Temperature Sensor, use this decision to specify the input point that pro-
vides the bias input.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Setpoint Schedule
type) that provides the occupied and unoccupied low setpoints for this algorithm
as a backup in the event that linkage fails.


Adaptive Optimal Start heats up or cools down the controlled space prior to it
becoming occupied. It allows the space temperature to gradually approach and
then achieve the occupied setpoint at the time of occupancy.
AO Start Enable
Use this decision to specify if Adaptive Optimal Start will be performed.

Building Insulation
Use this decision to indicate how well the building is insulated. Although
you can enter any number between 1 and 100 in this decision, you should
enter a value that corresponds to the characteristics of the building.

Default Value 30
449
LINK_xxC
Function Type 303

Use this decision to enter the value used by Adaptive Optimal Start to
compensate for the interior mass of the building. The value entered
here represents minutes per additional degree of error from the desired
temperature after a 24-hour unoccupied period. When the building has
been unoccupied for 24 or more hours, Adaptive Optimal Start uses this
value in calculating when to begin correcting to occupied setpoints.
The greater the building’s mass, the larger the value that should be
entered in this decision.
Default Value 15
Offset Low Value

If you are adjusting the configured setpoints with the setpoint bias, use this
decision to specify the range of adjustment for the lower half of the Slider Bias.
Offset High Value

If you are adjusting the configured setpoints with the setpoint bias, use this
decision to specify the range of adjustment for the upper half of the Slider Bias.

You must configure this decision to specify the backup sensor group or space
temperature sensor that is providing the space temperature inputs in the event
Linkage fails.
Note: Use the same sensor group/SPT sensor or space temperature sensor for
all algorithms that control a common air handler.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = SNSGRxx
450
LINK_xxC
Function Type 303
Time Schedule
state for this algorithm in the event that linkage fails. This Time Schedule will
only be used when linkage fails. If you do not specify a Time Schedule in this
decision, the algorithm will assume to be in the occupied state. For more
information on Time Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules
Note: Use the same Time Schedule for all algorithms that contain a com-
mon air handler.
Outside Air Temp

ture to the algorithm.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
NTFC Algorithm
Use this decision to identify the NTFC w Enthalpy Check algorithm name that
linkage uses to determine if the air handler unit is in the Night Time Free
Cooling (NTFC) operating mode.
Heating Algorithm
Use this decision to identify the AO—Heating VAV algorithm name that
Linkage uses to determine if the air handler is in the morning warm-up or
occupied heating mode.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = HCVAVxx
Default Value HCVAV00
451
LINK_xxC
Function Type 303
Supply Air Temp


LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Fan Status

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

Adaptive Optimal Stop allows the temperature of the occupied space to drift to
the expanded occupied setpoints during the last portion of the occupied time.
AO Stop Enable
Use this decision to specify if Adaptive Optimal Stop will be performed.

Maximum Stop Time

Use this decision to specify the maximum number of minutes that the
expanded occupied setpoints can be used prior to the controlled space
becoming unoccupied.

Default Value 60
452
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
Setpoint Bias
Use this decision to enter the number of degrees that are applied to
expand the occupied setpoints during Adaptive Optimal Stop.

Power on Delay

Default Value 0
Evacuation
Use this decision to specify the discrete point that indicates when the air han-
dler is in evacuation mode.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Pressurization
Use this decision to specify the discrete point that indicates when the air han-
dler is in pressurization mode.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Maintenance Setpoint Bias

Decisions This decision displays the percentage adjustment value of the T56 Slider Bias.
453
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303

Adaptive Optimal Start is used to bring comfort conditions to prescribed levels
by the beginning of the next occupied period.
Start Bias
This decision displays the adjustment value, in minutes, for the Adap-
tive Optimal Start routine.
Start Cool K Factor

This decision displays the time difference, in minutes per degree of
error, between the time the cooling setpoint was achieved and when it
should have been achieved.
Start Heat K Factor

This decision displays the time difference, in minutes per degree of
error, between the time the heating setpoint was achieved and when it
should have been achieved.
Biased Start Day

This decision displays the day of the week that the next biased start
time will occur.
Biased Start Time

This decision displays the time of day that the next biased start will
occur. This value is determined by subtracting the calculated start time
bias from the next configured occupied time.
LID = 00.00 to 23.59
454
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
Biased Occupied
This decision is used to indicate when the Time Schedule is currently in
an occupied state due to Adaptive Optimal Start/Stop.
For example, if a Time Schedule has a normal occupied time of 0800
and Adaptive Optimal Start has calculated a start time offset of 15
minutes, Biased Occupied will be noted at 0745.
Cool Flag
This decision is used by the Adaptive Optimal Start routine to indicate
cooling mode.
True = Cooling mode

Occupied ?
data in the backup Time Schedule that will be used in the event that linkage
fails. If a Time Schedule has not been selected, the default mode will be
occupied.
Outside Air Temp

this algorithm.
455
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
Linkage Time Schedule

Linkage Time Schedule displays the Time Schedule information as configured
and used by the Adaptive Optimal Start and Stop routines.
Mode
This decision displays the current occupancy mode from Adaptive
Optimal Start.
Valid Display 0 = Unoccupied 1 = Occupied
Biased Occupied
This decision identifies when a biased occupancy condition exists.
Valid Display 0 = Not in effect 1 = Biased Occupied in effect
Next Occupied Day

This decision displays the day of the week on which the next occupied
period will occur.
Next Occupied Time

This decision displays the time of day when the next occupied period
will occur.
LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Next Unoccupied Day

This decision displays the day of the week on which the next unoccu-
pied period will occur.
456
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303

This decision displays the time of day when the next unoccupied period
will occur.
LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Last Unoccupied Day

This decision displays the day of the week on which the last unoccupied
period occurred.

This decision displays the time of day when the last unoccupied period
occurred.
LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Status
This decision displays the current status of the AOSS Time Schedule.
Valid Display 0 = Time Schedule found
1 = Time Schedule not found
Override is set
This decision identifies when the Time Schedule has been overridden
from an unoccupied state to an occupied state.
Valid Display 0 = Override not in effect
1 = Override in effect
Linkage Setpoint Schedule

Linkage Setpt Schedule displays information about the Setpoint Schedule
provided by Linkage for use by the air handler.
457
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
This decision displays the occupied low setpoint value used by any
algorithm configured to use this Linkage Setpoint Schedule. The
setpoint value is dependent on the state of the communications between
the Linkage Supervisory and Equipment parts. If the communications
is normal, this value will be the value transmitted by the Linkage
Supervisory part from the Terminal System Manager (TSM). If com-
munications has been disrupted, the value will be determined from the
locally defined Setpoint Schedule and, if configured, the AOSS Sched-
ule algorithm.
This decision displays the occupied high setpoint value used by any
setpoint value is dependent on the state of the communications between
the Linkage Supervisory and Equipment parts. If the communications
is normal, this value will be the value transmitted by the Linkage
Supervisory part from the Terminal System Manager (TSM). If com-
munications has been disrupted, the value will be determined from the
locally defined Setpoint Schedule and, if configured, the AOSS Sched-
ule algorithm.
This decision displays the unoccupied low setpoint value used by any
setpoint value is not dependent on the state of the communications
between the Linkage Supervisory and Equipment Part from the Termi-
nal System Manager (TSM). The value will be determined from the
locally defined Setpoint Schedule and if configured, the AOSS Schedule
algorithm.
458
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
This decision displays the unoccupied high setpoint value used by any
algorithm configured to use this Linkage Setpoint Schedule. The setpoint
value is not dependent on the state of the communications between the
Linkage Supervisory and Equipment Part from the Terminal System Man-
ager (TSM). The value will be determined from the locally defined Setpoint
Schedule and if configured, the AOSS Schedule algorithm.
Linkage Space Temp

This decision displays the space temperature value used by any algorithm config-
ured to use this Linkage Space Temp. The value is dependent on the state of the
communications between the Linkage Supervisory and Equipment parts. If the
communications is normal, this value will be the value transmitted by the Linkage
Supervisory part, specifically AZT or AOZT from the Terminal System Manager
(TSM). If communications have been disrupted, the value will be determined from
the locally defined Sensor Group.
Supply Air Temp

This decision displays the value of the air handler’s supply air temperature.
Fan Status
This decision displays the status of the air handler’s supply fan.
Valid Display On / Off
Air Side Linkage

Air Side Linkage provides current linkage information such as linkage status,
supervisory bus, element, and block numbers, average setpoints, and average zone
temperatures.
459
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
Linkage Status
This decision displays the current status of the Linkage routine.
Valid Display 0 = normal communication

1 = communication failure
2 = Linkage routine not configured
3 = change in communication status between
Supervisory and Equipment parts of Linkage
Supervisory Element
This decision displays the element number of the system element TSM
(Terminal System Manager) containing the Linkage Supervisory Part
that supplies data to this air source
Valid Display 0 = no Linkage Supervisory Part

1 to 239
Supervisory Bus
This decision displays the bus number of the system element TSM
(Terminal System Manager) containing the Linkage Supervisory Part
that supplies data to this air source
Supervisory Block No.

This decision indicates the Linkage air source number of this unit for
diagnostic purposes only.
Valid Display 3 to 6 (where 3 = Air Source 1,

and 6 = Air Source 4)
460
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
Avg Occ Heat Setpoint

This decision displays the average occupied heating setpoint of all the
temperature zones served by this air source. This value is computed by
the Linkage Supervisory Part in the Terminal System Manager (TSM)
and communicated to the air source. The Comfort Controller algo-
rithms use this value as the setpoint for its algorithms instead of its own
configured setpoint when Linkage is active. When Linkage is not
active, the unit will use its configured setpoint.
Avg Occ Cool Setpoint

This decision displays the average occupied cooling setpoint of all the
Avg Unocc Heat Setpoint

This decision displays the average unoccupied heating setpoint of all the
Valid Display 0.0 to 99.9°F (18.0 to 37.7°F)
461
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
Avg Unocc Cool Setpoint

This decision displays the average unoccupied cooling setpoint of all the
temperature zones served by this air source. This value is computed by the
Linkage Supervisory Part in the Terminal System Manager (TSM) and
communicated to the air source. The Comfort Controller algorithms use
this value as the setpoint for its algorithms instead of its own configured
setpoint when Linkage is active. When Linkage is not active, the unit will
use its configured setpoint.
Avg Zone Temperature

This decision displays the current average zone temperature of all tempera-
ture zones served by this air source. This value is computed by the Linkage
Supervisory Part in the Terminal System Manager (TSM) and communi-
cated to the air source. The Comfort Controller algorithms use this value as
the space temperature for its algorithms instead of its own configured space
temperature when Linkage is active. When Linkage is not active, the unit
will use its configured setpoint.
Avg Occ Zone Temp

This decision displays the current average zone temperature of all tempera-
ture zones served by this air source that are currently in the occupied mode.
This value is computed by the Linkage Supervisory Part and communicated
to the air source. The Comfort Controller algorithms use this value as the
space temperature for its algorithms instead of its own configured space
temperature when Linkage is active. When Linkage is not active, the unit
will use its local sensor.

Adaptive Optimal Stop is used to save energy by relaxing the setpoint restric-
tions toward the end of an occupied period.
462
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
Stop Bias
This decision displays the adjustment value, in minutes, for the Adaptive
Optimal Stop routine.
Stop Cool K Factor

This decision displays the value of the optimal Stop Cool K Factor cur-
rently being used by the algorithm. This value is multiplied times the space
temperature error to create the stop time bias for cooling. This value
represents minutes of optimal stop per degree of error.
Stop Heat K Factor

This decision displays the value of the optimal Stop Heat K Factor currently
being used by the algorithm. This value is multiplied times the space
temperature error to create the stop time bias for heating. This value repre-
sents minutes of optimal stop per degree of error.
Biased Low Setpoint

This decision displays the adjusted Occupied Lo Setpoint that will be used
when Biased Stop Day and Biased Stop Time are reached. This value will
be used until unoccupied time is reached.

This decision displays the adjusted Occupied Hi Setpoint that will be used
when Biased Stop Day and Biased Stop Time are reached. This value will
be used until unoccupied time is reached.
463
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
Biased Stop
This decision is used to indicate when the algorithms are
controlling to the Biased Low and Biased High Setpoints
during Adaptive Optimal Stop.
Cool Flag
This decision is used by the Adaptive Optimal Stop to
indicate whether the equipment being controlled is currently
in a heating or cooling mode.
True = Cooling mode
Biased Stop Day

This decision displays the day of the week that the next
Biased Stop will occur.
Valid Display Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Sat, Sun
Biased Stop Time

This decision displays the time of day that the next Biased
Stop will occur. This value is determined by subtracting the
calculated stop time bias from the next configured unoccu-
pied time.

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Task Timer
This decision displays the number of remaining seconds before the
next execution of this algorithm. This algorithm executes every 30
seconds.
464
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
Evacuation
This decision displays the status of the air handler’s evacuation
mode indicator. When True the mode returned to the Terminal
System Manager is evacuation.
Valid Display True = In evacuation mode

False = Not in evacuation mode
Pressurization
This decision displays the status of the air handler’s pressurization
mode indicator. When True the mode returned to the Terminal
System Manager is pressurization.
Valid Display True = In pressurization mode

False = Not in pressurization mode
465
NTFC w Enthalpy Check
NTFC_xxC
Function Type 304
The NTFC (Night Time Free Cooling) w Enthalpy Check algorithm

NTFC w Enthalpy enables an air handler to cool the space during unoccupied hours
Check (from 12 a.m. to 7 a.m.) if the outside air is suitable. This global
algorithm starts the fans on cool summer nights to pre-cool the
structure by using only outside air, thus minimizing the need for
mechanical cooling during occupied hours. Once the space is
sufficiently cooled, the algorithm stops the fans.
Note: NTFC can only be performed by air handlers equipped
with mixed air dampers, at least one space temperature
sensor, and an outside air temperature sensor.
NTFC w Enthalpy Check must be used in conjunction with either
the AO—Mixed Air Damper CV or AO—Mixed Air Damper VAV
algorithm, and DO—Timeclock with Check algorithm to ensure that
both the fan is activated and the dampers are open.
Typical Application To delay the need for mechanical cooling, you can use this algo-
rithm to cool a building prior to it being occupied.
optional.
* Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
Night Time Free Cooling
NTFC Enable
NTFC Start Time AM
Minimum OAT
Maximum OAT
NTFC Delta Temperature
Return Air Humidity
Enthalpy Switch
Enthalpy Comparison
Default OA Enthalpy
Default RA Enthalpy
Maximum OA Enthalpy
Power on Delay
466
NTFC_xxC
Function Type 304


Occupied ?
* Outside Air Humidity
* Outside Air Dewpoint
* Enthalpy Switch
Enthalpy Comparison
Reference Output
OA Enthalpy
RA Enthalpy
OAT > RAT ?
NTFC Active ?
Outside Enthalpy Good ?
NTFC Setpoint
Task Timer
467
468
Figure 5-33
NTFC_xxC

Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor Night Time Free Cool
Function Type 304
TS Override Sensor Input (Space)

Status
High NTFC Active
Low Disable Output
Input
Average Status
Force
Time Schedule Output
Occupancy Occupancy State? Setpoint
Next Occ Time Next Occ Time NTFC Setpoint
Output
Setpoint Schedule Input
Status
Low Setpoint Occ Low Setpoint Force
Bias Input
High Setpoint Occ High Setpoint
Occupancy State?
Occupied
Occupied
Sensor Input (OAT)
Outside Air Temperature Enthalpy Comparison

Output OAT
Enthalpy Check
Status OAT Status
Force Status
Return Air Temperature Enthalpy Switch

Output RAT Force Status
Status RAT Status Output
Force Status OR
Enthalpy Check
Output OARH OAT > RAT
Status OARH Status
Force Status

Output Dewpoint Outside Enthalpy Good?
Status Dewpoint Status Output
Input
Force Status Status
Force
Return Air Humidity

Output RARH
Status RARH Status
Force Status
NTFC_xxC
Function Type 304

Note: Use the same Sensor Group/SPT Sensor for all algorithms that control
Time Schedule
air handler.

Setpoint Schedule

469
NTFC_xxC
Function Type 304
Night Time Free Cool

Night Time Free Cool calculates the space temperature setpoint during unoccu-
pied hours to see if the outside air is suitable for cooling the space.
NTFC Enable
Use this decision to enable Night Time Free Cooling. The space tem-
perature setpoint is still calculated, whether or not this decision is
enabled. The space temperature setpoint is a linear interpolation be-
tween the low and high space temperature setpoints from the Minimum
OAT to the Maximum OAT.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = Dsable/Enable

Default Value Dsable
NTFC Start Time AM

Use this decision to specify the hour after midnight at which NTFC
goes into effect.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = 0 to 7

Default Value 3
Minimum OAT
Use this decision to specify the lowest Outside Air Temperature that
can be used to condition the space. The calculated setpoint is equal to
the occupied low setpoint when the Outside Air Temperature is less
than or equal to the value entered in this decision, and is reset up to the
occupied high setpoint as the Outside Air Temperature approaches
Maximum OAT.

470
NTFC_xxC
Function Type 304
Maximum OAT
Use this decision to specify the highest Outside Air Temperature that
can be used to condition the space. The calculated setpoint is equal to
the occupied high setpoint when the Outside Air Temperature is greater
than or equal to the value entered in this decision. The calculated
setpoint is reset to the occupied low setpoint as the Outside Air Tem-
perature approaches Minimum OAT.

NTFC Delta Temperature

Use this decision to specify how many degrees lower than the space
temperature the Outside Air Temperature must be before outside air is
used to cool the space.


ture to the algorithm. If you want to reset the space temperature based on the
Outside Air Temperature, you must configure this decision.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

Use this decision to specify the AI point that provides the return air tempera-
ture to this algorithm.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
471
NTFC_xxC
Function Type 304

If you enable Night Time Free Cooling, use this decision to specify the AI point
that provides the outside air humidity to the algorithm. The algorithm can use a
humidity or dewpoint sensor. If neither are available, the system will use the
configured default outside air enthalpy.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Return Air Humidity

Use this decision to specify the AI point that provides the relative humidity of
the return air to this algorithm. If the AI point is not configured, the algorithm
uses the value in the Default RA Enthalpy decision.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

If you enable Night Time Free Cooling, use this decision to specify the AI point
that provides the outside air dewpoint to the algorithm. The algorithm can use a
humidity or dewpoint sensor. If neither are available, the algorithm will use the
configured outside air enthalpy.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Enthalpy Switch
Instead of computing the outside air enthalpy and return air enthalpy, use this
decision to specify a discrete point that indicates if the outside air is suitable for
cooling. If enthalpy switch is used, Default OA Enthalpy should be configured
as 50, and Default RA Enthalpy as 10.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
472
NTFC_xxM
Function Type 304
Enthalpy Comparison
Enthalpy Comparison calculates the heat content of outside air and return air.
It determines if the outside air is suitable for conditioning the space.
Default OA Enthalpy
If Outside Air Humidity and Outside Air Dewpoint sensors are not
available, use this decision to specify the outside air enthalpy that
Return Air Humidity must exceed.

Default Value 10
Default RA Enthalpy
If a Return Air Humidity sensor is not available, use this decision to
specify the return air enthalpy that the Outside Air cannot exceed.

Default Value 50
Maximum OA Enthalpy
Use this decision to specify the maximum outside air enthalpy that the
algorithm can use to condition the space.

Default Value 30
Power on Delay
wait to activate this system function after a power restart occurs.

Default Value 0
473
NTFC_xxM
Function Type 304
Maintenance Sensor Group/SPT Sensor

Decisions This decision displays the value of the single AI sensor or the average of the
Occupied ?
data in the Time Schedule. If a Time Schedule has not been selected, the
default mode will be occupied.

this algorithm.

This decision displays the value of the return air temperature being used by this
algorithm.

This decision displays the value of the outside air humidity being used by this
algorithm.
Valid Display 0.00 to 100.00% Rh
Return Air Humidity

This decision displays the value of the return air humidity being used by this
algorithm.
Valid Display 0.00 to 100.00% Rh
474
NTFC_xxM
Function Type 304

This decision displays the value of the outside air dewpoint being used by this
algorithm.
Enthalpy Switch
This decision indicates if the outside air is currently suitable for cooling. When
this value is On, the outside air is suitable for cooling.
Enthalpy Comparison
Enthalpy Comparison determines if outside air can be used for conditioning the
space, based on enthalpy content of the outside and return air.
Reference Output
This decision displays the result of the enthalpy comparison, which
indicates if using outside air is suitable at this time.
OA Enthalpy
This decision displays the value of the enthalpy of the outside air
expressed in units of BTU/lb.
RA Enthalpy
This decision displays the value of the enthalpy of the return air ex-
pressed in units of BTU/lb.
OAT > RAT ?

This decision indicates if the outside air temperature is greater than the
return air temperature. If the outside air temperature is greater, the
OAT will be deemed not suitable for cooling.
475
NTFC_xxM
Function Type 304
NTFC Active?
This decision indicates whether the NTFC w Enthalpy Check
algorithm is active.

This decision indicates whether or not outside air can be used, if
desired. If this value is No, the damper is maintained at its config-
ured minimum position.
NTFC Setpoint
This decision displays the configured high setpoint value from the
NTFC w Enthalpy Check algorithm.
Task Timer
This decision displays the number of remaining seconds before this
algorithm executes again. This algorithm will execute every 30
seconds.
476
Occupancy
OCCPCxxC
Function Type 305
This global algorithm provides the occupied and unoccupied periods

Occupancy for the devices controlled by the Comfort Controller.
For more information on Occupancy, refer to Time Schedules in the

How to Configure Schedules chapter of this manual.
477
Sensor Group
SNSGRxxC
Function Type 306
This global algorithm provides the input of up to six sensors to

Sensor Group many AO and DO algorithms. Examples of sensor input are tem-
perature, humidity, and milliamps. For a complete list of possible
sensor input, refer to Appendix C.
The Sensor Group can provide an algorithm with the highest sensor
input, lowest sensor input, or the computed average sensor value.
For example, the AO—Cooling CV algorithm controls to the high-
est space temperature reading in the Sensor Group/SPT Sensor.
The sensors in a Sensor Group must be of the same type. If an

application requires input from more than one type of sensor, you
must configure separate Sensor Groups.
Sensors with invalid status will be ignored. If the status of all input
sensors are invalid, the Sensor Group status will be invalid.
A Sensor Group contains three software variables used to provide

the high, low, and average sensor values from a group of sensors.
You can enter these software variable names in any analog sensor
input configuration decision. To obtain the highest sensor reading,
you must enter SGHIxx (where xx is the function number of the
Sensor Group) in the desired algorithm’s analog sensor input deci-
sion, i.e., Sensor Group/SPT Sensor. To obtain the lowest sensor
reading, you must enter SGLOxx . To obtain the average sensor
reading, you must enter SGAVGxx. This needs to be done only if
the default value from the sensor group used by the selected algo-
rithm is not desired.
Typical Application A Sensor Group can be used to provide the low sensor value from a
group of up to six sensors.
478
Sensor Group
SNSGRxxC
Function Type 306
optional.
* 1st Sensor
2nd Sensor
3rd Sensor
4th Sensor
5th Sensor
6th Sensor
Power on Delay

* 1st Sensor
* 2nd Sensor
* 3rd Sensor
* 4th Sensor
* 5th Sensor
* 6th Sensor
Sensor Group Low
Sensor Group High
Sensor Group Average
Task Timer
479
480
Figure 5-34
SNSGRxxC
Sensor Group
Sensor Group
Function Type 306
1st Sensor Input Select

Status Sensor Status Sensor Group
Force Average
Input
Status
2nd Sensor
Output Sensor Input (2) Average Sensor Group
Status Sensor Status Low
Low Input
Force
Status
High
3rd Sensor Sensor Group
Status High
Output Sensor Input (3) Input
Status Sensor Status TS Override Status
Force
4th Sensor
Status Sensor Status
Force
5th Sensor
Force
6th Sensor
Force
Sensor Group
SNSGRxxM
Function Type 306
1st Sensor
Use this decision to specify the first analog point that is providing sensor input.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
2nd Sensor
Use this decision to specify the second analog point that is providing sensor input.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
3rd Sensor
Use this decision to specify the third analog point that is providing sensor input.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
4th Sensor
Use this decision to specify the fourth analog point that is providing sensor input.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
5th Sensor
Use this decision to specify the fifth analog point that is providing sensor input.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
481
Sensor Group
SNSGRxxM
Function Type 306
6th Sensor
Use this decision to specify the sixth analog point that is providing sensor
input.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Power on Delay
Default Value 0
Maintenance 1st Sensor

Decisions This decision displays the current value of the first sensor in the configured
Sensor Group.
2nd Sensor
This decision displays the current value of the second sensor in the configured
Sensor Group.
3rd Sensor
This decision displays the current value of the third sensor in the configured
Sensor Group.
4th Sensor
This decision displays the current value of the fourth sensor in the configured
Sensor Group.
482
Sensor Group
SNSGRxxC
Function Type 306
5th Sensor
This decision displays the current value of the fifth sensor in the
configured Sensor Group.
6th Sensor
This decision displays the current value of the sixth sensor in the
configured Sensor Group.
Sensor Group Low

This decision displays the lowest value of the configured sensors,
excluding any sensors with an invalid status.
Sensor Group High

This decision displays the highest value of the configured sensors,
Sensor Group Average

This decision displays the average value of the configured sensors,
Task Timer
seconds.
483
WSM Air Source
WSMAIxxC
Function Type 307
This global algorithm gives the Comfort Controller the capability to

WSM Air Source gather data such as occupancy status and cooling and heating coil
valve positions, and then process the data for reception by Carrier’s
Water System Manager (WSM).
For more information on WSM, refer to the Water System Manager

Configuration Manual.
optional.
* Time Schedule
Power on Delay

Occupied ?
WSM Load Equipment
Cooling Link Active ?
Heating Link Active ?
Cool_Source Number
Heat_Source Number
Occupancy Status
Chilled Water Temp
Cool Source Status
Hot Water Temp
Heat Source Status
Task Timer
484
WSM Air Source
WSMAIxxM
Function Type 307
Configuration Time Schedule

Decisions You must configure this decision to specify the Time Schedule that determines
the occupancy state for the air handler. For more information on Time Sched-
ules, refer to How to Configure Schedules section in this manual.

Cooling Coil Valve

You must configure this decision to specify the AO point name that is control-
ling the air handler’s chilled water valve. The unit type of the valve must be 0
- 100%.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value CCV
Heating Coil Valve

You must configure this decision to specify the AO point name that is control-
ling the air handler’s hot water valve. The unit type of the valve must be 0 -
100%.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value HCV
Power on Delay
must wait to activate this system function after a power restart occurs.

Default Value 0
485
WSM Air Source
WSMAIxxM
Function Type 307
Maintenance Occupied ?
Decisions This decision displays the current occupancy status based upon the configured
Cooling Coil Valve

This decision displays the output value of the AO point being used to control
the cooling coil. This value is expressed as a percentage of full capacity.
Heating Coil Valve

This decision displays the output value of the AO point being used to control
the heating coil. This value is expressed as a percentage of full capacity.
WSM Load Equipment

WSM Load Equipment provides current WSM linkage information.
Cooling Link Active ?

This decision displays the status of communications between this load and
the cool source with which it is linked.
Yes indicates that the WSM Supervisory Part is successfully transmitting

information to this load from a linked, configured cool source.
No indicates one of the following conditions: the WSM’s algorithms are

disabled, the WSM Supervisory Part Load Configuration Table is
misconfigured, or communications have failed (Comfort Controller data
has not been received from the WSM within the past five minutes). When
No is displayed here, the remaining decisions in this table continue to
display the last valid data.
486
WSM Air Source
WSMAIxxM
Function Type 307
Heating Link Active ?

This decision displays the status of communications between this load and
the heat source with which it is linked.
Yes indicates that the WSM Supervisory Part is successfully transmitting

information to this load from a linked, configured heat source.
No indicates one of the following conditions: the WSM’s algorithms are

disabled, the WSM Supervisory Part Load Configuration Table is
misconfigured, or communications have failed (heat source data has not
been received from the WSM within the past five minutes). When No is
displayed here, the remaining decisions in this table continue to display the
last valid data.
Cool_Source Number
This decision displays the element number of the cool source that is linked
to this load by a WSM. Cool source numbers are determined by the num-
ber of the associated Cool Source Configuration Table at the WSM.
0 indicates that a cool source is not configured for this load at the WSM.
Valid Display 0 = no cool source configured

1 to 4 = cool source numbers
Heat_Source Number
This decision displays the element number of the heat source that is linked
to this load by a WSM. Heat source numbers are determined by the num-
ber of the associated Heat Source Configuration Table at the WSM.
0 indicates that a heat source is not configured for this load at the WSM.
Valid Display 0 = no heat source configured

1 to 4 = heat source numbers
487
WSM Air Source
WSMAIxxM
Function Type 307
Occupancy Status
This decision displays the current occupancy status of this load.
0 indicates that this load’s Time Schedule is in the unoccupied mode.

1 indicates that this load’s Time Schedule is in the occupied mode (or
biased occupied).
Valid Display 0 = unoccupied

1 = occupied (or biased occupied)
Chilled Water Temp

This decision displays the current leaving chilled water temperature. The
value 0.0°F (-17.8°C) indicates that a cool source is not configured for this
load at the WSM.
Cool Source Status

This decision displays the current status of the cool source that is linked to
this load by a WSM.
Dsable indicates that either the cool source is off or that no cool source is
configured for this load at the WSM.
Valid Display Enable/Dsable
Hot Water Temp

This decision displays the current leaving hot water temperature at the heat
source that is linked to this load by a WSM. The value 0.0°F (-17.8°C)
indicates that a heat source is not configured for this load at the WSM.
488
WSM Air Source
WSMAIxxM
Function Type 307
Heat Source Status

This decision displays the current status of the heat source that is
linked to this load by a WSM.
Dsable indicates that either the cool source is off or that no heat
source is configured for this load at the WSM.
Valid Display Enable/Dsable
Task Timer
seconds.
489
WSM Cool
WSMCOxxC
Function Type 308
This global algorithm gives the Comfort Controller the capability to

WSM Cool Source receive commands from Carrier’s Water System Manager (WSM)
in order to regulate the flow of chilled water. The Comfort Con-
troller is the cool source for the WSM. The WSM provides linking
functions so that Comfort Controller cool source operation can be
enabled and disabled in response to cooling demand, occupancy
status, or both. The WSM can also supply reset values to adjust
setpoints in the water cooling equipment.
For more information on WSM, refer to the Water System Manager

Configuration Manual.
optional.
* Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
* Chilled Water Temp
* Chiller Status
* Chilled Water Setpoint
* Chiller Start/Stop
Power on Delay

Decisions this algorithm. They provide useful information regarding the
status and configuration of this algorithm.
Occupied ?
* Chilled Water Temp
* Chiller Status
* Chilled Water Setpoint
* Chiller Start/Stop
WSM Chiller Equipment
WSM Active ?
Chilled Water Temp
Equipment Status
Commanded State
CHW Setpt Reset Value
Current CHW Setpoint
Task Timer
490
WSM Cool
WSMCOxxM
Function Type 308
Configuration Time Schedule

Decisions You must configure this decision to specify the Time Schedule that determines the
occupancy state. For more information on Time Schedules, refer to the How to
Configure Schedules chapter of this manual.

Setpoint Schedule

Chilled Water Temp

You must configure this decision to specify the AI point name that provides the
chilled water temperature.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value CHW
Chiller Status
You must configure this decision to specify the DI point name that provides the
chiller status.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value CHLRSTAT
491
WSM Cool
WSMCOxxM
Function Type 308
Chilled Water Setpoint

You must configure this decision to specify the AI point name that will be used
to provide a chilled water setpoint.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value CHWSET
Chiller Start/Stop
You must configure this decision to specify the DO point name that will be
used to provide a start/stop control.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value CHLRSTST
Power on Delay

Default Value 0
Maintenance Occupied ?
Decisions This decision displays whether the current mode is occupied. If a Time Sched-
ule has not been selected, then the default mode will be Occupied and Yes will
be displayed.
Chilled Water Temp

This decision displays the value of the chilled water temperature being moni-
tored.
492
WSM Cool
WSMCOxxM
Function Type 308
Chiller Status
This decision displays the actual state of the cooling source being
monitored.
Valid Display Off/On
Chilled Water Setpoint

This decision indicates the value of the chilled water setpoint re-
turned from the Water System Manager.
Chiller Start/Stop
This decision indicates the commanded state being returned from
the Water System Manager.
WSM Chiller Equipment

WSM Chiller Equipment provides current WSM linkage information.
WSM Active?
This decision displays the status of WSM algorithms and of
communications between this cool source and a Water
System Manager (WSM).
No indicates that one of the following is true:
• WSM is not present or WSM Program Status is disabled.
• Communications with WSM failed (an alarm is generated).
493
WSM Cool
WSMCOxxM
Function Type 308
Chilled Water Temp

This decision displays the current chilled water temperature. The
value 0.0°F (-17.8°C) indicates that the chilled water temperature
cannot be read, (for example, in the event of a sensor failure).
Equipment Status
This decision displays the current status of this cool source.
Commanded State
This decision displays the current commanded state sent by the
WSM. A blank indicates that the WSM is not determining a
commanded state.
Valid Display Enable/Disable/(blank)
CHW Setpt Reset Value

This decision displays the current CHW Setpoint Reset Value,
the number of degrees that are added to the configured chilled
water setpoint to produce the current Chilled Water Setpoint.
Current CHW Setpoint

This decision displays the current chilled water setpoint (the
configured chilled water setpoint plus the CHW Setpoint Reset
Value), as determined by the WSM.
Task Timer
seconds.
494
How To Configure
Schedules
How To
Configure
Schedules
This section provides the following information for each schedule:
Overview
• Purpose
able entries and default values
Definition of a A schedule provides algorithms and custom programs created in

Schedule BEST++ with occupancy status or setpoints. A schedule is a shared
resource, which means that you can assign the same schedule to
more than one algorithm or custom program. Typically, you should
assign all algorithms or custom programs serving a common air
handler system or building space to the same schedules. For ex-
ample, three algorithms may use the same Time Schedule and
Setpoint Schedule.
For easy reference, the schedules are presented alphabetically in this

manual, as follows:
Holiday
Network Time
Setpoint
Time (Occupancy)
495
Holiday Schedule
HOLDYxxS
A Holiday Schedule gives you the capability to specify days of the

Holiday Schedule year (holidays) on which the Comfort Controller’s algorithms and
custom programs will operate according to time period(s) that differ
from other time periods, as configured in a Time Schedule(s). To
indicate to the Comfort Controller that you want it to recognize a
day of the week as a holiday, you enter a 1 in the holiday (H) col-
umn of a Time Schedule and configure occupied and unoccupied
times for the holiday. Then, you configure one Holiday Schedule
for every holiday you want the Comfort Controller to recognize. In
the Holiday Schedule, you configure the month and day on which
the schedule will go into effect, and how many days the schedule
will be in effect.
You can configure 16 Holiday Schedules (HOLDYxxS Table).

Therefore, the Comfort Controller can recognize 16 holidays.
Note: You can define a holiday to last for more than one day.
For example, you can configure a five-day vacation period
as one holiday by entering the appropriate month, the day
on which the holiday will begin, and the duration of the
holiday as five consecutive days.
For more information on Time Schedules, refer to the topic Time

Schedules, which appears later in this chapter.
Note: You must configure holidays in only one system element

on a CCN. That system element must be the time and date
broadcaster. If the Comfort Controller is the broadcaster,
it will send the holiday status to all the other system
elements on the CCN. If the Comfort Controller is not the
time and date broadcaster, do not configure any holidays.
The time and date broadcaster on your CCN is responsible
for sending the holiday status to the Comfort Controller.
Typical Application You can use a Holiday Schedule to have the Comfort Controller
control to unoccupied times that differ from the other unoccupied
periods in a Time Schedule. For example, on Thanksgiving the
building could be unoccupied for the entire day.
496
Holiday Schedule
HOLDYxxS
List of Configuration The following decisions are applicable to this schedule. You must
Decisions configure the asterisked decisions
* Start Month
* Start Day
* Duration
Configuration Decisions Start Month

You must configure this decision to indicate the month in which the
holiday will begin.
Default Value 1
Start Day
You must configure this decision to indicate the day of the month on
which the holiday will begin.
Default Value 1
Duration
You must configure this decision to indicate how many consecutive
days the holiday will last. If you enter 0 in this decision, the Com-
fort Controller will disable this schedule.

Default Value 0
497
Network Time Schedule
OCCPCxxE
A Network Time Schedule allows the Occupancy Schedule in an

Network Time external device to control the Comfort Controller's occupancy state.
Schedule
Each time the Occupancy Schedule changes from occupied to unoc-
cupied, or visa-versa, the controlling Occupancy Schedule
(OCCPCxxS, where xx is a number greater than or equal to 65)
broadcasts an occupancy flag over the CCN to any Comfort Control-
ler that has OCCPCxxE, where xx is the same number in both sched-
ules, as its Network Time Schedule name. To receive a broadcast
occupancy flag, you must create a Network Time Schedule.
You can configure up to 16 Network Time Schedules. The Comfort

Controller will automatically and sequentially name them
OCCPC65E to OCCPC81E, however, you can use the Building
Supervisor or Network Service Tool to Modify the Names so that
they range from OCCPC65E to OCCPC99E.
For information on setting up the Comfort Controller to broadcast the

occupancy state to other CCN system elements, refer to Time Sched-
ules in the How to Configure Schedules chapter of this manual.
498
Setpoint Schedule
SETPTxx
A Setpoint Schedule gives you the capability to configure the limits

Setpoint Schedule (setpoints) to which analog signals are controlled. You configure two
sets of setpoints:
• high and low setpoints for occupied times
• high and low setpoints for unoccupied times
For space temperature control, the high setpoints are typically associ-
ated with the cooling cycle, which means that when the space tem-
perature exceeds the high setpoint, the air handler will perform cool-
ing. The low setpoints are typically associated with the heating cycle,
which means that when the space temperature falls below the low
setpoint, the air handler will perform heating.
When you create the schedule, you indicate which engineering units a
Setpoint Schedule will use. Refer to Appendix C for a list of the
engineering units and the conversion limits.
You can configure up to 16 Setpoint Schedules (SETPTxx Table) in a

Comfort Controller. There is no limit to the number of algorithms
that can use the same Setpoint Schedule. In general, you should
assign the same Setpoint Schedule to all algorithms that control a
common air handler or space. The allowable entries for the Setpoint
Schedule depend on the engineering units you assigned in the
SETPTDEF Table.
A Setpoint Schedule uses a Time Schedule to determine whether to

use occupied or unoccupied setpoints. If you do not configure an
associated Time Schedule, the Setpoint Schedule will use the occu-
pied setpoints.
A Setpoint Schedule has the capability to adjust the setpoints cur-

rently being used based on the bias signal from a T56 Space Tempera-
ture Sensor. Based on the bias input, the Setpoint Schedule adjusts
(expands) the high and low setpoint upward or downward, but not
past the value you enter in the Setpoint Offset decisions.
Typical Application You can use one Setpoint Schedule for all the algorithms that are
associated with the same air handler and that define the space tem-
perature setpoints for the same space.
499
Setpoint Schedule
SETPTxx
List of Configuration The following decisions are applicable to this schedule. You must
* Occupied Low Setpoint
* Occupied High Setpoint
* Unoccupied Low Setpoint
* Unoccupied High Setpoint
Configuration Occupied Low Setpoint

Decisions You must configure this decision to indicate the low setpoint for
occupied times when offset is not in effect. When algorithms
control space temperatures, they use this setpoint as the heating
setpoint.
Allowable Entries Valid range based on selected display units.
Default Value 68.00

You must configure this decision to indicate the high setpoint for
occupied times when offset is not in effect. When algorithms
control space temperatures, they use this setpoint as the cooling
setpoint.
Default Value 72.00
Unoccupied Low Setpoint

You must configure this decision to indicate the low setpoint for
unoccupied times when offset is not in effect. When algorithms
control space temperatures, they use this setpoint as the heating
setpoint.
Default Value 55.00
Unoccupied High Setpoint

You must configure this decision to indicate the high setpoint for
unoccupied times when offset is not in effect. When algorithms
control space temperatures, they use this setpoint as the cooling
setpoint.
Default Value 85.00
500
Time Schedule
OCCPCxxC
Function Type 305
A Time Schedule gives you the capability to define the occupied and
Time Schedule unoccupied periods for devices controlled by the Comfort Controller.
Each Time Schedule is divided into eight separate days—Monday
through Sunday and holiday. Within each schedule, you can configure
eight separate occupied and unoccupied periods. You enter occupied
and unoccupied periods in military format, where 00:00 is the begin-
ning of any 24-hour day and 24:00 is the end of any 24-hour day.
You can override (extend) a time period in three ways:
• by commanding a manual override of 1 to 4 hours
• by pressing and holding the override button on a T-55 or T-56
Space Temperature Sensor with Override for 1 to 5 seconds during
unoccupied hours
• by closing a Latched Discrete Input point.
The Tenant Billing Option tracks the number and duration of the
overrides and then generates a bill. For more information on the Ten-
ant Billing Option, refer to Tenant Billing Option Overview and Con-
figuration Manual.
There is no limit to the number of algorithms that can use the same
Time Schedule. In general, you should assign the same Time Schedule
to all algorithms that control a single air handler or building space.
To set up the Comfort Controller 6400 to control the occupancy state of
other system elements on the CCN, name the Comfort Controller's
Time Schedule OCCPCxxS, where xx is a number greater than or equal
to 65. You can do this by adding an occupancy schedule as function 65
or above. A controlling Time Schedule with the name OCCPC65S or
greater will broadcast an occupancy flag over the CCN to any system
element with the same number in its Network Time Schedule
(OCCPCxxE). For example, a Comfort Controller with a Time Sched-
ule named OCCPC68S will broadcast its occupancy state over the CCN
to system elements with a Network Time Schedule named OCCPC68S.
To set up the Comfort Controller 1600 to control the occupancy state of
other system elements on the CCN, you must use ComfortWORKS and
perform the instructions in the previous paragraph.
To set up the Comfort Controller so that its occupancy state will be
controlled by another system element on the CCN, refer to Network
Time Schedule in this chapter of the manual.
501
Time Schedule
OCCPCxxC
Function Type 305
Typical Application Refer to the Time Schedule on the following page for a description
and explanation of possible time period configurations, and rules to
follow when configuring Time Schedules.
optional.
Time Schedule
Manual Override Hours
Period n: Day of Week
Period n: Occupied from
Period n: Occupied to
Push Button Override
Thermostat Override
Time Delay
Timed Override Duration
Power on Delay

Decisions this schedule. They provide data regarding the status and configura-
tion of the schedule.
Time Schedule
Mode
Current Occupied Period
Override in Progress
Override Duration
Occupied Start Time
Unoccupied Start Time
Next Occupied Day
Next Occupied Time
Next Unoccupied Day
Last Unoccupied Day
Thermostat Override
Task Timer
502
Time Schedule
OCCPCxxC
Function Type 305
Figure 6-1
Time Schedule
Time Schedule #1
Occupied Unoccupied
Period Time Time M T W TH F SA SU H
1 08:00 13:00 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
2 11:55 15:00 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
3 09:00 14:00 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
4 00:00 24:00 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
5 00:00 00:00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6 00:00 00:00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 00:00 00:00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8 00:00 00:00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Period 1 has an occupied time of 08:00 (8 a.m.) and an unoccupied time of 13:00 (1:00 p.m.).
It will be in effect Monday through Thursday.
• Period 2 has an occupied time of 11:55 (11:55 a.m.) and an unoccupied time of 15:00
(3 p.m.). It will be in effect only on Saturday.
• Period 3 provides an occupied time of 09:00 (9 a.m.) and an unoccupied time of 14:00 (2
p.m.) It will be in effect on Sunday and holidays.
• Although Periods 4 through 8 have an occupied time of 00:00, only Period 4 will operate
because a day has been specified. Period 4 will be in effect on Friday.
Rule: An occupied time of 00:00 and an unoccupied time of 24:00 will provide occupied
operation for a full 24-hour day.
• Periods 5 through 8 will not operate because no days are configured for these periods.
Rule: An occupied time of 00:00 and an unoccupied time of 00:00 will provide unoccu-
pied operation for a full 24-hour day.
Rule: Every day in a Time Schedule (Monday through Sunday) must be assigned to a
time period.
503
Time Schedule
OCCPCxxC
Function Type 305
Manual Override Hours

Use this decision to command a timed override by entering the number of hours
the override will be in effect, then downloading the OCCPCxxC Table (Time
Schedule). If the mode is occupied when you command a timed override, the
OCCPCxxC Table extends the occupied period by the amount of the Manual
Override Hours. If the mode is unoccupied when you initiate a timed override,
the mode changes to an occupied status for the length of the timed override.
When a timed override extends into a scheduled occupied period, the scheduled
occupied period picks up directly from the timed override with no return to
unoccupied status.
A value downloaded in this decision does not become part of the table’s perma-
nent configuration. The decision is reset to 0 in the Comfort Controller at the end
of the timed override mode. You should not save a non-zero value in this deci-
sion.
By downloading a new timed override, zero hours in length, you can at any time
cancel a timed override that has already been commanded. A 0 in this decision
causes the Time Schedule to switch to unoccupied mode, if that is how it was
configured, or to cancel a pending timed override that would have extended a
current occupied mode.
You cannot change the length of a timed override mode after this decision is
downloaded. From that time until the end of the timed override, the Time Sched-
ule will ignore any value, except 0, that you download to it in this decision.

Default Value 0
504
Time Schedule
OCCPCxxC
Function Type 305
Period n: Day of Week

(n = 1 through 8)
Use this decision to specify the day(s) of the week on which Period n: Occupied
from and Period n: Occupied to times are in effect. From left to right, the first
seven positions of the decision’s data entry field represent Monday through
Sunday. The eighth position represents a holiday.
Each position of the data entry field can be set to 1 or 0. A 1 specifies that the
period is in effect on the day that corresponds to that position; a 0 specifies that
it is not in effect on that day. A period may be specified to be in effect on more
than one day of the week.
You can use the left and right arrow keys to move among the eight positions of
the data entry field. Only the values 1 or 0 should be typed in at each position.
Allowable Entries 0 = period not in effect for that day
1 = period is in effect for that day
Default Value 11111111 for Period 1
00000000 for Periods 2 to 8
Period n: Occupied from

(n = 1 through 8)
Use this decision to specify the hour and minute, in military format, at which
time this occupied period begins. When entering input for this decision, use a
colon (or a decimal if using a LID) to separate hours and minutes.
To specify a 24-hour occupied period, enter 00:00 in this decision and 24:00 in
the Period n: Occupied to decision. To specify a 24-hour unoccupied period,
enter 00:00 in both this decision and in the Period n: Occupied to decision.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 24:00, LID = 00.00 to 24.00
Default Value 00:00
Period n: Occupied to
(n = 1 through 8)
Use this decision to specify the hour and minute, in military format, at which
time this occupied period ends. When entering input for this decision, use a
colon (or a decimal if using a LID) to separate hours and minutes.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 24:00, LID = 00.00 to 24.00
Default Value 24:00
505
Time Schedule
OCCPCxxC
Function Type 305

Use this decision to specify the Latched Discrete Input point (momentary input)
that will indicate when a timed override is requested.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value LATCHI00
Thermostat Override
Use this decision to indicate the analog input point or Sensor Group where the
T-55 or T-56 Space Temperature Sensor (with the timed override button) is
connected.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Time Delay
Use this decision to indicate the number of minutes a Time Schedule will
remain occupied after a timed override cancel occurs.
Default Value 5
Timed Override Duration

Use this decision to indicate the number of minutes that will be added to the
Time Schedule if a push button or T-55 or T-56 override is initiated. The Time
Schedule override can be activated during occupied or unoccupied times. If a
second override occurs, the Time Schedule will cancel the time schedule
override.
Default Value 5
Power on Delay
wait to activate this schedule after a power failure occurs.
Default Value 0
506
Time Schedule
OCCPCxxM
Function Type 305
Maintenance Time Schedule

Decisions Time Schedule provides information regarding the current occupancy mode for
this schedule.
Mode
This decision displays the current occupancy mode for this schedule.
Valid Display 0 = Unoccupied Mode

1 = Occupied Mode
Current Occupied Period

This decision displays the period number that is currently reflecting the
occupancy status for this schedule. When the current mode is 1 (occupied),
the value displayed in this decision represents the period number that
determines this mode. A value of 0 indicates that the mode is unoccupied.
Valid Display 0 = Unoccupied Mode

1 to 8 = Period number determining the Occupied Mode
Override in Progress
This decision indicates whether a manual override is currently in effect.
Override Duration
This decision displays the number of minutes remaining in the override
period. The override period can be as a result of a manual, push button, or
thermostat override condition.
Valid Display 0 = No Manual Override in effect

1 to 240 = Number of minutes remaining in override
period
507
Time Schedule
OCCPCxxM
Function Type 305
Occupied Start Time

This decision shows the time that the current occupied mode began. If the
current mode is unoccupied, the value in this decision is 00:00.
Valid Display 00:00 to 23:59 = Start time of this occupied period
Unoccupied Start Time

This decision shows the time that the current occupied mode will end. This
value also represents the beginning of the next unoccupied period. If the
current mode is unoccupied, the value in this decision is 00:00.
Valid Display 00:00 to 24:00 = Start time of next unoccupied period
Next Occupied Day

This decision indicates the day of the week when the next occupied period
will begin.
Valid Display Sun through Sat
Next Occupied Time

This decision indicates the time of the day when the next occupied period
will begin.
Valid Display 00:00 to 23:59
Next Unoccupied Day

This decision indicates the day of the week when the next unoccupied
period will begin.

This decision indicates the time of the day when the next unoccupied period
will begin.
508
Time Schedule
OCCPCxxM
Function Type 305
Last Unoccupied Day

This decision indicates the day of the week when the most
recent unoccupied period began. If the current mode is unoccu-
pied, the value in this decision indicates the day the mode went
into effect.

This decision indicates the time of the day when the most recent
unoccupied period began. If the current mode is unoccupied, the
value in this decision indicates when the mode went into effect.

This decision indicates whether or not a Push Button Override is in
effect.
Valid Display On / Off
Thermostat Override
This decision displays the thermostat override value.
Task Timer
next execution of the occupancy function. This function executes
every second.
509
510
How To Configure
Alarms
How To
Configure
Alarms
This section provides the following information for each alarm:
Overview
• Purpose
able entries and default values.
Definition of an Alarm An alarm monitors an analog or discrete point, or set of points, and
indicates when the configured limit is exceeded, thereby creating an
alarm condition. The alarm can be transmitted to other system
elements on the CCN.
Function Types Refer to the table below when configuring the FNCxx-yy Table's
Function Unit decision. This same information is also presented in
Appendix H (Quickstart) on the Function Types, Default Names and
EEPROM Memory Usage Summary Sheet.
Table 7-1
Alarm Function Types Alarm Name Function Type
Discrete State .......................................... 103

First Out .................................................. 104
Limit ....................................................... 101
Number of Starts ..................................... 106
Runtime .................................................. 105
Setpoint Limit ......................................... 102
For easy reference, the alarms are presented alphabetically in this

manual.
511
Discrete State Alarm
DSALMxxC
Function Type 103
The Discrete State alarm monitors a discrete point and compares it

Discrete State to the Comparison Point. When the discrete point state equals the
Alarm Comparison Point for the configured Alarm Logic and Persistence
Time period, an alarm is generated.
Typical Application You can use the Discrete State Alarm with a Latched Discrete Input
point by setting Persistence Time to 0, setting Alarm Logic to
normal and not configuring the Comparison Point. Setting Alarm
Logic to invert causes an alarm to be generated as soon as the
Monitored Input Point goes to the on state.
List of Configuration The following configuration decisions are applicable to this alarm.
Decisions You must configure the asterisked decisions. Non-asterisked deci-
sions are optional.
* Monitored Input Point

Comparison Point
Alarm Inhibit Point
Discrete Check
Alarm Logic
Enable Delay Time
Persistence Time
Alarm Processor
* Alarm Processing
Re-Alarm Interval
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Alarm Level
Alarm Source
Alarm Routing
Alarm Description Index
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Power On Delay
512
DSALMxxC
Function Type 103

Decisions this alarm. They provide useful information regarding the status
and configuration of this alarm.

* Comparision Point
* Alarm Inhibit Point
Alarm Status
Alarm Processor
Alarm Type
Time of Last Message
Month of Last Message
Day of Last Message
Year of Last Message
Task Timer
Configuration Decisions Monitored Input Point

You must configure this decision to specify the discrete point that is
being monitored.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Comparison Point
Use this decision to specify the discrete point to which the Moni-
tored Input Point is compared. The state of the Monitored Input
Point is either equal to or not equal to the state of the point you
specify in this decision, based on the Alarm Logic.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
513
DSALMxxC
Function Type 103
Alarm Inhibit Point

Use this decision to indicate the discrete point that prevents the alarm logic
from being executed. If you do not configure this decision, the alarm will
always be active (on). This alarm will be inhibited whenever the point config-
ured in this decision is active.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Discrete Check
Discrete Check gives you the capability to define the Alarm Logic, prevent
nuisance alarms, and specify the length of an alarm state.
Alarm Logic
Use this decision to indicate the alarming logic. When you set this
decision to normal, the alarm will occur when the Input Point is not
equal to the Comparison Point. When you set this decision to invert,
the alarm will occur when Monitored Input Point is equal to the Com-
parison Point.

Enable Delay Time

To prevent nuisance alarms, use this decision to enter the amount of
time that must elapse after a power fail restart before the alarm can be
generated.

Default Value 300
514
DSALMxxC
Function Type 103
Persistence Time
Use this decision to enter the amount of time the Monitored Input Point
must remain in an alarm condition before an alarm is generated or the
amount of time the Monitored Input Point must remain in the operating
range before a return to normal message is generated.

Default Value 60
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processor determines how the Discrete State Alarm message will be sent
on the CCN.
Alarm Processing
You must configure this decision to indicate whether the alarm will be
sent on the CCN.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = Enable/Dsable

Re-Alarm Interval
Use this decision to indicate the number of minutes that will elapse
between re-alarms. A re-alarm occurs when the Monitored Input Point
continues to exceed the configured limit. Re-alarming continues to
occur at the specified interval until the Number of Starts Input does not
exceed the limits.

Default Value 0
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Use this decision to indicate whether alarms or alerts will be generated.
Alarms are displayed before alerts.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = 0/1

Default Value 1
515
DSALMxxC
Function Type 103
Alarm Level
Use this decision to indicate the priority level that will be assigned to this
alarm. The value entered in this decision is used when sorting alarms.
For a list of alarm levels and their meaning, refer to Appendix E.
Default Value 6
Alarm Source
Use this decision to indicate the type of equipment that is generating the
alarm. The value entered in this decision is used when sorting alarms
from the same source by level. For a list of equipment types, refer to
Appendix E.
Default Value 5
Alarm Routing
Use this decision to indicate which CCN system elements will receive and
process alarms sent by the Comfort Controller. Input for this decision
consists of eight digits, each of which can be set to either 0 or 1. Setting a
digit to 1 specifies that alarms will be sent to the system element that
corresponds to that digit. Setting all digits to 0 disables alarm processing.
At the time this manual is written, digits in this decision correspond to
CCN system elements in the following manner:
Alarm Printer Interface Module

Autodial Gateway
Local Building Supervisor(s)
1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
unused

Default Value 11010000
516
DSALMxxC
Function Type 103

Use this decision to enter the index number that represents either the
default standard alarm message or one of the 15 standard alarm mes-
sages that will be generated when the alarm condition exists. If you
enter a value other than 0 in this decision, the configured standard alarm
message will be used instead of the default standard alarm message.
For a list of the 15 standard alarm messages, refer to Appendix E.
Note: If you enter a custom alarm message in any of the four Alarm
Message configuration decisions, that custom message will
overwrite the value in this decision and be sent on the CCN.
Default Value 0
Alarm Message
Use this decision to enter the first 16 characters of the custom message
that you would like sent when the alarm condition exists. Refer to
Appendix E for a list of supported control characters.
Allowable Entries 0 to 16 ASCII characters

Alarm Message
If necessary, use this decision to continue entering the 64-character
custom message that you would like sent when the alarm condition
exists. Refer to Appendix E for a list of supported control characters.

Alarm Message

517
DSALMxxM
Function Type 103
Alarm Message

Power on Delay
must wait to activate this alarm after a power failure occurs.

Default Value 0
Maintenance Monitored Input Point

Decisions This decision displays the current state of the point being monitored.
Comparison Point
This decision displays the present value of the point to which the monitored
point is being compared.
Alarm Inhibit Point

This decision displays Off if the Alarm Inhibit Point configuration decision is
not configured. When this decision displays On, alarm processing is disabled.
Alarm Status
This decision displays the current alarm state of the Monitored Input Point —
Normal or Alarm Condition.
Valid Display Alarm/Normal
518
DSALMxxM
Function Type 103
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processor provides information regarding the last alarm message sent
on the network.
Alarm Type
This decision indicates the state that caused the current alarm message
to be sent.
Valid Display 0 = First Alarm Occurrence
1 = Re-Alarm
2 = Return-To-Normal

This decision displays the time when the last alarm message was sent.
Valid Display 00:00 to 2400

This decision displays the month when the last alarm message was sent.
Day of Last Message

This decision displays the day when the last alarm message was sent.

This decision displays the year when the last alarm message was sent.
Task Timer
This decision displays the number of remaining seconds before this alarm
routine executes again. This alarm routine executes every five seconds.
519
First Out Alarm
FOALMxxC
Function Type 104
The First Out alarm monitors a set of discrete points and compares
First Out Alarm the set to the Comparison Point. When any of the points in the set
satisfy the configured Alarm Logic for the Persistence Time, an
alarm is generated. An alarm is only generated for the first point
that matches the Comparison Point with regard to the Alarm Logic
type. If another point matches the alarm condition later, there is no
re-alarm. The alarm condition remains until none of the set of
points meets the alarm logic state. The alarm message includes the
name of the point that met the alarm condition.
Typical Application You can use the First Out Alarm to monitor a safety chain. To
ensure proper alarm indication, you must connect the points in the
same sequence as the chain.
sions are optional.
* Input Point 1
* Input Point 2
Input Point 3
Input Point 4
Comparison Point
Alarm Inhibit Point
First Out Check
Alarm Logic
Enable Delay Time
Persistence Time
Alarm Processor
* Alarm Processing
Re-Alarm Interval
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Alarm Level
Alarm Source
Alarm Routing
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Power on Delay
520
First Out Alarm
FOALMxxC
Function Type 104

Decisions this alarm. They provide useful information regarding the status and
configuration of this alarm.
* Input Point 1
* Input Point 2
* Input Point 3
* Input Point 4
* Comparison Point
First Out Check
Alarm Status
Alarming Input Point
Alarm Processor
Alarm Type
Day of Last Message
Task Timer
Configuration Input Point 1

Decisions Use this decision to specify the first discrete point in the set of points
being monitored.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Input Point 2
Use this decision to specify the second discrete point in the set of
points being monitored.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
521
First Out Alarm
FOALMxxC
Function Type 104
Input Point 3
Use this decision to specify the third discrete point in the set of points being
monitored.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Input Point 4
Use this decision to specify the fourth discrete point in the set of points being
monitored.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Comparison Point
Use this decision to specify the discrete point to which the Input Points are
being compared. The Input Points are either equal to or not equal to the point
you specify in this decision, based on the Alarm Logic. If you do not config-
ure a point in this decision, the comparison state is assumed to be off.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Alarm Inhibit Point


LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
522
First Out Alarm
FOALMxxC
Function Type 104
First Out Check

First Out Check monitors a set of up to four input values and indicates an alarm
status when any of the inputs and the alarming state satisfy the configured
alarm condition. The reported alarm value is the channel that first met the
alarm condition.
Alarm Logic
Use this decision to indicate the alarming logic. When you set this
decision to normal, the alarm will occur when the Input Point is not
equal to the Comparison Point. When you set this decision to invert,
the alarm will occur when Monitored Input Point is equal to the Com-
parison Point.

Enable Delay Time

time that must elapse after a power fail restart before the alarm can be
generated.

Default Value 300
Persistence Time
Use this decision to enter the amount of time the Input Point must
remain in an alarm condition before an alarm is generated or the amount
of time the Input Point must remain in the operating range before a
return to normal message is generated.

Default Value 300
523
First Out Alarm
FOALMxxC
Function Type 104
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processor determines how the First Out Alarm message will be sent on the
CCN.
Alarm Processing
You must configure this decision to activate the alarm processing logic.

Re-Alarm Interval
between re-alarms. A re-alarm occurs when the Input Point continues to
exceed the configured limit. Re-alarming continues to occur at the speci-
fied interval until the alarm condition no longer exists.

Default Value 0
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Allowable Entries 0/1

Default Value 1
Alarm Level
Default Value 6
524
First Out Alarm
FOALMxxC
Function Type 104
Alarm Source
Appendix E.
Default Value 5
Alarm Routing

Autodial Gateway
1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
unused


default standard alarm message or one of the 15 standard alarm messages
that will be generated when the alarm condition exists. If you enter a
value other than 0 in this decision, the configured standard alarm message
will be used instead of the default standard alarm message. For a list of
the 15 standard alarm messages, refer to Appendix E.
Default Value 0
525
First Out Alarm
FOALMxxC
Function Type 104
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Power on Delay
Default Value 0
526
First Out Alarm
FOALMxxM
Function Type 104
Maintenance Input Point 1

Decisions This decision displays the current state of the first point in the set of points
being monitored.
Input Point 2
This decision displays the current state of the second point in the set of points
being monitored.
Input Point 3
This decision displays the current state of the third point in the set of points
being monitored.
Input Point 4
This decision displays the current state of the fourth point in the set of points
being monitored.
Comparison Point
This decision displays the present value of the point to which the monitored
points are being compared.
Alarm Inhibit Point

First Out Check

First Out Check provides information regarding the current alarm state for this
alarm routine.
Alarm Status
This decision displays the current alarm state of the Monitored Input
Point — Normal or Alarm Condition.
527
First Out Alarm
FOALMxxM
Function Type 104
Alarming Input Point

This decision displays the Input Point that initially caused the alarm.
Valid Display 0 = No point in alarm
1 to 4 = Input Point 1, 2, 3, or 4
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processor provides information regarding the last alarm message sent on
the network.
Alarm Type
to be sent.
1 = Re-Alarm


Day of Last Message


Task Timer
This decision displays the number of remaining seconds before this alarm routine
executes again. This alarm routine executes every second.
528
Limit Alarm
Figure 7-1
Typical Application
aa
Determining a Return to
Normal Status
a
List of Configuration
Decisions
determined. Refer to Figure 7-1.
Alarm
Low Limit
Low Limit
plus
Hysteresis
Normal
Operation
Return to
Normal
High Limit
minus
Hysteresis
Limit Alarm
LMALMxxC
Function Type 101
The Limit alarm monitors an analog point and compares it to config-

ured alarm limits. When the value of the analog point exceeds the
configured High Limit or falls below the Low limit for the configured
Persistence Time, an alarm is generated.
Once an alarm status has been determined, the analog point must
return within the setpoint limits by the configured Hysteresis amount
for the configured Persistence Time before a return to normal status is
High Limit
Alarm
You can use the Limit Alarm to monitor static pressure in an air duct.
The following configuration decisions are applicable to this alarm.

You must configure the asterisked decisions. Non-asterisked decisions
are optional.

Alarm Inhibit Point
Limit Check
Low Limit
High Limit
Enable Delay Time
Persistence Time
Hysteresis
529
Limit Alarm
LMALMxxC
Function Type 101
Alarm Processor
* Alarm Processing
Re-Alarm Interval
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Alarm Level
Alarm Source
Alarm Routing
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Power on Delay


Limit Check
Alarm Status
Alarm Value
Exceeded Limit
Alarm Processor
Alarm Type
Day of Last Message
Task Timer
530
Limit Alarm
LMALMxxC
Function Type 101
Configuration Monitored Input Point

Decisions You must configure this decision to specify the analog point that is being
monitored.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Alarm Inhibit Point


LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Limit Check
Limit Check determines when the Input Point is in alarm or has returned to
normal.
Low Limit
Use this decision to indicate the value the Input Point must fall below
before an alarm is generated. The engineering units for this value
depend on the type of sensor you selected.

Default Value 0.0
High Limit
Use this decision to indicate the value the Input Point must exceed
before an alarm is generated. The engineering units for this value
depend on the type of sensor you selected.

Default Value 999.0
531
Limit Alarm
LMALMxxC
Function Type 101
Enable Delay Time

time that must elapse after a power fail restart before this alarm can be
generated.

Default Value 300
Persistence Time
Use this decision to enter the amount of time the monitored Input Point
amount of time the monitored Input Point must remain in the operating

Default Value 60
Hysteresis
Use this decision to indicate the amount by which the monitored Input
Point must fall below the high alarming condition or rise above the low
alarming condition before a return to normal message can be generated.

Alarm Processor
Alarm Processor determines how the Limit Alarm message will be sent on the
CCN.
Alarm Processing

532
Limit Alarm
LMALMxxC
Function Type 101
Re-Alarm Interval
exceed the configured limit. Re-alarming continues to occur at the speci-
fied interval until the alarm condition no longer exists.

Default Value 0
Alarm=1 or Alert=0

Default Value 1
Alarm Level
Default Value 6
Alarm Source
Appendix E.
Default Value 5
533
Limit Alarm
LMALMxxC
Function Type 101
Alarm Routing
Use this decision to indicate which CCN system elements will receive
and process alarms sent by the Comfort Controller. Input for this
decision consists of eight digits, each of which can be set to either 0 or
1. Setting a digit to 1 specifies that alarms will be sent to the system
element that corresponds to that digit. Setting all digits to 0 disables
alarm processing. At the time this manual is written, digits in this
decision correspond to CCN system elements in the following manner:

Autodial Gateway
1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
unused


Default Value 7
534
Limit Alarm
LMALMxxC
Function Type 101
Alarm Message

Alarm Message

Alarm Message

Alarm Message

Power on Delay

Default Value 0
535
Limit Alarm
LMALMxxM
Function Type 101

Decisions This decision displays the present value of the point being monitored.
Alarm Inhibit Point

Limit Check
Limit Check provides information regarding the current alarm state for this
alarm routine.
Alarm Status
Alarm Value
This decision displays the value of the Monitored Input Point during the
alarm condition.
Note: A value of 0 indicates that the point is not in alarm.
Exceeded Limit
This decision displays the limit that was surpassed.
536
Limit Alarm
LMALMxxM
Function Type 101
Alarm Processor
the network.
Alarm Type
to be sent.

1 = Re-Alarm


Day of Last Message


Task Timer
537
Number of Starts Alarm
NSALMxxC
Function Type 106
The Number of Starts alarm monitors a discrete point and totals the
Number of Starts number of times the point transitions from off to on (starts). When
Alarm the total number of starts exceeds the configured hourly or daily
limit, an alarm is generated. The alarm will return to normal on an
hourly and daily basis.
Typical Application You can use the Number of Starts Alarm to monitor the number of
times a fan turns on.
sions are optional.
Number Starts Check
* Hourly Limit
* Daily Limit
Alarm Processor
* Alarm Processing
Re-Alarm Interval
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Alarm Level
Alarm Source
Alarm Routing
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Power on Delay

Number Starts Check
Alarm Status
Starts This Hour
Starts This Day
Exceeded Limit
Alarm Processor
Alarm Type
Day of Last Message
Task Timer
538
NSALMxxC
Function Type 106

Decisions You must configure this decision to specify the discrete point being monitored.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Number Starts Check

Number Starts Check compares the number of times the Monitored Input Point
transitions from off to on to the configured Hourly and Daily Limits.
Hourly Limit
You must configure this decision to indicate the maximum number of
times per hour the Monitored Input Point can transition from off to on.

Default Value 0
Daily Limit
You must configure this decision to indicate the maximum number of
times per day the Monitored Input Point can transition from off to on.

Default Value 0
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processor determines how the Number Starts Alarm message will be
sent on the CCN.
Alarm Processing

539
NSALMxxC
Function Type 106
Re-Alarm Interval
exceed the configured limit. Re-alarming continues to occur at the
specified interval until the alarm condition no longer exists.

Default Value 0
Alarm=1 or Alert=0

Default Value 1
Alarm Level
Default Value 6
Alarm Source
Appendix E.
Default Value 5
540
NSALMxxC
Function Type 106
Alarm Routing
and process alarms sent by the Comfort Controller. Input for this
decision consists of eight digits, each of which can be set to either 0 or
1. Setting a digit to 1 specifies that alarms will be sent to the system
element that corresponds to that digit. Setting all digits to 0 disables
alarm processing. At the time this manual is written, digits in this
decision correspond to CCN system elements in the following manner:

Autodial Gateway
1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
unused


enter a value other than 0 in this decision, the configured standard
alarm message will be used instead of the default standard alarm
message. For a list of the 15 standard alarm messages, refer to Appen-
dix E.
Default Value 7
541
NSALMxxC
Function Type 106
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Power on Delay
Default Value 0
542
NSALMxxM
Function Type 106

Number Starts Check

Number Starts Check provides information regarding the current alarm state
for this alarm routine.
Alarm Status
Starts This Hour

This decision displays the number of times the Monitored Input Point
transitions from off to on during this hour. The value in this decision
resets to 0 at the beginning of each hour.
Starts This Day

This decision displays the number of times the Monitored Input Point
transitions from off to on during this day. The value in this decision
resets to 0 at midnight.
Exceeded Limit
543
NSALMxxM
Function Type 106
Alarm Processor
the network.
Alarm Type
to be sent.
1 = Re-Alarm


Day of Last Message


Task Timer
routine executes again. This alarm routine executes every 30 seconds.
544
Runtime Alarm
RTALMxxC
Function Type 105
The Runtime alarm monitors a discrete point and totals the amount
Runtime Alarm of time the point is on. When the total on-time amount exceeds the
configured limit, an alarm is generated. The alarm will return to
normal when a reset is done.
Typical Application You can use the Runtime alarm to monitor the amount of time a
pump has been on.
sions are optional.

Runtime Check
* Runtime Limit
Reset Alarm
Alarm Processor
* Alarm Processing
Re-Alarm Interval
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Alarm Level
Alarm Source
Alarm Routing
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Power on Delay
545
Runtime Alarm
RTALMxxC
Function Type 105


Runtime Check
Alarm Status
Runtime Hours
Runtime Minutes
Exceeded Limit
Alarm Processor
Alarm Type
Day of Last Message
Task Timer
Configuration Decisions Monitored Input Point

You must configure this decision to specify the discrete point being
monitored for hours of runtime.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Runtime Check
Runtime Check compares the accumulated runtime for the Moni-
tored Input Point to the Runtime Limit.
Runtime Limit
You must configure this decision to indicate the maximum
amount of time the Alarm Monitored Input Point can be
turned on before an alarm will be generated.

Default Value 0
546
Runtime Alarm
RTALMxxC
Function Type 105
Reset Alarm
Use this decision to clear the accummulated counter and the Runtime
Alarm. The value in this decision will be reset to No after the counter
and alarm are reset.

Default Value No
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processor determines how the Runtime Alarm message will be sent on
the CCN.
Alarm Processing

Re-Alarm Interval
exceed the configured limit. Re-alarming continues to occur at the

Default Value 0
Alarm=1 or Alert=0

Default Value 1
547
Runtime Alarm
RTALMxxC
Function Type 105
Alarm Level
Default Value 6
Alarm Source
Appendix E.
Default Value 5
Alarm Routing
and process alarms sent by the Comfort Controller. Input for this deci-
sion consists of eight digits, each of which can be set to either 0 or 1.
Setting a digit to 1 specifies that alarms will be sent to the system ele-
ment that corresponds to that digit. Setting all digits to 0 disables alarm
processing. At the time this manual is written, digits in this decision
correspond to CCN system elements in the following manner:

Autodial Gateway
1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
unused
548
Runtime Alarm
RTALMxxC
Function Type 105

enter a value other than 0 in this decision, the configured standard
alarm message will be used instead of the default standard alarm mes-
sage. For a list of the 15 standard alarm messages, refer to Appendix E.
Default Value 7
Alarm Message

Alarm Message

Alarm Message

549
Runtime Alarm
RTALMxxM
Function Type 105
Alarm Message
Power on Delay
Default Value 0

Runtime Check
Runtime Check provides information regarding the current alarm state for this
alarm routine.
Alarm Status
Runtime Hours
This decision displays the number of hours the Monitored Input Point
has been on since the last reset.
Runtime Minutes
This decision displays the number of minutes the Monitored Input Point
has been on since the last reset.
550
Runtime Alarm
RTALMxxM
Function Type 105
Exceeded Limit
Alarm Processor
the network.
Alarm Type
to be sent.
1 = Re-Alarm


Day of Last Message


Task Timer
routine executes again. This alarm routine executes every 30 seconds.
551
Setpoint Limit Alarm
SLALMxxC
Function Type 102
a
552
Setpoint Limit
Alarm
Figure 7-2
Determining a
Return to Normal
Status
Typical Application
aa
List of Configuration
Decisions
Alarm
The Setpoint Limit alarm monitors an analog point and compares it
to the setpoint limits configured in the designated Setpoint Sched-
ule. When the value of the analog point is below the low setpoint
minus the configured Low Setpoint Offset or is greater than the
High Setpoint Offset plus the high setpoint, an alarm is generated.
Once an alarm status has been determined, the analog point must
return within the setpoint limits for the configured Persistence Time
before a return to normal status is determined. The limits are deter-
mined as follows:
[high setpoint + High Setpoint Offset - Hysteresis] and [low setpoint

- Low Setpoint Offset + Hysteresis]
Low Limit -
Low Offset
Limit plus
Hysteresis
Normal
Operation
Return to
Normal
Limit minus
Hysteresis
High Limit +
High Offset
Whenever you change the setpoints in the Setpoint Schedule, alarm

detection is inhibited for the amount configured in Setpoint Change
Delay. The conditions are not tested if an Alarm Inhibit input is
active.
You can use the Setpoint Alarm to monitor space temperature.
The following configuration decisions are applicable to this alarm.

You must configure the asterisked decisions. Non-asterisked deci-
sions are optional.
*
*
Monitored Inhibit Point
Alarm Inhibit Point
Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Alarm
SLALMxxC
Function Type 102
Setpoint Limit Check

Low Setpoint Offset
High Setpoint Offset
Setpoint Change Delay
Enable Delay Time
Persistence Time
Hysteresis
Alarm Processor
* Alarm Processing
Re-Alarm Interval
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Alarm Level
Alarm Source
Alarm Routing
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Power on Delay

Decisions this alarm. They provide useful information regarding the status and
configuration of this alarm.
Occupied?
Hi Setpoint + Offset
Lo Setpoint - Offset
Alarm Status
Alarm Value
Exceeded Limit
Alarm Processor
Alarm Type
Day of Last Message
Task Timer
553
SLALMxxC
Function Type 102

Decisions You must configure this decision to specify the analog point that is being
monitored. The engineering units for the point should match those of the
Setpoint Schedule to which it will be compared.

LID = 0 to 64
Alarm Inhibit Point


LID = 0 to 64
Time Schedule
state for this alarm. If you do not specify a Time Schedule in this decision, the
alarm will default to a 24-hour occupied state.

Setpoint Schedule
the occupied and unoccupied setpoints.

554
SLALMxxC
Function Type 102

Setpoint Limit Check determines when the monitored Input Point is in alarm or
has returned to normal.
Low Setpoint Offset

Point must fall below the low setpoint before an alarm is generated.

Default Value 5.0
High Setpoint Offset

Point must exceed the high setpoint before an alarm is generated.

Default Value 5.0
Setpoint Change Delay

time that must elapse after changing the setpoint in the Setpoint Sched-
ule before an alarm can be generated.

Default Value 300
Enable Delay Time

time that must elapse after a power fail restart before this alarm can be
generated.

Default Value 300
555
SLALMxxC
Function Type 102
Persistence Time
Use this decision to enter the amount of time the monitored Input Point
amount of time the monitored Input Point must remain in the operating

Default Value 60
Hysteresis
Point must fall below the high alarming condition or rise above the low
alarming condition before a return to normal message can be generated.

Default Value 2.0
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processor determines how the Setpoint Limit Alarm message will be
sent on the CCN.
Alarm Processing

Re-Alarm Interval
between re-alarms. A re-alarm occurs when the Input Point continues
to exceed the configured limit. Re-alarming continues to occur at the

Default Value 0
556
SLALMxxC
Function Type 102
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Default Value 1
Alarm Level
Default Value 6
Alarm Source
Appendix E.
Default Value 5
Alarm Routing
Autodial Gateway
1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
unused
557
SLALMxxC
Function Type 102

Default Value 7
Alarm Message

Alarm Message

Alarm Message

558
SLALMnnM
Function Type 102
Alarm Message
Power on Delay
wait to activate this alarm after a power failure occurs.
Default Value 0

Decisions This decision displays the current value of the point being monitored.
Alarm Inhibit Point

Occupied ?
Hi Setpoint + Offset
This decision displays the high setpoint value plus offset, allowing for the
current occupancy state.
Valid Display -40.0 to 240°F
559
SLALMnnM
Function Type 102
Lo Setpoint - Offset
This decision displays the low setpoint value minus offset, allowing for the
current occupancy state.

Setpoint Limit Check provides information regarding the current alarm state
for this alarm routine.
Alarm Status
Alarm Value
This decision displays the value of the Monitored Input Point during the
alarm condition.
Exceeded Limit
Alarm Processor
the network.
Alarm Type
to be sent.

1 = Re-Alarm
560
SLALMnnM
Function Type 102


Day of Last Message


Task Timer
561
562
How To Configure
System Functions
How To
Configure
System
Functions
This section provides the following information for each system
Overview function:
• Purpose
• Description of each configuration decision that includes allowable
entries and default values.
Definition of a System A system function allows you to perform one of the following tasks:
Function
• Obtain data from system elements on the CCN
• Access the Comfort Controller’s consumable data
• Configure Service-Config Tables
• Configure user-specific functions of your Comfort Controller.
• Change the time of the Comfort Controller’s internal clock
• View Comfort Controller database information, such as amount of
available memory
For easy reference, the System Functions are presented alphabetically

in this manual, as follows:
Analog Point Trace

Ctlr-ID
Consumable
Database Status
Discrete Trace Point
Internal Consumable
LID Preferences
Real Time Clock
Runtime
Note: In addition to the system functions listed above, the LID can
access the system functions listed in the table on the follow-
ing page. To determine how to access these system func-
tions with the LID, refer to Appendix F.
563
Table 8-1
LID System Function Description
Additional LID
System Functions
Alarm History Allows you to view the last 25 alarms.
The most current alarm is displayed
first.
CCN Control Allows you to view and configure the

Comfort Controller’s address and
baud rate. It also allows you to view
messages sent on the CCN.
Channel Definition Allows you to view and modify

points.
Controller Password Allows you to change your password.
Database Control Allows you to update the Comfort

Controller’s database and view
amount of available memory.
Function Definition Allows you to view and modify

functions.
LID Preferences Allows you to select customary US or

metric units and language translation.
Set Clock Allows you to change the current time

in the Comfort Controller’s internal
clock.
Setpoint Definition Allows you to view and modify

setpoints.
System Definition Allows you to view and modify the

global functions.
564
Function Types Refer to the table below when configuring the FNCxx-yy Table''s
Function Unit decision. This same information is also presented in
Appendix H (Quickstart) on the Function Types, Default Names and
EEPROM Memory Usage Summary Sheet.
Table 8-2
System Function Name Function Type
System Function Types
Analog Point Trace ................................. 201

Discrete Point Trace ............................... 202
Internal Consumable ............................... 203
565
Analog Trace Point
ATRACxxC
Function Type 201
This system function provides detailed trend information regarding

Analog Trace the performance of an analog point over a period of time. Up to 48
Point values can be collected for each trace.
List of Configuration The following decisions are applicable to this system function. You
Decisions must configure the asterisked decisions. Non-asterisked decisions
are optional.
* Analog Trace Point

Control Point
Trace Channel
* Trace Interval
Start Time Config
Start Day
Event State
* Trace Mode
Power on Delay
List of Maintenance The following maintenance decisions are applicable to this system
Decisions function. They provide useful information regarding the status and
configuration of this system function. You can force the asterisked
decisions.
* Analog Trace Point

* Control Point
Trace Channel
Point Traced
Start Time
Status
Buffer Full
Data Value (1-48)
Task Timer
566
Analog Trace Point
ATRACxxC
Function Type 201
Configuration Analog Trace Point

Decisions You must configure this decision to indicate the point being monitored.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Control Point
Use this decision to indicate the discrete point that determines when the trace is
started or stopped based on comparison to the Event State.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Trace Channel
Trace Channel defines the attributes of the trace parameters.
Trace Interval
You must configure this decision to indicate the time that must elapse
before the next Data Value is collected.

Default Value 1
Start Time Config

If you entered the value of 1 (which represents Timed Start of Trace) in
the Trace Mode configuration decision, you must configure this deci-
sion to indicate the time at which the first trace will occur.

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Default Value 00:00
567
Analog Trace Point
ATRACxxC
Function Type 201
Start Day
the Trace Mode configuration decision, you may configure this deci-
sion to specify the day on which the trace will occur.
0 = Any Day 4 = Thursday
Default Value 0
Event State
Use this decision to indicate the state used to compare with the control
point to determine when to start or stop this trace.
Default Value 0
Trace Mode
You must configure this decision to indicate the type of trace operation
to perform.
0 = Manual Start of Trace
(Trace starts and continues until another value is entered in this
decision.)
1 = Timed Start of Trace
(Trace stops when buffer is full.)
2 = Event Start of Trace
(Trace starts when Event State equals Control Point state.)
3 = Event Stop of Trace
(Trace stops when Event State equals Control Point state.)
4 = Manual Stop of Trace
(Trace stops immediately.)
5 = Manual Reset of Trace
(The trace resets to the value of 0, which is Manual Start of
Trace All data clears.)
Default Value 0
568
Analog Trace Point
ATRACxxM
Function Type 201
Power on Delay
wait to activate this history function after a power restart occurs.

Default Value 30
Maintenance Analog Trace Point

Decisions This decision displays the current value of the analog point being traced in user
selectable units.
Control Point
This decision displays the current value of the Control Point. This value acts as
a trigger based on the selected Trace Mode. If unconfigured, the Control Point
will not affect trace operation.
Trace Channel
Trace Channel displays the specific trace data for the displayed point.
Point Traced
This decision identifies the 8-character point name for the Analog Trace
Point.
Valid Display Bldg. Supvr. = up to 8 characters
Start Time
This decision indicates the time when the data gathering for this trace
began. It is dependent on the Trace Mode and Event State selected.
Valid Display 0:00 - 23:59
569
Analog Trace Point
ATRACxxM
Function Type 201
Status
This decision indicates the current status of this trace function. It is dependent
on the Trace Mode and Event State selected.
Trace
Status Mode Description
CONT TRC 0 Trace is running

EVT STOP 3 Trace will stop when configured event occurs
STRT TIM 1 Timed start trace is active (stops when buffer full)
STRT EVT 2 Event start trace is active
STOP TRC 1 or 4 Trace has been stopped
RES BUFF 5 All data resets, then reverts to CONT TRC
WAIT TRG 1 or 2 Waiting for time or event trigger
Valid Display One of seven items above
Buffer Full
This decision indicates whether all 48 data slots have been used.
Data Value
These decisions display up to 48 consecutive values for the trace point. The
most current value is displayed last.
Task Timer
This decision displays the number of remaining seconds before the next execution
of this function. The trace function executes every 60 seconds.
570
Controller ID
Ctlr-ID
This system function allows you to view the pre-configured Com-

Ctlr-ID fort Controller product identification information. You can modify
Device Name, Description and Location with a Building Supervisor
III, Network Service Tool, or ComfortWORKS.
List of Configuration The following pre-configured decisions are applicable:

Decisions Device Name Location Model Number*
Description Software Part Number* Serial Number*
Reference Number*
*non-configurable field
List of Maintenance The following maintenance decision, which can be viewed only
Decisions with a LID or the BEST++ Programmer's Environment, provides
information regarding the amount of real time being used within the
Comfort Controller:
Real Time Usage
Configuration Device Name

Decisions Use this decision to modify the 8 character device name.
LID = N/A
Description
Use this decision to modify the up to 24-character controller de-
scription.
LID = N/A
Default Value Comfort Controller
Location
Use this decision to modify the up to 24-character controller location.
LID = N/A
Software Part Number
CEPP-130124-xx, where xx is based on the version. This is a non-
configurable field.
Maintenance Real Time Usage

Decision This decision is only accessible with the LID or BEST++. This
decision displays the Comfort Controller's percentage of real time
usage. When the value in this decision equals 100%, the algorithms
and any custom programs will no longer run at their configured rate.
571
Consumable
CONSUME
This system function calculates the amount of energy or unit flow

Consumable used over time. A combination of up to 16 sensed discrete, pulsed
discrete, or analog inputs can be configured in each Consumable
equipment table. Up to four tables can exist per Comfort Controller.
For more information, refer to the Data Collection III Option Over-
view and Configuration Manual.
List of Configuration The following decisions are applicable to this system function where
Decisions n is a number 1 through 16.
Point n Name
Point n Type
Configuration Point n Name

Decisions Use this decision to specify the analog or discrete point being
monitored.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value PULSDI00
Point n Type
Use this decision to indicate the type of point being monitored.
Allowable Entries Bldg. Supvr. = Discrete/Analog
LID = 0(Discrete) / 1(Analog)
Default Value Discrete
572
Database Status
UPDATEDB
This system function displays information about the Comfort Con-

Database Status troller database. By viewing the maintenance decisions in this
system function, you can determine:
• if there is an invalid entry in a Comfort Controller table.

• if you have exceeded the Comfort Controller's available memory
• if the database is corrupted.
• the amount of EEPROM and RAM memory space that is avail-
able in the Comfort Controller.

Decisions this system function. They provide useful information regarding the
status and configuration of this system function.
Database Error
EEPROM Error
RAM Error
Available Program Bytes
Available Data Bytes
Maintenance Database Error

Decisions If a Yes is displayed in the Database Error maintenance decision,
there is an invalid entry in one of the Comfort Controller Service
Configuration Tables. A Yes in this decision can also indicate that
you have exceeded the Comfort Controller's available memory.
Note: Database items are created from their respective Service

Configuration Table. Each table (FNCxx-yy, HWxx-yy,
NUMSYS, SETPTDEF, SWxx-yy) is created in sequential
order. Items defined in the FNC01-24 Table are created
first. If a configuration error is encountered, the Comfort
Controller will stop updating the database at the point in
the respective Service Configuration Table where the error
occurred.
573
Database Status
UPDATEDB
EEPROM Error
When this decision displays a Yes, the Comfort Controller's database
configuration may be corrupted. To resolve this problem, download
the configuration to the controller and cycle power.
RAM Error
When this decision displays a Yes, the Comfort Controller's dynamic
data may be corrupted. To resolve this problem, cycle power.
Available Program Bytes

The decision will indicate the EEPROM memory space that is
currently available for additional functions or custom programs.
Refer to Appendix H in this manual for memory requirements for
any additional functions that may be required.
Available Data Bytes

The decision will indicate the RAM space that is available for
additional functions or custom programs. Refer to Appendix H in
this manual for memory requirements for any additional functions
that may be required.
Valid Display Comfort Controller 1600: 0 to 32767

Comfort Controller 6400: 0 to 131068
574
DTRACxxC
Function Type 202
This system function provides detailed trend information regarding

Discrete Trace the performance of a discrete point over a period of time. Up to 48
Point values can be collected for each trace.
are optional.
* Discrete Trace Point

Control Point
Trace Channel
* Trace Interval
Start Time Config
Start Day
Event State
* Trace Mode
Power on Delay
List of Maintenance The following maintenance decisions are applicable to this system
Decisions function. They provide useful information regarding the status and
configuration of this system function. You can force the asterisked
decisions.
* Discrete Trace Point

* Control Point
Trace Channel
Point Traced
Start Time
Status
Buffer Full
Data Value (1-48)
Task Timer
575
DTRACxxC
Function Type 202
Configuration Discrete Trace Point

Decisions You must configure this decision to indicate the point being monitored.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Control Point
You must configure this decision to indicate a discrete point that determines
when the trace is started or stopped based on comparison to the Event State.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Trace Channel
Trace Channel defines the attributes of the trace parameters.
Trace Interval
You must configure this decision to indicate the time that must elapse
before the next Data Value is collected.

Default Value 1
Start Time Config

sion to indicate the time at which the first trace will occur.

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Default Value 00.00
576
DTRACxxC
Function Type 202
Start Day
sion to specify the day on which the first trace will occur.
0 = Any Day 4 = Thursday
Default Value 0
Event State
Use this decision to configure the state used to compare with the con-
trol point to determine when to start or stop this trace.
Default Value 0
Trace Mode
You must configure this decision to indicate the type of trace operation
to perform.
0 = Manual Start of Trace
(Trace starts and continues until another value is entered in this
decision.)
1 = Timed Start of Trace
(Trace stops when buffer is full.)
2 = Event Start of Trace
(Trace starts when Event State equals Control Point state.)
3 = Event Stop of Trace
(Trace stops when Event State equals Control Point state.)
4 = Manual Stop of Trace
(Trace stops immediately.)
5 = Manual Reset of Trace
(The trace resets to the value of 0, which is Manual Start of
Trace. All data clears.)
Default Value 0
577
DTRACxxM
Function Type 202
Power on Delay
wait to activate this history function after a power restart occurs.

Default Value 30
Maintenance Discrete Trace Point

Decisions This decision displays the current state of the discrete point being traced.
Control Point
This decision displays the current value of the Control Point. This value acts as
a trigger based on the selected Trace Mode. If unconfigured, the Control Point
will not affect trace operation.
Trace Channel
These decisions show the specific trace data for the displayed point.
Point Traced
This decision identifies the 8-character point name for the Discrete Trace
Point.
Valid Display 8-character name
Start Time
This decision indicates the time when the data gathering for this trace
began. It is dependent on the Trace Mode and Event State selected.
Valid Display 0:00 - 23:59
578
DTRACxxM
Function Type 202
Status
This decision indicates the current status of this trace function. It is dependent
on the Trace Mode and Event State selected.
Trace
Status Mode Description
CONT TRC 0 Trace is running

EVT STOP 3 Trace will stop when configured event occurs
STRT TIM 1 Timed start trace is active (stops when buffer full)
STRT EVT 2 Event start trace is active
STOP TRC 1 or 4 Trace has been stopped
RES BUFF 5 All data resets, then reverts to CONT TRC
WAIT TRG 1 or 2 Waiting for time or event trigger
Valid Display One of seven items above
Buffer Full
This decision indicates whether all 48 data slots have been used.
Data Value
These decisions display up to 48 consecutive values for the trace point. The
most current value is displayed last.
Valid Display Whatever is valid for the Trace Point.
Task Timer
This decision displays the number of remaining seconds before the next execution
of this function. The trace function executes every 60 seconds.
579
Internal Consumable
CONSUxxC
Function Type 203
This system function accumulates the amount of energy or unit flow

Internal used daily. It collects the data in 15-minute (fast) or 30-minute
Consumable (slow) intervals. Thirty days of accumulated values can be stored.
The data is displayed in a top/down manner, from oldest to most
recent. This system function also stores the peak interval value and
its time and date.
The table below lists the permissible display units for the input point
being monitored and the internal consumable algorithm.
Point Int. Cons.

Display Point Point Algorithm Algorithm Algorithm
Unit Cust. US Metric Display Unit Cust. US Metric
8 gpm 1/min 35 gal liters

9 gph 1/h 35 gal liters
20 kW kW 19 kWh kWh
31 tons/h tons/h 54 tons kW
37 gps 1/sec 35 gal liters
52 GPM LPS 35 gal liters
are optional.
* Consumable Input
Consumable
Consumable Interval
Reset Total Usage
Power on Delay
580
Internal Consumable
CONSUxxC
Function Type 203
List of The following maintenance decisions are applicable to this system function.
Maintenance They provide useful information regarding the status and configuration of this
Decisions system function. You can force the asterisked decision.
* Consumable Input Month

Consumable Date
Data Value (1 - 30) Total Usage
Peak Value Task Timer
Time Peak Occurred
Configuration Consumable Input

Decisions You must configure this decision to indicate the Pulsed Discrete Input Point
being monitored.
Note: This point must support one of the permissible display units (engi-
neering units) listed on the previous page.
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value blank
Consumable
Consumable defines the attributes of the collection intervals.
Consumable Interval
Use this decision to choose either a fast or slow collection interval. The
fast interval collects data every 15 minutes. The slow interval collects
every 30 minutes.
Allowable Entries Fast/Slow
Default Value Fast
Reset Total Usage

Use this decision to reset any previously collected data to zero.
Allowable Entries Yes/No
Default Value No
Power on Delay
must wait to activate this function after a power restart occurs.
Default Value 0
581
Internal Consumable
CONSUxxM
Function Type 203
Maintenance Consumable Input

Decisions This decision displays the current value of the Consumable Input Point.
Consumable
This decision displays the collected data for the configured point.
Data Value
These decisions display up to 30 accumulated values for the configured
point. The most current value is displayed last.
Note: If the Consumable Input Point was configured with invalid units, no
consumable data will be accumulated.
Peak Value
This decision displays the largest collected consumable for any interval over the
30-day period.
Time Peak Occurred

This decision displays the time the Peak Value was collected over the configured
interval — 15 minutes (fast) or 30 minutes (slow).
Month
This decision displays the Month in which the Peak Value was collected.
Date
This decision displays the day on which the Peak Value was collected.
Total Usage
This decision displays the accumulated consumables total for the 30-day period.
Task Timer
582
LID Processor
LIDPRxxC
This system function gives you the capability to:

LID Processor
• specify whether customary U.S. or metric units will be displayed
on the LID.
• specify if the LID text should display in English or in the user-
specified language.
• change the date and time in the Comfort Controller's real time
clock.
• change the LID's password.
are optional.
Units Standard
Language Translation
Password
Time
Day of Week
Month
Year
Update Clock
Power on Delay

Log In to Controller
Log Out of Controller
Task Timer
Configuration Decisions Units Standard

Use this decision to define the engineering conversion requirements
when using the LID to display status or configuration data. The
data can be presented as either a metric or customary U.S. value.
Allowable Entries Metric/U.S.
Default Value U.S.
583
LID Processor
LIDPRxxC
Language Translation
Use this decision to specify if the LID text should display in English or in the
user-specified foreign language. Please note that the LID can support English
and one other language. In order for this decisions to operate, you must create
the foreign language function and convert the text to the desired user language.
Default Value No
Password
Use this decision to change the eight-character password. You must enter a
password before logging onto the Comfort Controller with a LID.
Default Value 1111
Time
Use this decision to set the time in the Comfort Controller's real time clock.
Enter the value in military time and set the Update Clock decision to Yes to
update the real time clock. Use a decimal point (.) instead of a colon (:) when
you configure using the LID.
Allowable Entries 00:00 to 24:00
Default Value 00:00
Day of Week
Use this decision to set the day of week in the Comfort Controller's real time
clock. Enter the desired value and set the Update Clock decision to Yes to
update the real time clock.
Allowable Entries 1 = Monday 5 = Friday
4 = Thursday
Default Value 1
Month
Use this decision to set the month in the Comfort Controller's real time clock.
Enter the desired value and set the Update Clock decision to Yes to update the
real time clock.
Default Value 1
584
LID Processor
LIDPRxxC
Day
Use this decision to set the date in the Comfort Controller's real time clock.
real time clock.
Default Value 1
Year
Use this decision to set the year in the Comfort Controller's real time clock.
real time clock.
Default Value 95
Update Clock
Use this decision to indicate when the Comfort Controller's real time clock
should be updated with the values entered in the preceding configuration
decisions.
Default Value No
Power on Delay
Use this decision to determine how long after a power failure the real time
clock will wait before allowing the clock to be updated.
Default Value 1
585
LID Processor
LIDPRxxM
Maintenance Log In to Controller

Decisions This decision identifies when a user is logging on to the Comfort Controller with
the LID. When the decision transitions to a 1, a user is requesting to log on.
Please note that this decision is set to 0 when the password is validated. Because
this transition occurs quickly, you will not normally be able to witness it.
Valid Display 0/1
Log Out of Controller

This decision identifies when a user has requested to log off the Comfort Con-
troller with the LID. When the decision displays Yes, a user is requesting to log
off. Please note that this decision is set to No when the logoff is complete.
Because this transition occurs quickly, you will not normally be able to witness
it.
Task Timer
This decision displays the number of remaining seconds before this system
function executes again. This system function will execute every second
586
Real Time Clock
RTCCN00C
This system function gives you the capability to:

Real Time Clock
• broadcast current time on CCN.
• configure the start of daylight saving.
• configure the end of daylight saving.
are optional.
Time Broadcast Enable
Daylight Savings
Start Month
Start Day of Week
Start Week
Start Time
Start Advance
Stop Month
Stop Day of Week
Stop Week
Stop Time
Stop Back
Power on Delay

Real Time Clock
Hour
Minute
Second
Day of Week
Month
Day
Year
Is Today a Holiday
Is Tomorrow a Holiday
Daylight Savings
Communication Status
Task Timer
587
Real Time Clock
RTCCN00C
Configuration Time Broadcast Enable

Decisions Use this decision to indicate whether the Comfort Controller will broadcast the
time and date to other system elements on the CCN.
Daylight Savings
Daylight Savings gives you the capability to configure the start and end of
daylight saving.
Start Month
Use this decision to enter the month in which the real time clock will adjust
the time for the start of daylight saving time.
Default Value 4
Start Day of Week

Use this decision to enter the day of the week in which the real time clock
will adjust the time for the start of daylight saving time, where 1 = Monday.
Default Value 7
Start Week
Use this decision to enter the week of the month when the real time clock
will adjust the time for the start of daylight saving time.
Default Value 3
Start Time
Use this decision to enter the time of day at which the real time clock will
adjust the time for the start of daylight saving time. Use a decimal, or
colon, to separate hours from minutes.
LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Default Value 02:00
588
Real Time Clock
RTCCN00C
Start Advance
Use this decision to enter the number of minutes by which the real time
clock will adjust the time for the start of daylight saving time. An entry of
0 will disable this feature.
Default Value 60
Stop Month
Use this decision to enter the month in which the real time clock will adjust
the time for the end of daylight saving time.
Default Value 10
Stop Day of Week

Use this decision to enter the day of the week on which the real time clock
will adjust the time for the end of daylight saving time, where 1 = Monday.
Default Value 7
Stop Week
Use this decision to enter the week of the month in which the real time
clock will adjust the time for the end of daylight saving time.
Default Value 3
Stop Time
Use this decision to enter the time of day at which the real time clock will
adjust the time for the end of daylight saving time. Use a decimal, or
colon, to separate hours from minutes.
LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Default Value 02:00
Stop Back
Use this decision to enter the number of minutes by which the real time
clock will adjust the time for the end of daylight saving time. An entry of 0
will disable this feature.
Default Value 60
589
Real Time Clock
RTCCN00M
Power on Delay
must wait to activate this function after a power restart occurs.
Default Value 0
Maintenance Real Time Clock

Decisions Real Time Clock displays current information about the Comfort Controller’s
internal clock.
Hour
This decision displays the current hour of the day as it exists in the
Comfort Controller's real time clock.
Minute
This decision displays the current minute of the hour as it exists in the
Second
This decision displays the current second of the minute as it exists in
the Comfort Controller's real time clock.
Day of Week
This decision displays the current day of the week as it exists in the
4 = Thursday
Month
This decision displays the current month of the year as it exists in the
590
Real Time Clock
RTCCN00M
Day
This decision displays the current day of the month as it exists in the
Year
This decision displays the current year of the century as it exists in the
Is Today a Holiday
This decision indicates if today is scheduled to be a holiday. You
specify holidays in the Comfort Controller's HOLDYxxS Table.
Is Tomorrow a Holiday
This decision indicates if tomorrow is scheduled to be a holiday. You
specify holidays in the Comfort Controller's HOLDxxS Table.
Daylight Savings
This decision indicates if daylight saving time is in effect.
Communication Status
This decisions indicates if the Comfort Controller successfully com-
pleted the last time and date broadcast. The Comfort Controller broad-
casts time and date twice a day — at 1:00 am and 1:00 pm, or on
request of a CCN element.
Valid Display 0 = Successful Broadcast
1 = No Broadcast acknowledge received
Task Timer
591
Runtime
RUNTIME
This system function determines how long the configured discrete

Runtime points have been on. Up to 16 points can be configured in each
Runtime Table. Up to 4 tables can be configured. Each point is
read every minute to record the amount of runtime. This data is
then used by a CCN Data Collection III option. Once an hour, the
Data Collection supervisory part transmits an inquiry to the Comfort
Controller, and the Comfort Controller transmits back the runtime
value for each configured point. For more information about
Runtime, refer to Data Collection III Option Overview and Configu-
ration Manual.
List of Configuration The following decisions are applicable to this system function,
Decisions where n is a number 1 through 16. You must configure at least one
point.
Point n Name
Point n Type
Configuration Point n Name

Decisions Use this decision to specify the discrete point being monitored.

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Point n Type
Use this decision to indicate whether the point being monitored is a
normal on/off type.

592
Configuration Sheets
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Controller Name:_______________________________ Bus #______________ Element #_____________
Table Description:____________________________________________ Table Name: HW______________
(Table #)
HARDWARE POINTS DEFINITION SHEET
DECISION NAME ALLOWABLE ENTRIES VALUE POINT NUMBER
1st Channel Type 0 - 14

1st Sensor or Units See below.
1st Channel Name
2nd Channel Type 0 - 14
2nd Sensor or Units See below.
2nd Channel Name
3rd Channel Type 0 - 14
3rd Sensor or Units See below.
3rd Channel Name
4th Channel Type 0 - 14
4th Sensor or Units See below.
4th Channel Name
5th Channel Name
6th Channel Name
7th Channel Name
8th Channel Name
Channel (I/O) Types Sensor Types*/Units** Channel (I/O) Types Sensor Types*/Units**
0 Not used Not used 8 DI—Discrete Latched 1 - 37 (units)
1 AI—Temperature 1 - 4 (sensor type) 9 AO—Milliamp 1 - 4 (sensor type)
2 AI—Milliamp 1 - 5 (sensor type) 10 AO—Custom Milliamp 1 - 56 (units)
3 AI—Custom Milliamp 1 - 56 (units) 11 AO—Voltage 1 - 4 (sensor type)
4 AI—Voltage 1 - 6 (sensor type) 12 AO—Custom Voltage 1 - 56 (units)
5 AI—Custom Voltage 1 - 56 (units) 13 DO—Discrete 1 - 37 (units)
6 DI—Sensed Discrete 1 - 37 (units) 14 DO—Stepper 1 - 56 (units)
7 DI—Pulsed Discrete 1 - 56 (units)
* For a description of the sensor types, refer to Appendix B in this manual.

** For a description of the units, refer to Appendix C in this manual.
1/95
593
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:____________________________________________ Table Name: SW______________
(Table #)
SOFTWARE POINTS DEFINITION SHEET
DECISION NAME ALLOWABLE ENTRIES VALUE POINT NUMBER
1st Channel Type 0-4

1st Sensor or Units See below.
1st Channel Name
2nd Channel Type 0-4
2nd Sensor or Units See below.
2nd Channel Name
3rd Channel Type 0-4
3rd Sensor or Units See below.
3rd Channel Name
4th Channel Type 0-4
4th Channel Name
5th Channel Name
6th Channel Name
7th Channel Name
8th Channel Name
Channel (I/O) Types Units*
0 Not used Not used

1 Discrete Software 1 - 56 (units)
2 Analog Software 1 - 56 (units)
3 Network Input 1 - 56 (units)
4 Network Output 1 - 56 (units)
* For a description of the units, refer to Appendix C in this manual.
3/95
594
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Controller Name:___________________________________________________ Bus #________________________ Element #_______________________
Table Description:_________________________________________________________________________________ Table Name: FNC________________
(Table #)
F u n c t i o n D e f i n i t i o n S h e e t - A l g o r i t h m s , A l a r m s , Ti m e S c h e d u l e s , B r o a d c a s t , & L i n k a g e
DECISION NAME ALLOWABLE ENTRIES VALUE DECISION NAME ALLOWABLE ENTRIES VALUE
1st Function Type * 16th Function Type *

1st Function Units 0-56** 16th Function Units 0-56**
2nd Function Type * 17th Function Type *
2nd Function Units 0-56** 17th Function Units 0-56**
3rd Function Type * 18th Function Type *
3rd Function Units 0-56** 18th Function Units 0-56**
4th Function Type * 19th Function Type *
4th Function Units 0-56** 19th Function Units 0-56**
6th Function Type * 21st Function Type *
6th Function Units 0-56** 21st Function Units 0-56**
7th Function Type * 22nd Function Type *
7th Function Units 0-56** 22nd Function Units 0-56**
8th Function Type * 23rd Function Type *
8th Function Units 0-56** 23rd Function Units 0-56**
10th Function Type *
10th Function Units 0-56**
*Refer to Appendix J in this manual for a list of allowable entries. 8/95
**Refer to Appendix C in this manual for a list of allowable entries.
595
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Controller Name:_______________________________ Bus #_____________ Element #_____________
Table Description:_________________________________________________ Table Name: NUMSYS
SYSTEM FUNCTIONS DEFINITION SHEET
DECISION NAME ALLOWABLE ENTRIES VALUE
Holidays 0 - 16
Network Time Schedule 0 - 16
Consumables 0-4
Runtimes 0-4
Loadsheds 0 - 16
Language Conversion Yes/No
1/95
596
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK

Table Description:___________________________________________________ Table Name: SETPTDEF
SETPOINT DEFINITION SHEET
DECISION NAME ALLOWABLE ENTRIES* VALUE
Setpoint 01 Units 0 - 56
* For a description of the allowable entries, refer to Appendix C in this manual.
1/95
597
COMFORT Sheet ______ of ________
NETWORK
Controller Name:_______________________________ Bus #______________ Element #____________
Name of Algorithm:__________________________________________ Occurrence:__________________
ALGORITHM OR ALARM CONFIGURATION SHEET
1/95
598
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:____________________________________________ Table Name: CMAMPI_________
(Pt. #)
AI-CUSTOM MILLIAMP (CMAMPI_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET
DECISION NAME ALLOWABLE ENTRIES UNITS VALUE
Low Input Endpoint 0.0 to 22.0 mA
High Input Endpoint 0.0 to 22.0 mA
Low Conversion Endpoint * *
High Conversion Endpoint * *
Low Input Fault 0.0 to 22.0 mA
High Input Fault 0.0 to 22.0 mA
Externally Powered Yes/No
Table Description:____________________________________________ Table Name: CMAMPI_________

(Pt. #)
AI-CUSTOM MILLIAMP (CMAMPI_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET
Low Input Endpoint 0.0 to 22.0 mA
High Input Endpoint 0.0 to 22.0 mA
Low Input Fault 0.0 to 22.0 mA
High Input Fault 0.0 to 22.0 mA
Externally Powered Yes/No

*Allowable entries are based on the units you select. For a list of the units, refer to Appendix C in this manual.
1/95
599
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:___________________________________________ Table Name: CMAMPO_________
(Pt. #)
AO-CUSTOM MILLIAMP (CMAMPO_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET
Low Output Endpoint 0.0 to 22.0 mA
High Output Endpoint 0.0 to 22.0 mA
Table Description:___________________________________________ Table Name: CMAMPO_________

(Pt. #)
AO-CUSTOM MILLIAMP (CMAMPO_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET
Low Output Endpoint 0.0 to 22.0 mA
High Output Endpoint 0.0 to 22.0 mA
1/95
600
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:____________________________________________ Table Name: CVOLTI__________
(Pt. #)
AI-CUSTOM VOLTAGE (CVOLTI_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET
Low Input Endpoint 0.0 to 11.0 Volts
High Input Endpoint 0.0 to 11.0 Volts
High Input Fault 0.0 to 11.0 Volts
Low Input Fault 0.0 to 11.0 Volts
Table Description:____________________________________________ Table Name: CVOLTI__________

(Pt. #)
AI-CUSTOM VOLTAGE (CVOLTI_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET
Low Input Endpoint 0.0 to 11.0 Volts
High Input Endpoint 0.0 to 11.0 Volts
High Input Fault 0.0 to 11.0 Volts
Low Input Fault 0.0 to 11.0 Volts
*Allowable entries are based on the units you select. For a list of the units, refer to Appendix C in this mauual.
1/95
601
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:___________________________________________ Table Name: CVOLTO__________
(Pt. #)
AO-CUSTOM VOLTAGE (CVOLTO_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET
Low Output Endpoint 0.0 to 11.0 Volts
High Output Endpoint 0.0 to 11.0 Volts

Table Description:___________________________________________ Table Name: CVOLTO__________

(Pt. #)
AO-CUSTOM VOLTAGE (CVOLTO_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET
Low Output Endpoint 0.0 to 11.0 Volts
High Output Endpoint 0.0 to 11.0 Volts

1/95
602
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:__________________________________________ Table Name: DISCRO___________
(Pt. #)
DO-DISCRETE (DISCRO_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET
Output Logic Type Normal/Invert N/A
Minimum Off Time 0 to 3600 min
Minimum On Time 0 to 3600 min
Delay Time 0 to 3600 seconds

(Pt. #)

(Pt. #)

1/95
603
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Controller Name:_______________________________ Bus #______________ Element # ____________
Table Description:________________________________________ Table Name: HOLIDAY___________
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE CONFIGURATION SHEET

Start Month 1 to 12
Start Day 1 to 31
Duration 0 to 365 Days

Start Month 1 to 12
Start Day 1 to 31

Start Month 1 to 12
Start Day 1 to 31

Start Month 1 to 12
Start Day 1 to 31

1/95
604
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:__________________________________________ Table Name: MAMP__I_________
(Pt #)
AI-MILLIAMP (MAMP_I_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET
Offset -999.0 to 999.0 N/A

(Pt #)
Offset -999.0 to 999.0 N/A

(Pt #)
Offset -999.0 to 999.0 N/A

(Pt #)
Offset -999.0 to 999.0 N/A
1/95
605
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:____________________________________________ Table Name: OCCPN__________S
(Table #)
TIME SCHEDULE CONFIGURATION SHEET

Manual Override Hours 0-4 Hours

Period 1: Day of Week 00000000/11111111
Period 1: Occupied from 00:00 to 24:00 Hr:Min
Period 1: Occupied to 00:00 to 24:00 Hr:Min
Push Button Override Up to 8 alphanum. char.
Thermostat Override Up to 8 alphanum. char.
Time Delay 0 to 60 Min

Timed Override Minutes 0 to 240 Min
1/95
606
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:__________________________________________ Table Name: PULSDI___________
(Pt. #)
DI-PULSED DISCRETE (PULSDI_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET
Conversion Factor 0000.00 to 9999.99 pulses
Sample Time 1 to 1800 seconds

(Pt. #)

(Pt. #)
1/95
607
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:__________________________________________ Table Name: SENSDI ___________
(Pt. #)
DI-SENSED DISCRETE (SENSDI_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET
Output Logic Type normal/invert

(Pt. #)

(Pt. #)

(Pt. #)
1/95
608
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:___________________________________________ Table Name: SETPT ____________
(Table #)
SETPOINT SCHEDULE CONFIGURATION SHEET
Occupied Lo Setpoint * *
Occupied Hi Setpoint * *
Unoccupied Lo Setpoint * *
Unoccupied Hi Setpoint * *

(Table #)

(Table #)
1/95
609
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:__________________________________________ Table Name: STPMOT___________
(Pt. #)
DO-STEPPER MOTOR (STPMOT_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET
Stepping Rate 1 to 1000 steps/

seconds
Duty Cycle 33 to 100 %

(Pt. #)

seconds

(Pt. #)

seconds
1/95
610
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:__________________________________________ Table Name: TEMP __I_________
(Pt #)
AI-TEMPERATURE (TEMP_I_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET
-10.0 to 10.0°F
Offset (-23.3 to -12.2°C) °F (°C)

(Pt #)
-10.0 to 10.0°F
Offset (-23.3 to -12.2°C) °F (°C)

(Pt #)
-10.0 to 10.0°F
Offset (-23.3 to -12.2°C) °F (°C)

(Pt #)
-10.0 to 10.0°F
Offset (-23.3 to -12.2°C) °F (°C)
1/95
611
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:__________________________________________ Table Name: VOLT__I_________
(Pt #)
AI-VOLTAGE (VOLT_I_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET
Offset -999.0 to 999.0 N/A

(Pt #)
Offset -999.0 to 999.0 N/A

(Pt #)
Offset -999.0 to 999.0 N/A

(Pt #)
Offset -999.0 to 999.0 N/A
1/95
612
Appendixes
Appendix A
The Comfort Controller is compatible with the following Carrier

CCN Comfort Network (CCN) products. This list is current as of the
Compatibility printing of this manual. It is subject to change.
Purpose & Name of Document

Where You Can Find More
Compatible Products Information About Product
Operation and Configuration
Air Side Linkage The software routine in the Terminal

System Manager II (TSM II) that
determines the relationship between
the TSM II(s) and the air handler(s) in
a system.
Terminal System Manager II Over-

view and Configuration Manual
(808-777)
Autodial Gateway III Serves as an interface device between

a Carrier Comfort Network (CCN)
and a modem. The Gateway and
modem enable the CCN to communi-
cate over telephone lines with other
Autodial Gateway-equipped CCNs.
Autodial Gateway III Overview and

Configuration Manual
(808-827)
CCN DATAPORT Interface device that allows a non-

Carrier device such as a dumb termi-
nal, personal computer, or non-Carrier
controller to read values in system
elements connected to a CCN Com-
munication Bus.
CCN DATAPORT Product Data Sheet

(808-538)
(Continued)
613
Data Collection III Used to collect consumable, runtime,

and history data.
Data Collection III/Data Transfer

Product Data Sheet (808-777)
Data Transfer Transmits point data from one system

element to another.
Data Collection III/Data Transfer

Product Data Sheet (808-777)
Facility Time Schedule Used to specify occupancy periods

that vary in length on a day-to-day
basis.
Facility Time Schedule Overview and

(808-726)
Loadshed Reduces peak electrical consumption

within a building by measuring usage
and “shedding” (turning off or other-
wise reducing) selected building loads
when a present limit is surpassed.
Loadshed Overview and Configura-

tion Manual (808-555)
(Continued)
614
Maintenance Management Extends capabilities of the Building

Supervisor so that is can provide hard
copy service requests (work orders)
when equipment requires attention.
Maintenance Management Overview

and Configuration Manual
(808-746)
Tenant Billing Records the amount of time, or timed

override, that a building tenant ex-
ceeds occupancy hours that have been
scheduled in the CCN.
Stores a configured dollar amount that

is charged to the customer for each
hour of override.
Tenant Billing Overview and Configu-

ration Manual (808-730)
Timed Force Extends user’s flexibility in forcing

points. Transmits a force command to
a point in a CCN controller to over-
ride what would otherwise be the
value or state of the point.
Timed Force Overview and Configu-

ration Manual (808-717)
(Continued)
615
Water System Manager Provides linking functions so that the

operation of equipment supplying
cooled and heated water can be en-
abled and disabled in response to
conditions in the space(s) being
served.
Supplies reset values to adjust setpoint

in the water cooling and heating
equipment.
Water System Manager Overview and

(808-734)
616
Appendix B
The tables below provide the engineering units, ranges, resolutions,

Standard Input and accuracy for the standard input and output devices that the
and Output Comfort Controller supports.
Devices
Temperature Types
Range
Analog Input (US = Customary US)
Type Sensor Type (M = Metric) Resolution Accuracy
1 YSI 10K Thermistor US: -40°F to 245°F 0.1°F +/-1.0°F

Temperature Sensor M: -40°C to 118°C 0.055°C +/-0.55°C
2 1K RTD US: -40°F to 220°F 0.1°F +/-2.0°F

Temperature M: -40°C to 104°C 0.055°C +/-0.55°C
3 5K Thermistor US: -40°F to 245°F 0.1°F +/-1.0°F

4 PT100 Temperature Not supported.

Sensor
5 MCI 10K Thermistor US: -40°F to 245°F 0.1°F +/-1.0°F

6 NTC 100K Thermistor US: 72°F to 282°F 0.1°F +/-1.0°F

Temperature Sensor M: 22°C to 139°C 0.055°C +/-0.55°C
(Continued)
617
Analog Input Types (Milliamp)
Range
1 Relative Humidity Sensor US: 0% Rh to 100% Rh 0.16% Rh 0.32% Rh

(2-wire, 4-20 mA input) M: 0% Rh to 100% Rh 0.16% Rh 0.32% Rh
2 Static Pressure Sensor US: 0" H20 to 5.0" H20 0.008" H20 0.016" H20
(2-wire, 4-20 mA input) M: 0 P to 1244 P 1.6 P 3.2 P
3 4-20 Milliamp Transducer US: 0 mA to 22 mA 0.025 mA +/-0.05 mA

M: 0 mA to 22 mA 0.025 mA +/-0.05 mA
4 Platinum RTD US: -10°F to 245°F 0.4°F 0.8°F

Temperature Sensor M: -22.3°C to 118°C 0.22°C 0.44°C
(2-wire, 4-20 mA input)
5 Pressure Sensor US: 3 to 15 psi 0.02 psi 0.04 psi

(2-wire, 4-20 mA input) M: 20.7 to 103.4 kPa 0.13 kPa 0.26 kPa
(Continued)
618
Analog Input Types (Voltage)
Range
1 Relative Humidity Sensor US: 0% Rh to 100% Rh 0.16% Rh 0.32% Rh

M: 0% Rh to 100% Rh 0.16% Rh 0.32% Rh
2 Static Pressure Sensor US: 0" H20 to 5.0" H20 0.008" H20 0.016" H20
M: 0 P to 1244 P 1.6 P 3.2 P
3 0 to 10 Vdc Transducer US: 0 Vdc to 11 Vdc 0.0125 Vdc +/-0.025 Vdc

(Maximum Impedance M: 0 Vdc to 11 Vdc 0.0125 Vdc +/-0.025 Vdc
>10K ohms)
4 Platinum RTD US: -10°F to 245°F 0.4°F 0.8°F

Temperature Sensor M: -22.3°C to 118°C 0.22°C 0.44°C
5 Pressure Sensor US: 3 to 15 psi 0.02 psi 0.04 psi

M: 20.7 to 103.4 kPa 0.13 kPa 0.26 kPa
6 T-56 Space Temperature US: 0.0% to 100.0% not applicable

Sensor with Setpoint M: 0.0% to 100.0% not applicable
Adjustment
(Continued)
619
Analog Output Types (Milliamp)
Range
Analog Output (US = Customary US)
1 Percentage CS: 0 to 100% 0.5% 3.75%

0-100%, M: 0 to 100% 0.5% 3.75%
(4-20 mA output)
2 Percentage CS: 100% to 0% 0.5% 3.75%

100%-0%, M: 100% to 0% 0.5% 3.75%
(4-20 mA output)
3 Pressure CS: 0 psi to 16.5 psi 0.64 psi 0.45 psi

(0-22 mA output) M: 0 kPa to 113.9 kPa 0.44 kPa 3.1 kpa
4 4-20 mA CS: 0 mA to 22.0 mA 0.085 mA +/-.6 mA

Maximum Load 600 ohms M: 0 mA to 22.0 mA 0.085 mA +/-.6 mA
Note: Accuracy does not include accuracy of the transducer.
The UT203 FID IO modules only support Milliamp Analog Output Type 4. If an-
other milliamp analog output is required, configure the point as a Custom Milliamp
Output. For more information, refer to Custom Milliamp Output in the How To
Configure Points chapter of this manual.
(Continued)
620
Analog Output Types (Voltage)
Range
Analog Output (US = Customary US)
1 Percentage CS: 0 to 100% 0.5% 3.75%

0-100%, M: 0 to 100% 0.5% 3.75%
(0-10 V)
2 Percentage CS: 100% to 0% 0.5% 3.75%

100%-0%, M: 100% to 0% 0.5% 3.75%
(0-10 V)
3 Pressure CS: 0 psi to 16.5 psi 0.64 psi 0.45 psi

(0-11 V) M: 0 kPa to 113.9 kPa 0.44 kPa 3.1 kpa
4 0-10 Vdc CS: 0 Vdc to 11 Vdc 0.04 Vdc 0.3 Vdc

M: 0 Vdc to 11 Vdc 0.04 Vdc 0.3 Vdc
Note: Accuracy does not include accuracy of the transducer.
The UT203 FID IO modules do not support Voltage Analog Output Types.
621
Appendix C - Allowable Entries for AI/AO Display Units
Customary US Metric
Display
Units Conversion Limits Conversion Limits
Units Units
Entry
Displayed Low High Displayed Low High
0 not used not used

1 °F -40.00 245.00 °C -40.00 118.33
2 % 0.00 100.00 % 0.00 100.00
3 "H20 0.00 5.00 Pa 0 1244
4 mA 0.00 22.00 mA 0.00 22.00
5 ^F -9999.99 9999.99 ^C -5555.55 5555.55
6 VOLTS 0.00 11.00 VOLTS 0.00 11.00
7 psi 0.00 16.50 Kpa 0.00 113.77
8 gpm -9999.99 9999.99 1/min -37849.96 37849.96
9 gph -9999.99 9999.99 1/h -37849.96 37849.96
10 kgpm -9999.99 9999.99 m3/min -37849.96 37849.96
11 kgph -9999.99 9999.99 m3/h -37849.96 37849.96
12 psig -9999.99 9999.99 kPa -68949.93 68949.93
13 lbs/hr -9999.99 9999.99 kg/h -4535.996 4535.996
14 klbs/hr -9999.99 9999.99 kg/hr -4535.996 4535.996
15 Btu/hr -9999.99 9999.99 kW -2.93000 2.93000
16 MBtu/h -9999.99 9999.99 kW -2929.997 2929.997
17 "H20 -9999.99 9999.99 mmH2O -253999.8 253999.8
18 "Hg -9999.99 9999.99 mmHG -253999.8 253999.8
19 kWh -9999.99 9999.99 kWh -9999.99 9999.99
20 kW -9999.99 9999.99 kW -9999.99 9999.99
21 degF -9999.99 9999.99 degC -5573.33 5573.77
22 %Rh 0.00 100.00 %Rh 0.00 100.00
23 AMPS -9999.99 9999.99 AMPS -9999.99 9999.99
24 VOLTS -9999.99 9999.99 VOLTS -9999.99 9999.99
25 CFM -9999.99 9999.99 m3/min -283.1997 283.1997
26 CFH -9999.99 9999.99 m3/h -283.1997 283.1997
27 fpm -9999.99 9999.99 m/sec -50.79995 50.79995
28 kcfm -9999.99 9999.99 m3/min -283199.7 283199.7
29 kcfh -9999.99 9999.99 m3/h -283199.7 283199.7
30 tons -9999.99 9999.99 tons -9069.99 9069.99
31 tons/h -9999.99 9999.99 tons/h -9069.99 9069.99
32 rpm -9999.99 9999.99 rpm -9999.99 9999.99
33 %open -9999.99 9999.99 %open -9999.99 9999.99
34 hours -9999.99 9999.99 hours -9999.99 9999.99
35 gals -9999.99 9999.99 liters -37849.96 37849.96
36 Btu/lb -9999.99 9999.99 kJ/kg -23267.78 23232.18
37 gps -9999.99 9999.99 1/sec -37849.96 37849.96
38 sqft -9999.99 9999.99 m2 -928.9991 928.9991
39 CFM -9999.99 9999.99 1/sec -4718.995 4718.995
40 sec -9999.99 9999.99 sec -9999.99 9999.99
41 Hz -9999.99 9999.99 Hz -9999.99 9999.99
42 min -9999.99 9999.99 min -9999.99 9999.99
43 hours -9999.99 9999.99 hours -9999.99 9999.99
44 rpm -9999.99 9999.99 rpm -9999.99 9999.99
45 kWh/p -9999.99 9999.99 kWh/p -9999.99 9999.99
46 pulses -9999.99 9999.99 pulses -9999.99 9999.99
47 uS -9999.99 9999.99 uS -9999.99 9999.99
48 pH -9999.99 9999.99 pH -9999.99 9999.99
49 usec -9999.99 9999.99 usec -9999.99 9999.99
50 steps -9999.99 9999.99 steps -9999.99 9999.99
51 feet -9999.99 9999.99 meters -3047.85 3047.85
52 GPM -9999.99 9999.99 LPS -630.7993 630.7993
53 in Hg -9999.99 9999.99 kPag -35139.97 35139.97
54 tons -9999.99 9999.99 kW -35139.97 35139.97
55 tons -9999.99 9999.99 KCal/min -503999.51 503999.51
56 no units no units
57-72 custom units -9999.99 9999.99 custom units -9999.99 9999.99
622
Appendix D
Allowable Entries Display Conversion Conversion

Units for Discrete for Discrete
for DI/DO Display Entry Value 1 Value 0
Units
1 1 0
2 Start Stop
3 Stop Start
4 Enable Disable
5 Disable Enable
6 On Off
7 Off On
8 Open Close
9 Close Open
10 High Low
11 Low High
12 Alarm Normal
13 Normal Alarm
14 Enable Emstop
15 Emstop Enable
16 Yes No
17 No Yes
18 True False
19 False True
20 Analog Discrete
21 Nonlin Linear
22 Energy Flow
23 Invert Normal
24 Blank Blank
25 Dirty Clean
26 Heat Cool
27 Up Down
28 Fast Slow
29 Auto Manual
30 Auto On
31 Brine Water
32 Full Reduce
33 CCN Local
34 Tone Pulse
35 Or And
36 Metric US
37 Slave Master
38-53 Custom units Custom Units
623
Appendix E
Refer to the information in this appendix when configuring the

Alarm Information following decisions in an ALRMDEF Table:
• Alarm Level
• Alarm Source
• Alarm Description Index
• Alarm Message
A description of each of these decisions and their allowable entries

are given below.
Alarm Level In the Alarm Level configuration decision, enter the priority level (0
to 6) that will be assigned to this alarm. The value in this decision is
used when sorting alarms.
Alarm levels range from zero to six, with zero being the highest and
six the lowest priority. Each level, along with a description of its
meaning, is listed below.
Alarm Level Meaning
0 Fire/Life Safety
1 Critical
2 Service
3 Reserved
4 Maintenance
5 Reserved
6 Control
624
Alarm Source In the Alarm Source configuration decision, enter the type (0 to 7) that
represents the equipment generating the alarm. The value entered in this
decision is used when sorting alarms from the same source by level.
Type Equipment
0 Fire
1 Security
2 Reserved
3 Boiler/Furnace
4 Chiller
5 Air Handler
6 System (POC functions)
7 Thermostat
Alarm Description In the Alarm Description Index configuration decision, enter the index
Index number (0 to 15) that represents the standard alarm message that will be
generated when the alarm condition exists.
Index Number Standard Alarm Message
0 If you enter 0 in the Alarm Description Index

configuration decision or a date in the Alarm
Message decision, the standard alarm message
will be ignored.
1 discrete state
2 total time exceeds
3 starts, limit is
4 commanded state is
5 safety chain first out
6 interlock
7 outside limit of
8 interlocked, exceeds limit of
9 I/O channel failure
10 has illegal configuration
11 additional cooling capacity required
12 communications error
13 clock error
14 communication alarm buffer full
15 directory not available
625
Alarm Message There are four Alarm Message configuration decisions which allow
you to create a custom message of up to 64 characters that will be
sent when the alarm condition exists. In each decision, you can enter
up to 16 ASCII character and/or control characters listed in the table
below.
A control character consists of # and a number 2 to 4. When an alarm
is generated, the control characters in the custom message are re-
placed by the actual data supplied by the alarm, i.e., the point name.
The examples below show custom messages with and without control
characters.
Example custom alarm message entered without control

characters:
Bob, SPT exceeded limit of 72°F. Call Joe at Ext. 5555 when
problem is fixed.
Same custom alarm message entered using control characters:

Bob, #2 #4. Call Joe at Ext. 5555 when alarm returns to normal.
Control Characters Will be replaced with . . . when

alarm is sent
#1 Not used
#2 8-character point name*
#3 current variable value and units
#4 exceeded limit and units
*ComfortWORKS replaces the 8-character point name with the 24-

character description.
626
Appendix F
The Local Interface Device (LID) is a CCN operator interface that

LID Operation
gives you the capability to view and modify all configuration and
service data for the Comfort Controller. The LID also gives you the
capability to override all point display and maintenance data.
This section includes information about the LID’s:
• Menu structure
• Default screen
• Keypad
• Status modes
This section also includes instructions on how to:
• Log on and log off

• Access configuration and maintenance data
The LID operates on a hierarchy of four levels (menus).

Menu Structure
The top level contains the LID’s major functions. Each function has
a corresponding key on the LID. For an explanation of each function
key, refer to Table F-2.
The second level separates the major functions (items) into types with
corresponding type numbers that you can use for quick access. For a
list of functions and type numbers, refer to the Function Types,
Default Names and EEPROM Memory Usage Summary Sheet
located in Appendix H of this manual. This table is useful when you
want to quickly access a particular item, such as an algorithm.
The third level gives you the capability to access each occurrence of
an item. For example, your application may require two DO—
Analog Comparison algorithms. Thus, your Comfort Controller
would have two occurrences of the DO—Analog Comparison algo-
rithm.
The fourth level gives you the capability to access maintenance and
configuration data associated with the selected occurrence of the
item.
627
Figure F-1 shows a LID displaying the Default screen. This screen
Default Screen provides you with the 24-character controller name and the
controller’s current time, date, and alarm status. This screen appears
when the LID is powered up and communicating with the Comfort
Controller or there is no keyboard activity for ten minutes.
The LID consists of a keypad with 8 function keys, 4 operative keys,

Keypad and 12 numeric keys (0 to 9, ., and -) and a two-line, alphanumeric
Display liquid crystal display (LCD). Each line on the LCD can display up
to 24 characters.
The LID is illustrated in the figure below.
Figure F-1
Local Interface Device
Comfort Controller
14:00 10-10-94
EXPN TEST
S TAT
EDIT
1 2 3 S RVC
ALRM
FUNCTION FUNCTION
KEYS KEYS
SET SCHD 4 5 6 HIST ALGO
OPERATIVE
7 8 9 CLEAR
OPERATIVE
KEYS KEYS
_ . ENTER
0
NUMERIC
KEYS
628
The table below defines the purpose of the LID’s function keys.
Function
Table F-2
Keys Use
Function Keys
Status — gives you access to maintenance

S TAT values and configuration data for points.
TEST Alarm — gives you access to maintenance

and configuration data for
ALRM
alarms.
History — gives you access to maintenance

HIS T
and configuration data for history system
functions.
Service — gives you access to maintenance

SRVC and configuration data for service system
functions.
SET Setup — gives you access to configuration

data for setup system functions.
Schedule — gives you access to maintenance

SCHD and configuration data for schedules.
Algorithm — gives you access to mainte-

ALGO nance and configuration data for AO, DO ,
and global algorithms. It also give you access
to BEST++ custom programs.
EXPN Edit — gives you the capability to switch

EDIT from status mode to edit
(configuration) mode for the selected item.
(EXPN is not used in conjunction with the
Comfort Controller.)
629
The table below defines the purpose of the LID’s operative keys.
Table F-3
Operative
Operative Keys
Keys Use
Clear — performs three operations:

CLEAR
• Cancels a data entry before you press
Enter, thus leaving the current value
unchanged
• Returns a forced point to automatic

control
• Redisplays the previous menu level
Enter — performs two operations:

ENTER
• Selects the displayed item, thus displaying
either its maintenance or configuration
data, depending on whether you are in the
status mode or the edit mode.
• Accepts the value entered in a configura-

tion decision as new configuration data or
as a force.
Down arrow — displays the next configured

item or decision. When the last configured
item or decision is displayed, the LID re-
displays the first configured item or decision.
For example, when you press the down arrow
key while viewing the last configuration
decision of an algorithm, the LID re-displays
the first configuration decision.
Up arrow — Displays the previous config-

ured item or decision.
630
The table below defines the purpose of the LID’s numeric keys.
Operative
Table F-4
Keys Use
Numeric Keys
1 - 9 Numeric keys.
. Performs two operations:

• Separates items, such as an algorithm from
its occurrence or hours from minutes.
• Serves as a decimal point in numeric values.
_ Performs two operations:

• Negates the value of numeric keys.
• Clears current data entry value any time it is
not the first key pressed during the data
entry sequence.
Follow the instructions below to log on to the Comfort Controller.

How to Log On
1. Press 3, SET, and ENTER.
2. Key in your password and press ENTER.
Note: The default password is 1111. To change the default
password, press 3, SET, EDIT, and ENTER. Enter a
new password of up to 8 digits and press ENTER.
Follow the instructions below to set the Comfort Controller's address.

How to Set the
1. Press 7, SRVC, ENTER and EDIT.
Comfort
Controller's 2. Key in the CCN element number and press ENTER.
Address 3. Press the down arrow, enter the CCN bus number, and press
ENTER.
Follow the instructions below to log off the Comfort Controller.

How to Log Off
1. Press 3, SET, and ENTER.
2. Press the down arrow, 1, and ENTER.
631
You can view items in either the status (maintenance) mode or the
Viewing Modes edit (configuration) mode.
When you first power up the LID, it displays the Comfort

Status Mode Controller’s items in the status (maintenance) mode. You may view
the current value or status of an item in the status mode without
actually logging on to the Comfort Controller. Knowing the current
values or status of items can be useful when troubleshooting. For
example, you could determine if a point was forced.
Note: Not all items have maintenance data. If the item you
select does not have maintenance data, the LID will
display “No maintenance.”
You can access maintenance data in the status mode in two ways:
How to Access
Items in the Status • Pressing the appropriate function key (i.e., ALRM) once to
Mode access a category (i.e., alarms) and then continuing to press that
key (ALRM) to scroll through all the items in that category (i.e.,
Limit Alarm, Setpoint Alarm, Discrete Alarm, First Out Alarm,
Runtime Alarm, and Number of Starts Alarm). Press ENTER to
display the first maintenance decision.
Note: Scrolling by repeatedly pressing the function key,

displays the name of all the items in that category,
whether or not they are actually configured.
Scrolling by pressing the up or down arrow, displays

only the configured items within that category.
• Pressing the appropriate LID numeric key (i.e., 2) and the

appropriate function key (i.e., ALRM) to directly access an item
without having to scroll through all the items in that category.
Press ENTER to display the first maintenance decision.
632
Because the LID first displays items in the status mode when it is
Edit Mode powered up, you must log on to the connected Comfort Controller
and press the edit key to switch to the edit mode.
While in the edit mode, you can change the configuration of items.
For example, you could change the value of an algorithm’s configu-
ration decision.
For instructions on accessing items in the edit mode, refer to the

next topic, How to Access Items in the Comfort Controller.
Note: Not all items have configuration data. If the item you
select does not have configuration data, pressing the Edit
key will have no effect. The LID will display “No con-
figuration.”
The two ways to access items in the edit mode are the same as in the
How to Access status mode, except for an additional step — pressing the EDIT key.
Items in the Edit
Mode You can access configuration data in the edit mode in two ways:
• Pressing the appropriate function key (i.e., ALRM) once to

access a category (i.e., alarms), pressing EDIT, and then con-
tinuing to press that key (ALRM) to scroll through all the items
in that category (i.e., Limit Alarm, Setpoint Alarm, Discrete
Alarm, First Out Alarm, Runtime Alarm, and Number of Starts
Alarm).
Note: Scrolling by repeatedly pressing the function key,

displays the name of all the items in that category,
whether or not they are actually configured.
Scrolling by pressing the up or down arrow, displays

only the configured items within that category.
• Pressing the appropriate LID numeric key (i.e., 2), the appropri-
ate function key (i.e., ALRM), and EDIT to directly access an
item without having to scroll through all the items in that cat-
egory.
633
Use the table below as a reference to directly access Comfort Con-
Quick Access in troller items using a LID in either the status or edit modes. For
Either Status or Edit example, to access maintenance data for the AO—Heating VAV
Mode algorithm, press 6, ALGO, and ENTER. To access configuration
data for the AO—Heating VAV algorithm, press 6, ALGO, EDIT,
and ENTER. If your database consisted of two AO—Heating VAV
algorithms and you wished to access the second one, you could
press 6, . (decimal), 2, ALGO, EDIT, and ENTER.
Table F-5
Quick Access to Items
LID Function Keys
LID
Num. Algorithms Status History Service Alarm Setup Schedules
Key (ALGO) (STAT) (HIST) (SRVC) (ALRM) (SET) (SCHD)
1 ........ AO—Adaptive Control ......... Hardware Points ............ Alarm History ............ Function Definition ... Limit ...... Set Clock ..................... Occupancy
2 ........ AO—Cooling CV ................... Software Points .............. Analog Point Trace .... Channel Definition .... Setpoint .. Real Time Clock ......... Setpoint
3 ........ AO—Cooling VAV ................ Temperature Input ........ Discrete Point Trace .. System Definition ...... Discrete .. Controller Password .. Holiday
4 ........ AO—Fan Tracking ................ Milliamp Input ............... Consumable Channel Setpoint Definition .... First out ........................................ S/W Setpoint
5 ........ AO—Heating CV ................... Custom Milliamp Input . Internal Consumable . Database Control ....... Runtime ........................................ Network Time
6 ........ AO—Heating VAV ................ Voltage Input .................. Runtime Channel ...... Comfort Controller ... # of starts
7 ........ AO—Humidity Control ......... Custom Voltage Input .......................................... CCN Control
8 ........ AO—Mixed Air CV w IAQ ... Sensed Discrete Input .......................................... LID Preferences
9 ........ AO—Mixed Air VAV w IAQ Latched Discrete Input
10 ...... AO—Permissive Intrlock ...... Pulsed Discrete Input
11 ...... AO—Reset .............................. Milliamp Output
12 ...... AO—Shared Transducer ...... Custom Milliamp Output
13 ...... AO—Static Pressure .............. Voltage Output
14 ...... DO—Analog ........................... Custom Voltage Output
15 ...... DO—DX-Staging VAV .......... Discrete Output
16 ...... DO—Electric Heat CV .......... Stepper Motor Output
17 ...... DO—Electric Heat VAV ....... Discrete Software Point
18 ...... DO—Enthalpy Comparison .. Analog Software Point
19 ...... DO—Interlock ....................... Network Data Out
20 ...... DO—Lighting Control .......... Network Data In
21 ...... DO—Permissive Interlock
22 ...... DO—Pump Control
23 ...... DO—Prop Thermo
Note: If you are in the edit mode and wish to
24 ...... DO—Prop Thermo 2 Pipe switch to the status mode, you can
25 ...... DO—Prop Thermo 4 Pipe
26 ...... DO—Staged Thermostat press CLEAR or press EDIT again.
27 ...... DO—Staging Control
28 ...... DO—Time Clock
29 ...... DO—Time Clock w Check
30 ...... AOSS Schedule
31 ...... Network Broadcast
32 ...... Linkage/AOSS Schedule
33 ...... NTFC w Enthalpy Check
34 ...... Sensor Group
35 ...... WSM Air Source
36 ...... WSM Cool Source
37 ...... Custom Program
634
Appendix G
How to Configure
a Newly Installed
Comfort Controller
Using a LID
This appendix provides you with the procedures that are necessary
Introduction to configure a newly installed Comfort Controller using a Local
Interface Device (LID).
When installing a Comfort Controller, you must perform a number

of steps in a particular order. These steps are grouped into two
procedures:
• Creating the Comfort Controller’s database using the Service-

Config Tables
• Configuring the database using the configuration tables
The term define, as it applies to the Comfort Controller, means to

specify information about the items being selected in the Service-
Config Tables. You must specify information such as channel
types, sensor type or units, channel names, functions types and
function units. For example, the AO-Cooling CV algorithm’s
function type is 2 and its function units might be 2, which indicates
0−100%.
The term configure, as it is used in relation to the Comfort Control-

ler, means to specify to the Comfort Controller the information that
it needs to control and monitor HVAC devices in the desired man-
ner. For example when configuring the AO-Cooling CV algorithm,
you must enter information such as the AO point that is controlling
the air handler’s chilled water valve and the Sensor Group or space
temperature sensor that is providing the space temperature inputs.
In a newly installed Comfort Controller, the database is effectively a

blank page. Based on your application, you decide which algo-
rithms, points, alarms, schedules, or system functions are needed to
create the database. The database, therefore, only consists of the
features and functions required by your application.
635
You select and define the required items in configuration tables.
These tables are listed below.
Table G-1
Table Name Purpose
Configuration Tables
FNCxx-yy Create a combination of up to 24 of the

following functions in a Comfort Controller
1600 or up to 96 in a Comfort Controller
6400: AO, DO, and global (i.e., AOSS,
Linkage) algorithms, alarms, and time
schedules.
HWxx-yy Create up to 8 hardware points per table

(hardware points) for a total of 16 points in a Comfort Con-
troller 1600 or 64 points in a Comfort
Controller 6400
NUMSYS Create up to 16 holidays, up to16 network

time schedules, up to 4 Consumable tables
of up to 16 schedules each, up to 4 Runtime
tables of up to 16 schedules each, and up to
16 Loadshed tables.
SETPTDEF Create up to 16 setpoint schedules
SWxx-yy Create up to 8 software points per table

(software points) for a total of 16 points in a Comfort Con-
troller 1600 or 32 points in a Comfort
Controller 6400
UPDATEDB Update the Comfort Controller’s database
636
Follow the steps below to configure a newly installed Comfort
Configuration Controller. Only complete the steps needed to configure your
Process application. For example, if your application does not require
software points, then omit Steps 3, h through l.
Creating the Database 1. Complete the 1600 or 6400 Hardware and Software Point
Configuration Sheets located in Appendix H (Quickstart) of
this manual. Use these sheets as a reference when creating
the database.
2. Connect the LID to the Comfort Controller, log on, and set
the Comfort Controller's address. For instructions on con-
necting the LID, refer to the Comfort Controller Installation
and Start-up Manual. For instructions on how to log on and
set the address, refer to Appendix F in this manual.
3. Configure each HWxx-yy and SWxx-yy table by completing
the steps below. In these steps you are defining the hardware
points, and then the software points, in groups of eight points
per table.
a. Press 2, SRVC, EDIT (if in status mode), and ENTER to
display the HW01-08 Table.
b. Press ENTER to display the first configuration decision,
1st Channel Type.
c. Enter the channel type and press ENTER.
d. Press the down arrow to display the next configuration
decision, 1st Sensor or Units.
e. Enter the sensor type or units and press ENTER.
f. Repeat Steps a through e for each point.
g. Press CLEAR to back up a level, then press the down
arrow to access the HW09-16 Table.
If you must configure this table, repeat steps b through f.
If you do not have to configure more hardware points,
but do have to configure software points, press the down
arrow until the SW65-72 Table is displayed.
h. Press ENTER to display the first software point configu-
ration decision, 1st Channel Type.
i. Enter the channel type and press ENTER.
637
j. Press the down arrow to display the next configuration
decision, 1st Sensor or Units.
k. Enter the sensor type or units and press ENTER.
l. Repeat Steps h through k for each table.
4. Configure the SETPTDEF Table by completing the steps

below. In these steps you are defining the engineering units
(degrees F, % RH, inches of water, etc.) for each Setpoint
Schedule.
Note: Any Setpoint Schedule left at 0 is undefined and not

created.

display the first configuration decision in the SETPTDEF
Table, Setpoint 01 Units.
b. Enter the engineering units for the first Setpoint Sched-

ule and press ENTER.
c. Press the down arrow to display the next configuration

decision, Setpoint 02 Units.
e. Repeat Steps b and c as until you have defined the

engineering unit for all the Setpoint Schedules.
5. Configure the FNCxx-yy Table by completing the steps

below. In these steps you are defining each desired algo-
rithm, alarm, time schedule, broadcast and linkage routine in
the following steps:

display the first configuration decision in the table, 1st
Function Type.
b. Enter the function type and press ENTER.

decision, 1st Function Units.
638
d. Enter the engineering units and press ENTER.
An entry of 0 will display the function's default unit. For

a list of algorithm and alarm default units, refer to the
Algorithm and Alarm Units Summary Sheet located in
Appendix H of this manual.
e. Press the down arrow to display the next decision.
f. Repeat Steps b through e until you have defined all of the

functions.
6. Configure the NUMSYS Table by completing the steps below.

In these steps you are defining the number of Holiday Sched-
ules, Network Time Schedules, Consumables, Runtimes, and
Loadsheds required. You are also indicating if language
conversion will be performed.

display the first configuration decision in the NUMSYS
Table, Holidays.
b. Enter the quantity of desired Holiday Schedules and press

ENTER.

decision, Network Time Schedules.
d. Enter the quantity of desired Network Time Schedules

and press ENTER.
e. Press the down arrow to display the next configuration

decision, Consumables.
f. Enter the quantity of desired Consumables and press

ENTER.
g. Press the down arrow to display the next configuration

decision, Runtimes.
h. Enter the quantity of desired Runtimes and press ENTER.
639
i. Press the down arrow to display the next configuration
decision, Loadsheds.
j. Enter the quantity of desired Loadshed Tables and press

ENTER.
k. Press the down arrow to display the next configuration

decision, Language Conversion.
l. If necessary, press 1 to toggle the default from No to Yes.
7. Configure the UPDATEDB Table by completing the steps

below. In these steps you are updating the Comfort
Controller’s database with the items selected in the Service-
Config Tables.
a. Press 5 SRVC, EDIT (if in status mode), and ENTER to

display the configuration decision, Update Database.
b. Press the 1 to toggle the default from No to Yes.
Note: Although you may not see the LID toggle the value
from No to Yes because the change occurs so
quickly, you can verify that the update is occurring
by watching the Comfort Controller’s red LID blink
at the rate of 5 Hz. The download time varies with
the size of the database.
How to Change You must use a Network Service Tool or Building Supervisor III to
Default Point Names change default point names and descriptions. For instructions, refer
and Descriptions to the How to Configure a Newly Installed Comfort Controller
chapter of this manual.
Configuring the Using the configuration sheets and Table G-1 in this manual as
Database references, enter the appropriate values in the configuration tables
for points, algorithms, alarms, etc.
This completes the configuration process. You can now view point
values and statuses, and force points.
640
Appendix H
Quickstart is a handy reference that provides you with forms and

Quickstart
reference sheets to configure the Comfort Controller as quickly as
possible. This tear-out section provides the best way to quickly see
the big configuration picture plus some important details.
After reading Quickstart and photocopying and completing the

configuration sheets, refer to the How to Configure a Newly In-
stalled Comfort Controller chapter of this manual for step-by-step
instructions on configuring a Comfort Controller’s database using a
Building Supervisor or Network Service Tool. For instructions on
configuring a Comfort Controller’s database using a LID, refer to
Appendix G in this manual.
Quickstart consists of the following reference and configuration

sheets:
Reference Sheets
• Sample 6400 Hardware Point Configuration Sheet
• Function Types, Default Names and EEPROM Memory Usage
Summary Sheet
• Types/Units Reference Sheet
• Comfort Controller Function Requirements
• Algorithm and Alarm Units Summary Sheet
Configuration Sheets
• 1600 Hardware Point Configuration Sheet
• 1600 Software Point Configuration Sheet
• 6400 Hardware Point Configuration Sheet
• 6400 Software Point Configuration Sheet
The configuration sheets provide a convenient means of organizing

all hardware and software point configuration information used in
configuring the Service-Config Tables. A sample of a completed
6400 Hardware Point Configuration Sheet is included.
The Function Types, Default Names and EEPROM Memory Usage

Summary Sheet lists the eight-character default names, function
types, and memory usage of all the Comfort Controller functions. It
also lists the default names and memory usage of hardware and
software points, and miscellaneous tables, and the default names for
the Service-Config Tables.
641
The Types/Units Reference Sheet uses an at-a-glance approach to
provide the allowable entries for all sensor types and units. Refer to
Appendixes B through D for further details such as range, resolu-
tion, accuracy, and metric conversion limits.
The Comfort Controller Function Requirements sheet assists you in

determining the requirements for configuring a function by showing
you the function’s points, schedules, and system functions.
The Algorithm and Alarm Units Summary Sheet assists you in

configuring the FNCxx-yy Table’s Function Unit decision by indi-
cating the pre-configured algorithm and alarm engineering units.
Those units that are not pre-configured are indicated with **.
642
643
644
2/95
Types/Units Reference Sheet
Hardware Point Types for HWxx-yy Table Software Point Types for SWxx-yy Table
Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5 Type 6 Type 7 Type 8 Type 9 Type 10 Type 11 Type 12 Type 13 Type 14 Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4
Temp mA Cust mA Volt Cust Volt Sensed Pulsed Latch mA Cust mA Volt Cust Volt Discrete Stepper Discr Analog Net In Net Out
Inpt Input Input Input Input DI DI DI Output Output Output Output Output Motor Points Points Points Points
Analog Input Display Units Units

Type Sensor Type Units Displayed Displayed
Entry
1 YSI 10K Display Conversion Conversion
Thermistor 0 not used not used
Analog Input 1 °F °C Analog Output Units for Discrete for Discrete
Temperature Type Sensor Type 2 % % Type Device Type Entry Value 1 Value 0
Sensor 3 "H20 Pa
2 1K RTD 1 Relative Humidity 4 mA mA 1 Percentage 1 1 0
Temperature Sensor 5 ^F ^C 0 - 100%, 2 Start Stop
6 VOLTS VOLTS (4-20 mA output)
3 5K Thermistor 2 Static Pressure 7 psi Kpa 3 Stop Start
Temperature Sensor 8 gpm 1/min 2 Percentage 4 Enable Disable
9 gph 1/h 100% - 0%,
Sensor 10 kgpm m3/min 5 Disable Enable
3 0 to 10 Vdc (4-20 mA output)
4 PT100 Transducer 11 kgph m3/h 6 On Off
12 psig kPa 3 Pressure
Temperature (Maximum 13 lbs/hr kg/h
7 Off On
Sensor Impedance 14 klbs/hr kg/h
(0-22 mA output) 8 Open Close
>10K ohms) 15 Btu/hr kW 4 4-20 mA
5 MCI 10K 9 Close Open
16 MBtu/h kW
17 "H20 mmH2O
Maximum Load 10 High Low
Thermistor 4 Platinum RTD 600 ohms
Temperature Temperature 18 "Hg mmHG 11 Low High
Sensor Sensor 19 kWh kWh
20 kW kW 12 Alarm Normal
5 Pressure Sensor 21 degF degC 13 Normal Alarm
6 NTC 100K 22 %RH %RH
Thermistor 23 AMPS AMPS
14 Enable Emstop
6 T-56 Space
Temperature Temperature 24 VOLTS VOLTS 15 Emstop Enable
Sensor Sensor with Setpoint 25 CFM m3/min 16 Yes No
Adjustment 26 CFH m3/h
27 fpm m/sec
Analog Output 17 No Yes
28 kcfm m3/min Type Device Type
18 True False
29 kcfh m3/h
30 tons tons 1 Percentage 19 False True
31 tons/h tons/h 0 - 100%, 20 Analog Discrete
32 rpm rpm 2 - 10 V
Analog Input 33 %open %open
21 Nonlin Linear
Setpoint 34 hours hours 2 Percentage 22 Energy Flow
Type Sensor Type
Type 35 gals liters 100% - 0%, 23 Invert Normal
1 Relative Humidity 36 Btu/lb kJ/kg 2 - 10 V
37 gps 1/sec 24 Blank Blank
Sensor 38 sqft m2
(2-wire, 4-20 mA input) 3 Pressure 25 Dirty Clean
39 CFM 1/sec
40 sec sec 0 - 11V 26 Heat Cool
2 Static Pressure Sensor 41 Hz Hz
27 Up Down
42 min min 4 0 - 10 Vdc
43 hours hours
28 Fast Slow
3 4-20 Milliamp Function 29 Auto Manual
44 rpm rpm
Transducer Units 45 kWh/p kWh/p 30 Auto On
46 pulses pulses
4 Platinum RTD 47 uS uS 31 Brine Water
Temperature Sensor 48 pH pH
32 Full Reduce
49 usec usec
50 steps steps 33 CCN Local
5 Pressure Sensor 51 feet meters 34 Tone Pulse
(2-wire, 4-20 mA input) 52 GPM LPS
53 in Hg kPag
35 Or And
54 tons kW 36 Metric US
55 tons KCal/min 37 Slave Master
56 no units no units
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
Index
Index
DO-Pump Control 369

DO-Staged Thermostat 381
DO-Staging 393
1600 Hardware Point Configuration Sheet 14,16, 641, 649
DO-Time Clock 406
1600 Software Point Configuration Sheet 14, 16, 641, 650
DO-Time Clock with Check 413
6400 Hardware Point Configuration Sheet14, 16, 641, 651
function types 94
6400 Software Point Configuration Sheet 14, 16, 641, 652
global algorithms
A function types 94
Linkage/AOSS Schedule 444
Accuracy Network Broadcast 440
input/output devices 617 NTFC w Enthalpy Check 466
Adding the Comfort Controller 14 Occupancy 477
Address Setting 14, 21 Sensor Group 478
AI/AO Display Units WSM Air Source 484
allowable entries 622 WSM Cool Source 490
Airside Linkage 484 Allowable Entries
Alarm Description Index 624 AI/AO display units 622
Alarm Level 624 DI/DO display units 623
Alarm Message 624 ALRMDEF Table 624
Alarm Source 624 Analog Software Point 28
Alarms description 28
definition 511 maintenance decisions, description of 28
Discrete State 512 maintenance decisions, list of 28
First Out alarm 520 typical application 28
Limit alarm 529 Analog Trace Point 566
Number of Starts alarm 538 configuration decisions, description of 567
Runtime alarm 545 configuration decisions, list of 566
Setpoint Limit alarm 552 description 566
Algorithm maintenance decisions, description of 569
definition 9, 93 maintenance decisions, list of 566
Algorithm and Alarm Units Summary Sheet 641 AO-Adaptive Control 95
Algorithms configuration decisions, description of 98
analog algorithms configuration decisions, list of 96
AO-Adaptive Control 95 description 95
AO-Cooling CV 105 maintenance decisions, description of 102
AO-Cooling VAV 118 maintenance decisions, list of 96
AO-Fan Tracking 131 typical application 95
AO-Heating CV 141 AO-Cooling CV 105
AO-Heating VAV 155 configuration decisions, description of 109
AO-Humidity Control 170 configuration decisions, list of 106
AO-Mixed Air CV w IAQ 179 description 105
AO-Mixed Air VAV w IAQ 197 maintenance decisions, description of 114
AO-Permissive Intrlock 213 maintenance decisions, list of 107
AO-Reset 221 typical application 105
AO-Shared Transducer 231 AO-Cooling VAV 118
AO-Static Pressure 247 configuration decisions, description of 122
function types 93 configuration decisions, list of 119
discrete algorithms description 118
DO-Analog Comparison 255 maintenance decisions, description of 127
DO-DX Staging VAV 262 maintenance decisions, list of 120
DO-Electric Heat CV 278 typical application 118
DO-Electric Heat VAV 294 AO-Fan Tracking 131
DO-Enthalpy Comparison 311 configuration decisions, description of 134
DO-Interlock 317 configuration decisions, list of 131
DO-Lighting Control 322 description 131
DO-Permissive Intrlock 326 maintenance decisions, description of 137
DO-Proportional Thermostat 335 maintenance decisions, list of 132
DO-Proportional Thermostat 2 Pipe 347 typical application 131
DO-Proportional Thermostat 4 Pipe 358
653
AO-Heating CV 141 maintenance decisions, description of 253
configuration decisions, description of 145 maintenance decisions, list of 248
configuration decisions, list of 142 typical application 247
description 141 AOSS Schedule 423
maintenance decisions, description of 151 Adaptive Optimal Start 430, 436
maintenance decisions, list of 143 Adaptive Optimal Stop 431, 437
typical application 141 AOSS Setpoint Schedule 435
AO-Heating VAV 155 AOSS Time Schedule 433
configuration decisions, description of 159 configuration decisions, description of 429
configuration decisions, list of 156 configuration decisions, list of 426
description 155 description 423
maintenance decisions, description of 165 factors that affect offset calculations 424
maintenance decisions, list of 157 K Factor 424
typical application 155 maintenance decisions, description of 432
AO-Humidity Control 170 maintenance decisions, list of 426
configuration decisions, description of 173 start mode 424
configuration decisions, list of 170 stop mode 424
description 170 T56 Slider Bias 432, 439
maintenance decisions, description of 176 typical application 425
maintenance decisions, list of 171
typical application 170 B
AO-Mixed Air CV w IAQ 179
configuration decisions, description of 184 BEST++ 12
configuration decisions, list of 181 downloading 22
description 179 Broadcast 440
maintenance decisions, description of 192 enabling time 588
typical application 180 C
AO-Mixed Air VAV w IAQ 197
CCN Compatibility 613
configuration decisions, description of 201
Comfort Controller
configuration decisions, list of 198
1600
description 197
description 7
maintenance decisions, description of 208
supported sensors and devices 7
6400
typical application 198
description 5
AO-Permissive Intrlock 213
HOA (Hand-Off-Auto) 7
supported sensors and devices 6
supported UT203 FID Modules 7
description 213
database description 9
function requirements, summary of 641
language conversion 12
operator interfaces 5
AO-Reset 221
purpose 5
types 5
Comfort Controller Function Requirements 641
description 221
Communication Status, determining 591
Configuring
Alarms 511, 624
Discrete State alarm 512
AO-Shared Transducer 231
First Out alarm 520
Limit alarm 529
Number of Starts alarm 538
description 231
Runtime alarm 545
Setpoint Limit alarm 552
algorithms 93
AO-Adaptive Control 95
AO-Static Pressure 247
AO-Cooling CV 105
AO-Cooling VAV 118
AO-Fan Tracking 131
description 247
AO-Heating CV 141
654
AO-Heating VAV 155 voltage output 89
AO-Humidity Control 170 procedure 14
AO-Mixed Air CV w IAQ 179 schedules 495
AO-Mixed Air VAV w IAQ 197 Holiday Schedule 496
AO-Permissive Intrlock 213 Network Time Schedule 498
AO-Reset 221 Occupancy Schedule 501
AO-Shared Transducer 231 Setpoint Schedule 499
AO-Static Pressure 247 Time Schedule 501
AOSS Schedule 423 Service-Config Tables 10, 13, 16
DO-Analog Comparison 255 FNCxx-yy Table 16, 93, 511
DO-DX Staging VAV 262 HWxx-yy Table 16
DO-Electric Heat CV 278 NUMSYS Table 17
DO-Electric Heat VAV 294 SETPTDEF Table 17
DO-Enthalpy Comparison 311 SWxx-yy Table 18
DO-Interlock 317 UPDATEDB Table 18
DO-Lighting Control 322 SETPTDEF Table 17
DO-Permissive Interlock 326 SWxx-yy Table 18
DO-Proportional Thermostat 335 system functions 563
DO-Proportional Thermostat 2 Pipe 347 Analog Trace Point 566
DO-Proportional Thermostat 4 Pipe 358 Consumable 572
DO-Pump Control 369 Ctlr-ID 571
DO-Staged Thermostat 381 Discrete Trace Point 575
DO-Staging 393 Internal Consumable 580
DO-Time Clock 406 Real Time Clock 587
DO-Time Clock with Check 413 Runtime 592
Linkage/AOSS Schedule 444 UPDATEDB Table 18
Network Broadcast 440 Consumable 572
NTFC w Enthalpy Check 466 Configuration decisions, description of 572
Occupancy 477 configuration decisions, list of 572
Sensor Group 478 description 572
WSM Air Source 484 Creating the Database 13, 20
WSM Cool Source 490 Ctlr-ID 571
Building Supervisor III, with a 13 description 571
Comfort Controller, newly installed 13 maintenance decision 571
configuration tables 10, 20 pre-configured decisions, description of 571
Custom Milliamp Input pre-configured decisions, list of 571
conversion equation 30 Custom Milliamp Input Point 30
database 13 configuration decisions, description of 31
FNCxx-yy Table 16 configuration decisions, list of 30
HWxx-yy Table 16 conversion equation 30
Network Service Tool, with a 13 description 30
NUMSYS Table 17 maintenance decisions, description of 33
points 27 maintenance decisions, list of 30
analog software 28 Custom Milliamp Output Point 35
custom milliamp input 30 configuration decisions, description of 36
custom milliamp output 35 configuration decisions, list of 35
custom voltage input 40 conversion equation 35
custom voltage output 45 description 35
discrete output 50 maintenance decisions, description of 37
discrete software point 55 maintenance decisions, list of 35
latched discrete input 57 Custom Programming 12
milliamp input 59 Custom Voltage Input Point 40
milliamp output 63 configuration decisions, description of 41
network input 66 configuration decisions, list of 40
network output 70 conversion equation 40
pulsed discrete input 73 description 40
sensed discrete input 77 maintenance decisions, description of 44
stepper motor output 80 maintenance decisions, list of 40
temperature input 83
voltage input 86
655
Custom Voltage Output 45 configuration decisions, list of 263
configuration decisions, description of 46 description 262
configuration decisions, list of 45 maintenance decisions, description of 273
conversion equation 45 maintenance decisions, list of 264
description 45 typical application 262
maintenance decisions, description of 47 DO-Electric Heat CV 278
maintenance decisions, list of 45 configuration decisions, description of 282
D description 278
Database maintenance decisions, list of 280
configuration errors, encountering 19 typical application 278
configuring 10, 13 DO-Electric Heat VAV 294
creating 10, 13, 20 configuration decisions, description of 298
description 9 configuration decisions, list of 295
size 9 description 294
updating 15, 18 maintenance decisions, description of 304
uploading 19 maintenance decisions, list of 296
verifying 19, 22 typical application 294
DBSTATUS DO-Enthalpy Comparison 311
maintenance decisions, description of 573 configuration decisions, description of 313
maintenance decisions, list of 573 configuration decisions, list of 311
DBSTATUS Maintenance Screen 19 description 311
Default Names 644 maintenance decisions, description of 315
Default Names, summary of 641 maintenance decisions, list of 311
DI/DO Display Units DO-Interlock 317
allowable entries 623 configuration decisions, description of 319
Discrete Output Point 50 configuration decisions, list of 317
description 50 maintenance decisions, list of 317
maintenance decisions, list of 51 DO-Lighting Control 322
Discrete Software Point 55 configuration decisions, description of 324
maintenance decisions, description of 55 description 322
maintenance decisions, list of 55 maintenance decisions, description of 325
typical application 55 maintenance decisions, list of 322
Discrete State Alarm typical application 322
configuration decisions, description of 513 DO-Permissive Intrlock 326
configuration decisions, list of 512 configuration decisions, description of 329
Discrete Trace Point 575 typical application 326
configuration decisions, description of 576 DO-Proportional Thermostat 335
maintenance decisions, description of 578 control modes 335
maintenance decisions, list of 575 description 335
DO-Analog Comparison 255 maintenance decisions, description of 344
configuration decisions, description of 258 maintenance decisions, list of 337
configuration decisions, list of 256 operating modes 335
maintenance decisions, description of 260 DO-Proportional Thermostat 2 Pipe 347
typical applications 255 configuration decisions, list of 348
DO-DX Staging VAV 262 control modes 347
656
maintenance decisions, description of 356 F
operating modes 347 First Out Alarm
typical application 348 configuration decisions, description of 521
DO-Proportional Thermostat 4 Pipe 358 configuration decisions, list of 520
control modes 358 maintenance decisions, list of 521
maintenance decisions, description of 367 Flow Diagrams
maintenance decisions, list of 360 interpreting 10
operating modes 358 FNCxx-yy Table 15, 16, 93, 511
typical application 359 Force Levels
DO-Pump Control 369 points 33
activating primary pump 369 Function Requirements 646, 647
configuration decisions, description of 373 Function Types 644
description 369 G
maintenance decisions, list of 371 Global Algorithms
typical application 370 AOSS Schedule 423
DO-Staged Thermostat 381 Linkage/AOSS Schedule 444
configuration decisions, description of 385 Network Broadcast 440
configuration decisions, list of 382 NTFC w Enthalpy Check 466
control modes 381 Occupancy 477
description 381 Sensor Group 478
maintenance decisions, description of 391 WSM Air Source 484, 493
maintenance decisions, list of 383 WSM Cool Source 490
operating modes 381
typical application 382 H
DO-Staging 393
Hardware and Software Point Configuration
Sheets 14, 16, 649, 650, 651, 652
Holiday
description 393
determining if today is a holiday 591
determining if tomorrow is a holiday 591
Holiday Schedule
DO-Time Clock 406
description 496
description 406
HWxx-yy Table 15, 16
maintenance decisions, list of 407 I
DO-Time Clock with Check 413 Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) 179, 190, 196, 197, 206, 211
configuration decisions, description of 416 Initializing the Controller 21
configuration decisions, list of 414 Internal Consumable 580
description 413 configuration decisions, description of 581
maintenance decisions, description of 420 configuration decisions, list of 580
maintenance decisions, list of 414 description 580
typical application 413 maintenance decisions, description of 582
Downloading maintenance decisions, list of 581
BEST++ 22 permissible display units 580
controller 21
existing database 20 L
status messages 21
Language Conversion 12
E Latched Discrete Input Point 57
description 57
Engineering Units maintenance decisions, description of 57
input/output devices 617
657
maintenance decisions, list of 57 Milliamp Input Point 59
LID 627 configuration decisions, list of 59
accessing items description 59
directly (reference chart) 634 maintenance decisions, description of 60
edit mode 633 maintenance decisions, list of 59
status mode 632 Milliamp Output Point 63
configuring description 63
Comfort Controller, newly installed 635 maintenance decisions, description of 63
default screen 628 maintenance decisions, list of 63
edit (configuration) mode 632 Mixed Air Dampers 179, 197
function keys 629 Modify
logging on 631 controller 20
menu structure 627 point descriptions 19
numeric keys 631 Service-Config Tables 20
operative keys 630 Morning Warm-up 294, 307
status (maintenance) mode 632 description 155
LID Processor maintenance decisions 166
configuration decisions, list of 583 N
description 583
maintenance decisions, description of 586 Network Broadcast 440
Limit Alarm configuration decisions, list of 440
description 529 maintenance decisions, list of 440
maintenance decisions, list of 530 Network Input Point 66
Linkage/AOSS Schedule 444 configuration decisions, list of 66
Adaptive Optimal Start 449, 454 description 66
Adaptive Optimal Stop 452, 462 maintenance decisions, description of 67
applicable algorithms 445 maintenance decisions, list of 66
configuration decisions, description of 449 Network Output Point 70
Linkage Setpoint Schedule 457 description 70
Linkage Time Schedule 456 maintenance decisions, description of 71
maintenance decisions, description of 453 maintenance decisions, list of 70
maintenance decisions, list of 446 typical application 70
Local Interface Device 627 Network Time Schedule
accessing items description 498
directly (reference chart) 634 Night Time Free Cooling 466
edit mode 633 NTFC w Enthalpy Check 466
status mode 632 configuration decisions, description of 469
configuring configuration decisions, list of 466
Comfort Controller, newly installed 635 description 466
default screen 628 maintenance decisions, description of 474
edit (configuration) mode 632 maintenance decisions, list of 467
function keys 629 typical application 466
logging on 631 Number of Starts Alarm
menu structure 627 configuration decisions, description of 539
numeric keys 631 configuration decisions, list of 538
operative keys 630 description 538
status (maintenance) mode 632 maintenance decisions, description of 543
M typical application 538
NUMSYS Table 15, 17
Memory Usage, summary of 641
658
O R
Occupancy 477 RAM flush 20
Occupancy Schedule Ranges
configuration rules 502, 503 input/output devices 617
description 501 Real Time Clock 587
maintenance decisions, description of 507 configuration decisions, description of 588
sample 503 configuration decisions, list of 587
timed override 501, 504, 506, 507, 509 description 587
typical application 502, 503 maintenance decisions, description of 590
Operator Interfaces 5 maintenance decisions, list of 587
Resolutions
P input/output devices 617
Runtime 592
Point Configuration Sheets 14, 16 configuration decisions, description of 592
Point Descriptions configuration decisions, list of 592
modifying 19 description 592
Points Runtime Alarm
analog software 28 configuration decisions, description of 546
custom milliamp input 30 configuration decisions, list of 545
custom milliamp output 35 description 545
custom voltage input 40 maintenance decisions, description of 550
custom voltage output 45 maintenance decisions, list of 546
discrete output 50
discrete software point 55 S
latched discrete input 57
milliamp input 59 Schedules
milliamp output 63 definition 495
network input 66 Holiday Schedule 496
network output 70 Network Time Schedule 498
pulsed discrete input 73 Occupancy Schedule 501
sensed discrete input 77 Setpoint Schedule 499
stepper motor output 80 Time Schedule 501
supported by 1600, number of 27 Sensed Discrete Input Point 77
supported by 6400, number of 27 configuration decisions, description of 77
temperature input 83 configuration decisions, list of 77
voltage input 86 description 77
voltage output 89 maintenance decisions, description of 78
PROM maintenance decisions, list of 77
upgrading 20 typical application 77
Pulsed Discrete Input Point 73 Sensor Group 478
configuration decisions, description of 74 configuration decisions, description of 481
configuration decisions, list of 73 configuration decisions, list of 479
description 73 description 478
maintenance decisions, description of 75 maintenance decisions, description of 482
maintenance decisions, list of 73 maintenance decisions, list of 479
typical application 73 sensor values-high, low, average 478
Q Service-Config Tables 10
accessing 14
Quickstart 14, 641 configuration errors, encountering 19
1600 Hardware Point Configuration Sheet 641 configuring 13, 14, 16
1600 Software Point Configuration Sheet 641 FNCxx-yy 15, 93, 511
6400 Hardware Point Configuration Sheet 641 HWxx-yy 15
6400 Software Point Configuration Sheet 641 modifying (caution) 20
Algorithm and Alarm Units Summary Sheet 641 NUMSYS 15
default names, summary of 641 order of 19
function types, summary of 641 SETPTDEF Table 15, 499
memory usage, summary of 641 SWxx-yy 15
Types/Units Reference Sheet 641 UPDATEDB 15, 21
659
Setpoint Limit Alarm maintenance decisions, list of 502
configuration decisions, description of 554 sample 503
configuration decisions, list of 552 timed override 501, 504, 506, 507, 509
description 552 typical application 502, 503
maintenance decisions, description of 559 Timed Override 501, 504, 506, 507, 509
maintenance decisions, list of 553 Types/Units Reference Sheet 641, 645
Setpoint Schedule U
biased input from T-56 sensor 499
configuration decisions, description of 500 UPDATEDB Table 15, 18, 21
configuration decisions, list of 500 Updating
description 499 database 15, 18
typical application 499 Upgrading PROM 20
SETPTDEF Table 15, 17, 499 Uploading
Setting the Address 14, 21 Comfort Controller 14
Software and Hardware Point Configuration database 20
Sheets 14, 16, 649, 650, 651, 652 Uploading the Database 19
Standard Discrete Output Point 50
Standard Input and Output Devices 617 V
Standard Milliamp Input Point 59
Standard Milliamp Output Point 63 Voltage Input Point 86
Standard Voltage Input Point 86 configuration decisions, description of 87
Standard Voltage Output Point 89 configuration decisions, list of 86
Stepper Motor Output Point 80 description 86
configuration decisions, description of 80 maintenance decisions, description of 87
configuration decisions, list of 80 maintenance decisions, list of 86
description 80 Voltage Output Point 89
SWxx-yy Table 15, 18
System Functions
W
Analog Trace Point 566 Waterside Linkage 490
Consumable 572 WSM Air Source 484, 493
Ctlr-ID 571 configuration decisions, description of 485
definition 563 configuration decisions, list of 484
Discrete Trace Point 575 description 484
function types 565 maintenance decisions, description of 486
Internal Consumable 580 maintenance decisions, list of 484
LID, additional functions 563 WSM Cool Source 490
Real Time Clock 587 configuration decisions, description of 491
Runtime 592 configuration decisions, list of 490
description 490
T maintenance decisions, description of 492
Temperature Input Point 83 maintenance decisions, list of 490
description 83
Time and Date, determining current 590
Time Broadcast
enabling 588
Time Schedule
configuration rules 502, 503
description 501
660
Reader's Your comments regarding this manual will help us improve future
editions. Please comment on the usefulness and readability of this
Comments manual, suggest additions and deletions, and list specific errors and
omissions.
Document Name: Publication Date:
Usefulness and Readability:
Suggested Additions and Deletions:
Errors and Omissions (Please give page numbers):
Date:
Name:
Title or Position:
Organization:
Address:
Fold so that the mailing address is visible, staple closed,

and mail.
Carrier Corporation
Carrier World Headquarters Building
One Carrier Place
Farmington, CT 06034-4015
Attn: CCN Documentation

Printed in U.S.A. 808 - 891 Rev. 04/99

I-Vu Link Overview and Configuration 808-891r1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

I-Vu Link Overview and Configuration 808-891r1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Comfort Controller

Overview and Configuration

© 1999, Carrier Corporation Printed in U.S.A. 808-891 Rev. 4/99

How To Configure Schedules ............................... 495

Configuration Sheets ............................................. 593

2. Revised the following figures:

• The block diagram for the AO–Mixed Air VAV w IAQ

• The block diagram for the DO–Prop Thermo 2 Pipe

4. In the AOSS Schedule algorithm's List of Maintenance

5. In the Linkage/AOSS Schedule algorithm's List of Maintenance

6. In the NTFC w Enthalpy Check algorithm's List of

This manual contains information about the operations of the Comfort

Chapter Name Page Description

Overview 1 Presents an overview of the manual and

Introduction 5 Provides an overview of the Comfort

How To 13 Provides the procedure for configuring

How to Modify 23 Describes the operations that change the

How To 27 Provides the following information for

How To 93 This chapter provides the following

How To 495 This chapter provides the following

How To 511 This chapter provides the following

How To 563 This chapter provides the following

Configuration 593 This chapter contains perforated

Appendix A 613 This appendix lists the CCN system

Appendix B 617 This appendix lists the engineering

Appendix C 622 This appendix lists the allowable

Appendix D 623 This appendix lists the allowable

Appendix E 624 This appendix lists alarm levels, alarm

Appendix F 627 This appendix describes the Local

Appendix G 635 This appendix provides instructions

Appendix H 641 This appendix, called Quickstart, is a

This manual makes reference to the following CCN manuals. All of

The Comfort Controller product family provides general purpose

You configure the Comfort Controller to contain a database of the

• Network Service Tool III

There are two types of Comfort Controllers:

Both controllers provide the same functions, such as:

40 I/O field points

The optional Comfort Controller 6400—HOA (Hand-Off-Auto)

• 8 Input • Low Voltage DSIO

* You must install High Voltage DSIO Module(s) in their own

Figure 2-4 Library 1. Select items Database

Algorithms An algorithm is a pre-engineered group of processes that provides

Each pre-engineered algorithm contains some combination of

As you create and configure the database, you answer a series of

After configuring the Service-Config Tables, you must configure

To determine the values to enter in the configuration decisions, refer

Flow diagrams are used in this manual to illustrate the flow of

Each block of data within an algorithm, alarm, or schedule repre-

One block’s output becomes another block’s input. Sometimes an

Sensor Group/ VAV Supply Air

High Humidity Sensor

Interpretation: If A=1 or B=1, then C=1 otherwise C=0

Interpretation: If D=1, then C=-3 otherwise C=0

The industry-proven, pre-engineered algorithms provide the type of

You can convert the Comfort Controller software to any language

When installing a Comfort Controller, you must perform a number

• Creating the Comfort Controller’s database using the Service-

The term create, as it applies to the Comfort Controller, means to

The term configure, as it is used in relation to the Comfort Control-

In a newly installed Comfort Controller, the database is effectively a

2. Set the address of the Comfort Controller with the Network

3. Select Add, Controller, and Upload to add and upload the